JP2022049660A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characteristic with display means, related to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (a Pachinko machine) and a rotary drum game machine (a slot machine).SOLUTION: Display means 208 displays a moving image in accordance with a first music (Figures 120(k) to (l)) in a part of or a whole period of a period (a period from Figures 120(j) to (n)) when first music (music 1) is outputted by sound output means 120 in the first game state (a jackpot game state) when no prescribed condition is satisfied, and does not display a moving image in accordance with first music (Figure 120(o)) over the whole period when the first music is outputted by the sound output means 120 in the second game state (a non-jackpot game state).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 120

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, it is known that such a game table is equipped with a display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-200320

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
A sound output means that can output music,
Operation means and
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output a musical piece in the first gaming state.
The sound output means can output music in the second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
The display means is a part or all of the period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the first music is It displays a moving image according to
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music for the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (A) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of transitioning from a normal stage to a palace stage step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12 step by step. It is the figure which showed the example step by step from the sea zone to the sky zone and the big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the power is restored immediately after the power failure occurs during the confirmation display of the decorative design. It is a figure which shows an example of the event look-ahead notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the event look-ahead notice step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect A, and (b) is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect B. It is a figure which shows the case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed, and the case where it is not performed step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example stepwise from FIG. 22 (3). It is a figure which shows the other example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed step by step. It is a figure which showed the table about the button vibration effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a button vibration effect step by step. (A) is a figure which showed the table about the background effect, and (b) is the figure which showed the table about the mini character effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a mini character production step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the character vibration production B and the mini character production are performed step by step. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the effect button 136, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the upper button 1910 arranged in the operation key unit 190, (c). ) Is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the operation lever 137. It is a figure which showed the table which summarized the button-related image which is related to the effect button 136. It is a figure which showed the table which summarized the lever-related images related to the operation lever 137. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect, the type of the development effect, and the expectation of the jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the determination table of the introduction effect started during the normal reach. .. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation of the jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the cut-in effect performed during SP reach 1 and the expectation of the jackpot. , (C) is a diagram showing a determination table of the introduction effect started during SP reach 1. (A) is a diagram showing a gold cut-in image, and (b1) to (b4) are diagrams showing an introduction effect pattern 3. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the determination table of the introduction effect started during SP reach 2. It is a timing chart which shows each of four specific examples (A) to (D). It is a figure which showed the specific example shown in FIG. 37 (A) step by step. It is a figure which showed the specific example shown in FIG. 37 (B) step by step. It is a figure which showed the specific example shown in FIG. 37 (C) step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 40. It is a figure which showed the specific example shown in FIG. 37 (D) step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 42. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 37 (A) step by step. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 37 (B) step by step. It is a figure which shows the state when the front frame door 106 is opened while the operation effect is being performed. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a figure explaining the structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol. An example of a decorative symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether or not a normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct. 2 It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the table for judgment of right / wrong, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table for determination of special figure 1, and (e) is a figure which shows the distribution table for determination of special figure 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents, (f) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the variation pattern table which is out of special figure 1, and (g) is a figure explaining the transition of the variation pattern table of the special figure 1. be. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern selection table, and (a-1) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal time reach and loss fluctuation pattern selection table, (b). ) Is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a time saving variation pattern selection table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of b time saving / c time saving variation pattern selection table, (d). Is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table during crispy time, and (d-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table with reach during crisp time. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 61 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in a big hit game centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the electric support state (a time saving state) centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which takes on the transition to the crispy time and after the end step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which takes on the transition to the revival time and after the end step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production before and after the power cut off step by step. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the example of the advance notice effect in the decorative pattern variation display is performed step by step. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the example of the advance notice effect in the decorative pattern variation display is performed step by step. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the example of the advance notice effect in the decorative pattern variation display is performed step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (D) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) shows a household provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. A video game machine 5000 for use is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative symbol. An example is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figure is correct. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 81 step by step. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81. It is a figure which shows the decorative body which the 2nd effect movable body 8 has. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which the display mode of a variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of a reach title are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect that the animation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device step by step by the zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which super reach is performed step by step which the display mode of a hold icon and the light emission mode of a star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the 2nd effect movable body 8 are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect similar to the effect in which the 2nd effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 operates step by step. (A) is a diagram showing the title background color determination table of reach, (b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table of the light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing the kimono color determination table of the lord. .. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (A) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the example in which the time-saving game state ends shortly before the end of the time-saving game state and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 113 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the period length of a pull-back period is different from the example shown in FIG. 114 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where there is no pullback period step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a figure which shows the list of music which is selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. It is a figure which showed the example different from the example shown in FIG. 113 step by step, which continues from FIG. 113 (h). It is a figure which shows the example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure which can maintain a time saving game state is finished is a golden display mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step in the state that the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step during a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition. It is a figure which shows an example of a music reach step by step. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time saving state. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side).

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 47 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 1 to 47, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 1 to 1 to 47 are used. In the description using FIG. 47, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 47 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. A button lamp 138 that emits light from the button 136, an operation lever 137, a lever lamp 139 that is built in the operation lever 137 and emits light from the operation lever 137, and a ball for a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit. To prepare for. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full due to a game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided. The operation key unit 190 is provided with a decision button 1930 between the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920, and the decision button 1930 may function as a second effect button. Further, the upper button 1910 is operated when the volume of the speaker 120 is increased or the light amount of the frame lamp 122 is increased, and the lower button 1920 is operated when the volume of the speaker 120 is decreased or the light amount of the frame lamp 122 is decreased. It also functions as an operating means for adjusting the volume and amount of light.

The effect button 136, the operation lever 137, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the decision button 1930 shown in FIG. 1 are all in the initial positions before being operated. That is, when the effect button 136, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the decision button 1930 are operated (pressed) from the state where the respective operation surfaces (upper surface) are in the initial positions, the operation surfaces are lowered. Further, the operation lever 137 is in a state in which the vertical state is in the initial position, and is in an inclined state when operated. That is, as the direction of the cross, it may fall to the front side, to the back side, to the right side, or to the left side. It also falls diagonally between the directions of the cross.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The ball launch handle 134 is provided on the side opposite to the side on which the hinge portion 112 is provided. Further, the operation lever 137 is provided on the ball launching handle 134 side with respect to the effect button 136. When the front frame door 106 is opened, if it is provided on the hinge portion 112, it tends to interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed next to it, but it is provided on the ball launching handle 134 side opposite to the hinge portion 112. If it is, it will be less likely to interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed next to it.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to give a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 4) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 4). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. Of the signal between the power supply board case 184 and the payout control unit 600 and the card unit that house the power supply board 182 including the 178 and the RAM clear switch 180 that outputs the RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 606 for transmission / reception is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 10A, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a removable rail member 209 on the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the like are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, a time-saving medium-time lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium-time lamp HL are also arranged. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal drawing is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in a time-saving gaming state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a big hit game state or a short-time game state and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The high-probability middle lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232. , A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls. When the ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and it is assumed that the general winning opening 226b has won a prize, and the payout device 152 is driven to obtain a predetermined number (not shown). For example, one) ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the normal starting opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special drawing start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and closes the blade member 232a. Since it is impossible to enter the ball inside, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the normal map variation game is won and the normal map display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol. 2 Special figure When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally configured in the entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V pass switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward so that the game ball can pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passage switch VC, and when the V shutter VS is retracted (corresponding to the open state), the game ball is V. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 and has passed through a ball detection sensor (not shown) rolls to the V shutter VS after being guided to the front side, and may or may not pass through the V-pass switch VC. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V-passing switch VS is included in various sensors 320 (see FIG. 4), and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In the present embodiment, the V shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V shutter VS is opened (backward) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V prize can be won, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and if the V prize cannot be won, the control state is the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. It remains. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding a ball or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and is used as a winning opening (general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) or starting. Win a prize at the mouth (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), without winning any prize opening or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228. Reach 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, an upper effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, a lower effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and side effect devices 4 are arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, these effect devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, as an ordinary electric accessory. No. 2 special figure The various solenoids 332 including the driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the starting port 232, the door member 234a for the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, the driving means for driving the V shutter VS, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the second special figure.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. The game underframe lamp 452 also includes the button lamp 138 and the lever lamp 139 shown in FIG.

Further, the basic circuit 402 controls the drive of the sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various (upper / lower / side) effect devices 2 to 4. A drive circuit 422 for this purpose, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. , The detection signal from the lever sensor 427 that detects the operation of the operation lever 137 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, three types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure c", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special diagram a” and “special diagram b”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of special diagram 1. "Special figure a" is a 3 round (R) probability change jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol that has no chance of acquiring probability variation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the probability variation acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS opens (retracts) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS when the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game. It will be possible. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V prize is won), the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the shifted special figure high probability state shifts to the jackpot game. It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In the present embodiment, if the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time to maintain the open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a big hit scheduled (the same applies to "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS. Nothing is done (V prize cannot be won), and the control state remains the special low probability state after the big hit game is completed. As described above, it was necessary to win a V prize for the transition to the special high-probability state, but the transition to the normal high-probability state is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. That is, if a big hit is made, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and in the shifted normal figure high probability state, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure is the special figure a after the big hit game ends. For example, it is maintained 120 times, and in the case of special figure b, it is maintained for 50 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special symbol c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 1.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D". Figure B "). "Special figure A" is a 10R probability change jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired, and "special figure B" is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired. That is, if the special figure A wins a V prize in the 10th round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure A waits after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the symbol variation display of is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins a V prize in the second round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure symbol after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the variation display is performed 120 times here as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 2. "Special figure C" is the same general lost symbol as "special figure c", but "special figure D" is a special symbol called a time-saving symbol, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the jackpot symbol to be stopped is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game for a specific period, whether or not the "sudden time reduction" is won is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden time reduction" is won, the second special figure is displayed. The "time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game shifts to the high probability state of the normal figure after the end of the big hit game. The high-probability state of the normal figure is called a time-saving game state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving game state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a high probability state in the normal figure. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-time saving game state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the time saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving gaming state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time saving game state", it shall be excluded during the big hit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the electric chew opening number are performed, but at least one of these is performed. For example, the player's advantage becomes high, and the player may be in a time-saving gaming state. In this case, even if the execution is changed among the time-saving game states of a-time reduction, b-time reduction, and c-time reduction, which will be described later, among the time-saving game states, the normal-figure probability change, the normal-figure change-shortening, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening times are all performed. Either one or two of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening may be executed. Alternatively, if either the electric chew opening period is extended or the number of times the electric chew is opened is increased so that the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the game may be in a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure 120 times after the end of the subsequent big hit game is displayed. The time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the game is performed, and the game shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state) at the 121st time. Further, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (high probability state of the normal figure) is maintained until the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. At the second time, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal probability low probability state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols of all the special figures are set to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the game may remain in the non-time-saving gaming state without shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined time (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. Keep open for up to 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 234a in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 13 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 13". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special symbol b"), decorative symbols having the same number are located in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b. Stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns in which the decoration 13 is located (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1", "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2", etc.). On the other hand, when notifying the probability variation jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure a", 10R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure A", 2R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure B"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol c" or "special symbol C", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that the winner is suddenly won in a short time, three "decoration 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect in which the background displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background corresponding to the zone. There are a plurality of types of zone effect execution start timings, which may be started when the decorative symbol starts to change. When the sky zone effect is started at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, three "decoration 12" are displayed side by side at the timing when the previous decorative symbol change display ends. Hereinafter, the "decoration 12" may be referred to as a zone entry symbol. It should be noted that the zone effect may include an effect in which three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side. That is, in this case, the execution start timing of the zone effect is the timing when three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 5D shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of the normal map" (variable game of the normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored one set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area of this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), when the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234,226 and these starting openings 230,232,228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed, but the detection signals for the past three times are performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll keep it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is used. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214 performs the variable display of special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on. Is special figure B when the special figure A and 2R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5 (b) is on, special figure C when the loss flag is on, and special figure when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. D The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. .. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram A), a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram B), a lost symbol (special symbol C), and a time saving symbol (special symbol D). ), One of the symbols is confirmed and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds in the special figure A and 2 rounds in the special figure B), the V shutter is used for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the VS (a part of various solenoids 332), and the opening period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the V shutter opening time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be shown. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (excluding the first time, 9 rounds or 1 round) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). ) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

If the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time reduction number (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal figure variation short). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and many gaming balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 until the gaming balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit may increase and the gambling may increase, and this is to solve the problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the first special figure display device 212 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the first special figure display device 212 performs the variable display of special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a missed flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on. The first special figure is shown in FIG. 5 (a) so that the special figure a and the 3R jackpot flag B are on, the special figure b is turned on, and the missed flag is turned on, the special figure c is shown. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the display device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 has one of the 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), and the lost symbol (special symbol c). Confirmation is displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, 10 seconds) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device. In order to set the player to wait for a period of time while displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is finished, information indicating the effect waiting period is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. If the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. In the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, the special figure variable game with high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game with low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Decide whether to make a big hit or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Further, even in the case of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the (stop rotation) command, the values of various jackpot flags and missed flags are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning opening 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the first special drawing display device are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to 212, the second special figure display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the button / lever control process is performed. In the button / lever control process, the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is used as the effect button 136 or the operation key according to the detection result. The process of changing to the effect data according to the operation of the unit 190 or the operation lever 137 is performed.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to various effect devices 2 to 4 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 9D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously activated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 10B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described, although there are some overlaps with those described so far.

FIG. 11A is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when the setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability becomes 1/320, and the special figure The jackpot probability with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/84. The larger the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, while the probability of winning a map with a low probability of a map is 1/100, the probability of winning a map with a high probability of a map is 99/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11A, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is equal (50% each) in the special figure 1, and the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B in the special figure 2. Is 7: 3.

Further, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is opened only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the probability variation is attached, so that the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the special figure symbol variation display is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS is opened only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In both the special figure A and the special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the game state after the big hit game ends is the special figure high probability normal figure. It becomes a high-probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

After the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time reduction that starts after the big hit game is said to be a time reduction.

FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting port 230. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure start port 228, the player hardly wins the normal figure variable game and should not make a right-handed hit. The ball should be fired towards the left area (should be left-handed). The normal state is a non-time saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the normal figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim at the normal figure start opening 228, in the game area It is recommended to launch the game ball toward the right area where the starting port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 11A, the probability of obtaining a jackpot with probability variation (special figure a) is 50% in special figure 1, whereas in special figure 2, with probability variation. The probability of getting a big hit is 100%. Further, the number of times that the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game may be 50 times in the special figure 1, whereas it is always 120 times in the special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, the second special figure start opening 232 should be won and the big hit in the special figure 2 should be aimed at. .. Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side region (should hit right).

Further, in the case of a big hit game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right side area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided in the game area. Become. FIG. 11B shows that after the big hit game is completed, the time-saving game state may be maintained 120 times or 50 times.

Further, in FIG. 11B, when the special figure is not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving gaming state). That is, when the special figure is lost 950 times continuously, the time-saving gaming state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of the special figure loss being continued a predetermined time is called the play time, and this time reduction is called the b time reduction. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after the big hit, it can be shifted only once before the next big hit. Therefore, if the special figure loss of 950 times is continuous in the b time reduction game state, there is no new transition to the b time reduction game state, and the b time reduction game state so far is continued, and the special figure loss of 1100 times occurs. If it is continuous, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal state). It should be noted that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for shifting to the b time-saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the transition is made is called c time-saving. This time-saving symbol is a hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) (hereinafter, "special figure 2 remaining"). It may be referred to as "hold".) In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state, c time saving may be won. When the c time reduction is won, the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the "decoration 11" (time reduction decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 5 (c). ) Are displayed side by side and stopped. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the big hit game. The probability of winning suddenly is 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started after the big hit game ends, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time-saving game state when the 950 times special figure loss is continuously started are finished. In addition to the remaining hold, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started by suddenly winning in a short time will be won again in a sudden time reduction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol may be won even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 3). However, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols for shortening the time) shown in FIG. .. Then, in the present embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the b time short game state are prioritized over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the game is not changed to the time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, even if you hit right in a non-time saving game state, win a normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232 (electric chew), if you win in c time saving There is, and it shifts to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining hold but also a new special figure 2 hold may shift to the c time saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure variable game may not be won, or even if the normal figure variable game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be set. The opening pattern may be an extremely difficult (impossible) opening pattern to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the conditions for transitioning to the b-time-shortened gaming state are all satisfied by losing all in the c-time-shortened gaming state (becoming a special figure loss 950 times in a row), and the transition from the c-time-shortened gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is achieved. In some cases.

In this embodiment, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 even in the special figure high-probability normal-figure high-probability state, the special-figure low-probability normal-figure high-probability state, and the time-saving game state. However, the stop display may not be displayed. That is, the stop display may not be performed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving game state.

Subsequently, a specific game progress example in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of types of stages are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of transition from the normal stage to the palace stage. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) displays a background (a white background without a pattern) representing a non-time saving gaming state.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the hold number, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area (fourth symbol) of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right portion, and a symbol changing notification area (fourth symbol) of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right portion. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is off, it is displayed as "×". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 29. Further, the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol may be displayed by a display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device, a lamp, etc.) different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the downward fluctuation, which is the fluctuation direction, is performed at high speed. Further, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This mini symbol starts the variable display in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In other words, the variation display of the mini symbol is performed in correspondence with (synchronization) the variation display of the special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player depending on the variation state of the mini symbol. It is supposed to be done.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. The variable icon shown in FIG. 12 (1) is a round, non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, the green color of the icon is indicated by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the right (hereinafter the same). The variation icon suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display by the display mode. That is, the variable icon usually has a function as a notice depending on the display mode. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-time saving game state, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 218 of the special figure 1, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1, and the number of the holding icons of the special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the hold icon on the left side) becomes the older hold icon.

In FIG. 12 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 is a round patternless pattern. It is a white display mode. On the drawing, the whiteness of the icon is indicated by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the right (hereinafter the same). Further, the second hold icon h12 is a round, non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, the red color of the icon is indicated by diagonal cross-hatching (hereinafter the same). Further, the third hold icon h12 is a round, non-patterned and green display mode, which is the same as the display mode of the variable icon. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted. In addition, the red display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%, as described in the display mode of the variable icon.

In FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo-continuous effect is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern. The pseudo-continuous effect is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed multiple times in one variation display of the special symbol, and the result of one hit / fail judgment (lottery) is displayed. Despite the fact that there is, it is a variable display of the decorative pattern that makes it appear as if the result of the hit / miss judgment was displayed multiple times. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo-ream symbol (decorative symbol described as “NEXT”) suggesting a pseudo-ream effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the high-speed fluctuation in the variation display of the decorative symbol, it is not possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is, but in the temporary stop display, it is possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is. In the temporary stop display, the decorative design is swaying and moving at an extremely low speed. On the other hand, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, the blinking "-" indicating that the symbol in the special figure 1 is being displayed is continuously blinking. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (3), the display screen is blacked out and the decorative symbol cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. Also in FIG. 12 (3), the mini symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the blinking display of “-” indicating that the symbol in the special figure 1 is being displayed is continuously displayed. ..

Eventually, the blackout ends and the decorative design begins to change again. FIG. 12 (4) shows a state immediately before the blackout is completed and the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous production is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (4), the character "x2" indicating that the blackout is completed and the second fluctuation is started is displayed. Further, when the blackout is completed, in FIG. 12 (2), "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b where the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols displayed as a temporary stop is different from the combination of the decorative symbols when the re-variation is started. Here, the types of decorative symbols themselves in the middle symbol display area 208b are different. This difference makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the revariation display. Further, if the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped and the combination of the decorative symbols at the start of re-variation are the same, the player will again have a pseudo-continuous symbol when the blackout is completed. May be mistaken for the temporary stop display. However, as shown in FIGS. 12 (2) to 12 (4), by making the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped different from the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of starting the re-variation, such a game It is possible to prevent a person from misunderstanding. In FIG. 12 (5) following FIG. 12 (4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 12 (6), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is “decoration 5”. In FIG. 12 (7), the right symbol display area can be confirmed. A decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208c, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is "decoration 1". In the following FIG. 12 (8), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is “decoration 4”. In FIG. 12 (8), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation display). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 12 (9), a definite display is performed, and a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is completely stopped and displayed. That is, the decorative pattern does not move during the confirmation display. Even in this definite display, it is naturally possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is.

Further, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the confirmation display is started.

During the final display of the decorative pattern, a wipe effect for changing the stage is executed. In FIG. 12 (10), the wipe effect is started. In the wipe effect, the wipe display wp expands from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the wipe display wp covers the display screen and the wipe out wp disappears from the display screen. Will be executed. The wipe display wp overlaps and disappears from the decorative symbol and the hold icon, but the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the wipe effect. The wipe-in that started in FIG. 12 (10) is completed in FIG. 11 (11), and the decorative symbol and the hold icon are not visible in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (11). In the following FIG. 12 (12), the wipe-out is performed, and a part of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are becoming visible. A stage change occurs when the wipe-in is complete or when the wipe-out begins. In this example, the stage is changed from the normal stage to the palace stage. The decorative design that has become visible after the wipeout has started is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later.

When the wipe out is completed, the wipe effect ends. Further, when the wipe effect is completed, the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. FIG. 12 (13) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. In FIG. 12 (13), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the operation at the start of the variable display is performed at the start of the variable display. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 12 (13) is operated at the start of this fluctuation display, and is slightly moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction (upward). In the operation at the start of fluctuation, the decorative pattern is displayed in a recognizable state. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the downward variation display of the decorative symbol is performed following the operation at the start of the variation.

Further, since the stage was changed from the normal stage to the palace stage, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13) displays the character YM1 of the palace on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. .. The character YM1 of this lord is displayed as an animation. Further, in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of the decorative symbol is additionally displayed. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in which a display YM2 of a different character is additionally displayed for each type of decorative symbol. The operation at the start of fluctuation is performed with the combination. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the previous decorative symbol variation display (“Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1” shown in FIG. 12 (8)) and the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (Fig. A combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" shown in 12 (9) and the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. 12 (13). ), The display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed, which is different from "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1"). Here, the decorative symbols are the same, but the presence or absence of the display YM2 of a different character differs depending on the type of the decorative symbol, and the types of the decorative symbols are the same, but the display mode is different. The difference in the decorative symbols in this way makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the previous stop display and the start of the current variable display. Also, it will be easier to confirm that the stage has been changed.

In addition, in FIG. 12 (13), the mini symbol and the fourth symbol have already changed at high speed, but at the start of the fluctuation, the displayed mini symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed (display in FIG. 12 (9)). It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the symbol with the same display as. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 12 (9)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 12 (13)) is the same.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13), the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 12 (14) is an icon of the default display mode. Further, the icon that was the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and the icon that was the third hold icon h12 becomes the second hold icon h12.

In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize the displayed contents of the part that has begun to be seen by the wipe-out due to the effect display such as light emission (see FIG. 14 (7)), and when the wipe-out is completed, the effect display is also terminated and the displayed contents can be visually recognized. May be. Alternatively, the stage change may be performed when the wipeout is completed.

In FIG. 12 (14), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (15), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also here, in the lower left corner of each decorative symbol, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is additionally displayed.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (16) following from FIG. 12 (15), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. Also here, in the lower left corner of each decorative symbol, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is additionally displayed. In addition, the character YM1 of the lord who is displayed in animation is depressed.

In FIG. 13 (17), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 13 (17) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 13 (17) is an icon in a red display mode.

The period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" to the end of the final display (Fig. 12 (8) to Fig. 12) is the "Decoration 9-Decoration". It is longer than the period (FIGS. 12 (15) to 13 (16)) from the start of the temporary stop display of "2-Decoration 4" to the end of the final display.

In FIG. 13 (18), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

In the following FIG. 13 (19), the reach state is established, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the display YM2 of the princess character is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of the "decoration 2" that is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 13 (20), it has evolved into a super (SP) reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. In addition, the animation display of the character YM1 of the lord, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear, and the decorative design that had been displayed large in the center of the display screen is reduced to the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed. The mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (21), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal big hit such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" ("decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2"). The combination of the decorative symbols of "Special Figure b" (3R normal jackpot) is displayed as a temporary stop. Although the display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is not additionally displayed on the decoration 13, it may be additionally displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (22), a combination of normal jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed, and then a three-round jackpot game is started. (Fig. 13 (23)). When the big hit game is completed, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state).

In FIG. 13 (24), the big hit game is completed, and the state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (24) displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state.

Further, in FIG. 13 (24), the second special symbol start port 232 has a continuous winning of three balls, the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also has the decorative symbol. The variable display has started. The decorative design shown in FIG. 13 (17) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed (“decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2” shown in FIG. 13 (21)) and the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed (“decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2”) (FIG. 13 (22)). Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2 ") and the combination of the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) ("Decoration 2-" shown in FIG. 13 (24). It is different from decoration 2-decoration 2 "). Here, the types of decorative symbols themselves in the middle symbol display area 208b are different. In particular, the fact that the decoration 13 is not displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol does not give the player the misunderstanding that he has hit the jackpot again.

Further, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the change icon display area 280 on which the change icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 49" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 49 times. Further, a right-handed first display RH1 for prompting right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed.

In addition, although FIG. 13 (24) is a scene where the fluctuation has already started, the decorative design (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) and the mini by the time when the next fluctuation starts after the end of the big hit game. It is assumed that the symbol (“2-2-2”) and the fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a state where they can be confirmed. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 13 (22)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 13 (24)) is the same.

In FIG. 13 (25), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

The operation at the start of the variable display may be an operation in which the decorative symbol sways, an operation in which the decorative symbol expands or contracts, or the like, in addition to an operation in which the decorative symbol moves slightly in the direction opposite to the variable direction. In any case, it is an operation that can confirm the decorative pattern.

Next, an example of zone production will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a stepwise example from the sea zone to the sky zone and a big hit.

In this example, it is a time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and right-handed is recommended. In the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state, but in this example, the background corresponding to the zone is displayed. Further, on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the right-handed first display RH1 for prompting right-handed is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving game state remaining number of times display is also displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (1) displays the background of the sea according to the sea zone. Further, in FIG. 14 (1), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (1) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The second hold icon h22 is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 14 (2), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (3), the temporary stop display is performed in a state where three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 are aligned. It should be noted that there is one ball entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is increased to 3, and the holding icon h23 of the third eye is additionally displayed.

In the following FIG. 14 (4), the final display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is confirmed. The display starts. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x" indicating the deviation, and "256" is stopped and displayed in the mini symbol.

When the final display of the decorative pattern is started, the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen (FIG. 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes the fusuma image fs by the animation of closing the fusuma (FIG. 14 (5)). 6)). The background image, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12", and the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the fusuma image fs and cannot be seen. The display in is visible.

As shown in FIG. 14 (6), when the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the fusuma image fs, the zone shift is performed and the zone shifts to the empty zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (7), the sliding doors begin to open, the back of the sliding doors begins to be visible, and the sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a look-ahead notice with a higher expectation of a big hit than the sea zone. It should be noted that the decorative design or the background image may not be visible due to an effect display or the like until the sliding doors are fully opened. The timing of the zone transition may be the timing when the sliding doors are fully opened, or the timing according to the start of the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214.

In addition, the sliding doors begin to open, and in the back of the sliding doors, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed instead of the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12". It is beginning to be seen.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image fs disappears. In FIG. 14 (8), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (8) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is also "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed (“Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12” shown in FIG. 14 (3)) and the combination of the decorative symbols at the time when the final display is started (FIG. 14 (4)). ) And the combination of the decorative symbol when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (shown in FIG. 14 (8)). It is different from "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6"). Here, the types of all decorative patterns themselves are different. In this way, the decoration 12 is not displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that the zone entry symbol has stopped again. In addition, since the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol is the combination of the decorative symbols of the loose eyes indicating the loss, it is not necessary to give the player a misunderstanding that the player has made a big hit. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol matches the combination of the mini symbols stopped and displayed in FIG. 14 (4). However, it does not have to match, and the display of the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol may be a display that can be recognized as a loss at a glance (for example, a display of loose stitches).

In addition, in FIG. 14 (8), the mini symbol and the fourth symbol have already changed at high speed, but at the start of the fluctuation, the displayed mini symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed (display in FIG. 14 (4)). It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the symbol with the same display as. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 14 (4)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display and the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of (8) is started (the display immediately before FIG. 14 (8)) is the same.

At the stage when the sliding doors start to open and the back of the sliding doors begins to be seen (stage 14 (7)), the combination of decorative patterns remains the display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12", and the next At the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern of, it may become "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6".

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (8), the variation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol are also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 is a green display mode. Further, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h22 is now the first hold icon h21. The first hold icon h21 is a red display mode.

In FIG. 14 (9), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (9), the serif notice display sf1 is displayed. The serif notice is a normal notice that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display by the serif. If the dialogue notice here includes the dialogue "sun", the expectation of a big hit will be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (10), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. It should be noted that there are two balls entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is increased to 4, and the third hold icon h23 and the fourth hold icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 14 (11), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 14 (12), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (12) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 14 (13) is an icon in a red display mode. Further, the zone effect of the sky zone is continued, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the sky background.

The period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" to the end of the final display (Fig. 14 (3) to Fig. (7)) is "Decoration 7-Decoration". It is longer than the period (FIGS. 14 (10) to 11) from the start of the temporary stop display of "2-Decoration 9" to the end of the final display.

In FIG. 14 (13), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation. Also here, the dialogue notice, which is a normal notice, is given. The dialogue notice display sf2 in FIG. 14 (13) includes the dialogue "sun", and the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the dialogue notice display sf1 in FIG. 14 (9).

In the following FIG. 14 (14), the reach state is established, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 14 (15), it has evolved into a super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, the background display, the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared, and the decorative symbol that has been largely displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 step by step.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (16) following from FIG. 14 (15), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration" is displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as "7" is displayed as a temporary stop.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (17), a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. There is. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777".

In FIG. 15 (18), the opening effect of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the jackpot. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 that prompts right-handed is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit on the right side" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be.

In FIG. 15 (19), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. In the following FIG. 15 (20), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), and V prizes can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, which prompts the V-passing switch VS to pass the game ball.

In FIG. 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V-winning has been won. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed.

In FIG. 15 (22), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the character display of the end of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the big hit game, and is also displayed in this end effect.

When the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the special high-probability high-probability state. In FIG. 15 (23), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 15 (23) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot when the jackpot is hit first, "Decorative Figure 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (see FIG. 15 (17)). It is the same combination of decorative symbols as above, and the operation at the start of fluctuation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (23) displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "remaining 119" are displayed as the display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state.

In addition, although FIG. 15 (23) is a scene where the fluctuation has already started, the decorative design (here, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”” is shown before the next fluctuation starts after the end of the big hit game. ), The mini symbol (here, "7-7-7") and the fourth symbol shall be displayed for a moment in a state where they can be confirmed. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 15 (17)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 15 (23)) is the same. In FIG. 15 (24), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

As a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the end of the jackpot game and the start of the next variable display of decorative symbols, a combination representing a loss such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23') is used. It may be displayed. In FIG. 15 (23'), the operation at the start of fluctuation is performed by combining decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5". By doing so, the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed before the jackpot game is started (“Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed. A combination of a combination (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (17)) and a decorative symbol when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. It becomes different from "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5") shown in 15 (23'). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (23'), the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are different, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot again.

It should be noted that the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed before the big hit game is started (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed (FIG. A combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" shown in 15 (17) and the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. 15 (23). Even if the "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5") shown in') is different, the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are the final display before the jackpot game is started and the next decoration. The display should be the same as when the variable display of the symbol is started (start time or immediately after the start from the start time).

Subsequently, a modified example of the progress example of the game shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 will be described.

FIG. 15 (3') is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (3), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display is performed with three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 aligned.

In the following FIG. 15 (5'), the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen in the state where the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 continues, that is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol continues. is doing. Then, an animation in which the sliding doors are closed is displayed while the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern continues.

When the sliding doors are completely closed as shown in FIG. 15 (6'), the definite display of the special figure 2 on the second special figure display device 214 is started, and the special figure 2 is displayed in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. The fourth symbol of FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed by "x" indicating the disconnection, and "256" is stopped and displayed on the mini symbol. The display of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the fusuma image fs and is not visible.

FIG. 15 (7') is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (7), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sliding doors start to open and the stopped display "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" begins to be seen. .. In addition, "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may begin to appear.

As described above, the temporary stop display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may be terminated in a state where the display of the decorative pattern is invisible (difficult to see). In other words, the definite display or the definite display of the decorative symbol on the special symbol display device may be started in a state where the decorative symbol cannot be seen (a state in which it is difficult to see). Then, when the display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, the display may be different from the temporary stop display. It should be noted that not only the temporary stop display of "decoration 12" but also other decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 11", "decoration 13", etc.) are similarly invisible (difficult to see). good.

Blackout (FIG. 12 (3)), wipe effect (FIGS. 12 (10) to (12)), and fusuma image fs animation (FIG. 14 (5) to 12) are used to make the decorative pattern invisible. Although the figure (7)) and the effect display are taken as examples, the effect of making the decorative pattern invisible is not limited to these.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example in which a power failure occurs during the final display of the decorative symbol, but the power is immediately restored.

FIG. 16 (9-1) is in the same state as in FIG. 12 (9), and a combination of lost decorative patterns such as “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is confirmed and displayed. A power failure occurs while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 16 (9-2) shows that a power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the character display of "preparing for restoration" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9-3). .. Eventually, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 16 (13'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 16 (13') is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of power restoration in FIG. 16 (13') is different from the combination of decorative symbols (“Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1”) that was confirmed and displayed at the time of power failure, and the power is cut off. It is also different from the combination of decorative symbols (combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 12 (13)) at the time of starting the variation display of the next decorative symbol when the above does not occur. The combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" corresponds to the combination of initial symbols and is always displayed at the time of power restoration. This combination of initial symbols is displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started. It should be noted that the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12. Is also the default display mode. In addition, the stage has not been changed, and the character YM1 of the lord and the display YM2 of the character different for each type of decorative pattern are not displayed.

Note that FIG. 16 (13') shows a scene in which the fluctuation has already started, but the decorative design (here, "decoration 1") is displayed before the next fluctuation starts after the character display of "preparing for return" is completed. -Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "), mini-design (here," 1-2-3 ") and the fourth design shall be displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol at the time of power restoration is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 16 (9-1)) which were confirmed and displayed at the time of power interruption, and the electricity is also displayed. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbol and the display of the fourth symbol (the display immediately before FIG. 12 (13)) when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started when the disconnection does not occur.

FIG. 16 (4-1) is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (4), and a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is confirmed and displayed. Here, too, the power is cut off while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 16 (4-2) shows that a power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the character display of "preparing for restoration" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (4-3). .. Eventually, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 16 (8'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 16 (8') is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of the decorative symbols at the time of power recovery in FIG. 16 (8') is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" which is the combination of the above-mentioned initial symbols. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3") when the power is restored and the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started is the combination of the decorative symbols that was confirmed and displayed at the time of power failure ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"). Unlike "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12"), the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 14 (8) when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol when the power failure does not occur ("Decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12"). It is also different from decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6 "). It should be noted that the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Further, also in FIG. 16 (8'), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode and the hold icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. In addition, the zone production itself is not performed, and the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed.

Note that FIG. 16 (8') shows a scene in which the fluctuation has already started, but the decorative design (here, "decoration 1") is displayed before the next fluctuation starts after the character display of "preparing for return" is completed. -Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "), mini-design (here," 1-2-3 ") and the fourth design shall be displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol at the time of power restoration is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 16 (4-1)) which were confirmed and displayed at the time of power interruption, and the electricity is also displayed. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbol and the display of the fourth symbol (the display immediately before FIG. 14 (8)) when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started when the disconnection does not occur.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the initial symbols is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", but the combination of the initial symbols is not limited to this combination, and other combinations may be used. However, a combination that reminds us of a big hit is not preferable, and it is desirable to use a combination that cannot be displayed on the variable display.

According to the above description
"A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display for variable display of a decorative symbol.
The display means is a decorative symbol confirmation display that displays the decorative symbol in a confirmable state [for example, a display when the display of the decorative symbol disguise display starts, a display in the operation at the start of the variable display, and a decorative symbol disguise display. Temporary stop display, stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed after the decorative pattern disguise display is completed, display that combines temporary stop display and confirmed display] is executed.
The decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display may differ from the decorative symbol confirmation display when the next decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 12 (2) and (4)). , FIG. 12 (9) and FIG. (13), FIG. 13 (22) and FIG. (24), FIG. 14 (4) and FIG. (8), FIG. 15 (17) and FIG. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, if the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a decorative symbol of a pattern, when the next decorative symbol variation display is started, the player is given a decoration of the pattern. You don't have to give the misunderstanding that you got a big hit by the design. In addition, if the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a decorative symbol representing a big hit, the player is misunderstood that the big hit is made again when the next decorative symbol variation display is started. No need.

The display of the decorative symbol may be a display by a combination of the decorative symbols. Further, the decorative pattern may be a number, a symbol, or a pattern.

The decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be a display suggesting the result of the lottery.

The decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be entirely included in the decorative symbol variation display, may be partially included in the decorative symbol variation display, or may be included in the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be included in the stop display of the decorative symbol that is started following the decorative symbol variation display.

"The difference between the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display and the decorative symbol confirmation display when starting the next decorative symbol variation display is the type of decorative symbol [for example, decoration 1 to decoration 13]. Is the same, and the display mode [for example, the presence / absence of the character display YM2] may not be different, but the type of the decorative symbol may be different. ”The type of the decorative symbol referred to here is a type representing a number. It may be the type of symbol, or the type of pattern.

The display in which the decorative symbol can be confirmed by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol is included in the decorative symbol confirmation display. However, if the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol disappears or disappears, it is not included in the decorative symbol confirmation display.

again,
"The decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display may be the same as the decorative symbol confirmation display when the next decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, the same figure (17) as in FIG. 13 (16). ), FIG. 14 (11) and the same figure (12), FIG. 15 (17) and the same figure (23)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"When the display means recovers from a power failure while displaying the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display, a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative symbol confirmation display [for example, FIG. 16 ( 13') and the combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" shown in the same figure (8')] may be performed. That is, the first display of the decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (9) or FIG. 14 (4). "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12"] and the second display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern variation display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-" in FIG. 12 (13). It may be different from "Decoration 4-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" in FIG. 14 (8). If the power is restored during the display, as the decorative symbol confirmation display, a third display different from the first display and the second display [for example, "decoration 1-decoration" in FIG. 16 (13'). 2-Decoration 3 "or" Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "] in FIG. 16 (8') may be displayed. "
"The first decoration is when the first decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol confirmation display when starting the next decorative symbol variation display are different. The display time of the first decorative symbol confirmation display [for example, the period from FIG. 12 (8) to FIG. 12 (12) is longer than when the symbol confirmation display and the second decorative symbol confirmation display are the same. The period from FIG. 12 (15) to FIG. 13 (16) is longer than the period from FIG. 14 (3) to FIG. (7), and the period from FIG. 14 (10) to FIG. ] May be long. "
Further, the decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be a temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol or a final stop display (confirmed display) of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, the display may be from the start of the display of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the end of the display of the main stop. The display time of the temporary stop display of the decorative design may differ. For example, the display time may be 0 seconds or 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less. On the other hand, the display time of the display of the main stop of the decorative pattern may be constant. However, the display of the main stop of the decorative symbol may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display for notifying a small hit), or a specific second display (for example, a display for notifying a big hit). It may be long in the case of a display in which an effect such as a stage transition or a zone change is performed).

again,
"The display means also has a different symbol variable display [for example, a fourth symbol (a notification area during symbol change in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284), a mini symbol] that variablely displays another symbol different from the decorative symbol. It ’s feasible and it ’s feasible.
The display means executes a separate symbol confirmation display [for example, a display immediately before FIGS. 12 (9) to 12 or 13), which displays the separate symbol in a confirmable state. ,
Another symbol confirmation display after starting the separate symbol variation display [for example, the fourth symbol or mini symbol in FIGS. 12 (9) to 12]] and another symbol when the next separate symbol variation display is started. It is the same as the confirmation display [for example, the fourth symbol or the mini symbol immediately before FIG. 12 (13)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed in the separate symbol confirmation display after starting the separate symbol variation display [for example, decoration 11]. -Decoration 13 or pseudo-ream pattern (decorative pattern described as "NEXT")] may be used. "
In addition, the display of another symbol (separate symbol variation display, separate symbol confirmation display) may be a display by a combination of different symbols, or may be a display by one different symbol. Further, the separate symbol may be a number or a symbol.

Further, the display of the separate symbol (separate symbol variation display, separate symbol confirmation display) may be a display displayed by other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display means (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to another symbol, or it may be a sub-display means when the display means is used as the main display means.

Next, the event look-ahead notice executed after the end of the loss reach effect will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the event look-ahead notice step by step. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

In FIG. 17 (1), the symbol variation display is performed in the first special symbol display device 212, and the decoration symbol variation display is also performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (1), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the three hold icons h11 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. ~ H13 is displayed. These three hold icons h11 to h13 are also default display modes.

In the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17 (1), the hold icon change notice described later and the zone effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 15 may be executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (2), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. 17 (3), “decoration 5” is displayed. -The combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 17 (1) to 17 (2) is a normal variation, and the time length of the decorative symbol variation display is shorter than the normal variation (for example, 5 seconds). The period of the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is shorter in the shortened fluctuation than in the normal fluctuation. Further, the shortened variation includes an ultra-shortened variation in which the period of the temporary stop display is 0 seconds. Further, in the shortened variation, the operation at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed.

In FIG. 17 (4), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. Further, the icon that has been the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of the newly designated first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the green display mode at the time of shift movement, and the hold icon change notice has been started. This hold icon change notice is a kind of look-ahead notice that suggests that the hold represented by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a big hit in the symbol change display that starts after being digested. The expectation of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode, and the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the green display mode than in the default display mode. The execution start timing of the hold icon change notice may be when the hold is increased or when the shift is moved, but the period during which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol are performed. The hold icon change notice will not start during the period. If there is a hold increase during these periods, the hold icon change notice is given at the time of shift movement.

In FIG. 17 (5), there is a ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in the special drawing 1 is increased to 3, and the holding icon h13 of the third eye is additionally displayed. The notice of change of the hold icon is also started when the hold icon is increased here, and the display mode of the increased third hold icon h13 is the green display mode. In addition, button notice, which is a kind of normal notice, has also started. In the button notice, the image related to the effect button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, an image urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period is displayed. More specifically, a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, a meter display 136b that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period, and a character display 136c that prompts the user to press the button are displayed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period. When the effect button 136 is pressed, the upper effect device 2 located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button notice, the expectation of a big hit differs depending on how far the upper effect device 2 descends, and the larger the upper effect device 2 descends, the higher the expectation of a big hit. In FIG. 17 (6), the upper effect device 2 is slightly lowered in the state where the decorative symbol is changed at high speed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the following FIG. 17 (7), the upper effect device 2 rises to the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops and displays "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is a combination of lost decorative symbols. ing. Then, in FIG. 17 (8), "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 17 (9), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 17 (9) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has also been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was in the green display mode, has become the variable icon h0 in the same green display mode, and this time, a normal notice has been given. become.

In FIG. 17 (10), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

In FIG. 17 (11), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started.

In FIG. 17 (12), the normal reach does not develop into the super reach, and the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the same figure (13) following FIG. 17 (12), the event look-ahead notice is given while the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is continued. There is. Temporary stop of the combination of the lost decorative symbols when the reach is established During the period of display (Fig. 17 (12) to (13)), the temporary stop of the combination of the lost decorative symbols when the reach is not established. It is longer than the display period (Fig. 17 (2)). Further, the event look-ahead notice in FIG. 17 (13) is an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and is chanted as revenge. The event look-ahead notice in this example is a notice of an event that occurs in any one of the one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays currently suspended to start, and is a definite display of the jackpot symbol, that is, In some cases, a big hit is announced, and in other cases, a reach pattern with a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach pattern performed this time is announced. Here, since it was a normal reach stop, it is foretold that one of the two holds will develop into a super reach or a special super reach with a symbol variation display that is started after the hold is digested. In addition to the event notice, the event look-ahead notice may also notify the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be notified depending on the type of animation display js. Further, instead of notifying the event, only the expected degree of the big hit may be notified. In addition, even if the event look-ahead notice is executed, it may not develop into a super reach or a special super reach (so-called Gase notice).

Further, the notice of change of the hold icon by the second hold icon h12 is continued.

In FIG. 17 (14), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is performed.

In FIG. 17 (15), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 17 (15) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, has become the variable icon h0, which is also the default display mode.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (16) following from FIG. 17 (15), the decorative symbol variation display is a high-speed downward variation.

In FIG. 18 (17), there are two incoming balls in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased to 3, and the second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 are added. It is displayed. Further, the reach effect is started, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 18 (18), as the event look-ahead notice, the super (SP) reach is developed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (19) displays an animation showing the defeat of the lord by the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach, and in the center of the display screen, "decoration 4" is displayed. -Decoration 6-Decoration 4 "is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative patterns. In the figure (20) following FIG. 18 (19), the event look-ahead notice is given while the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is continued. ing. During the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 18 (19) to Fig. (20)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the super reach, the temporary stop of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is not established is provisional. It is longer than the stop display period (Fig. 17 (2)), and the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (12) to the same) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is established but does not develop into super reach. It is longer than Fig. (13)). The event look-ahead notice in FIG. 18 (20) is the same animation display js as the event look-ahead notice in FIG. 17 (13). The event look-ahead notice of the super reach stop in FIG. 18 (20) is a symbol variation display that is started when one of the three holds is exhausted, and the special super has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. It is foretold that it will develop into reach.

In FIG. 18 (21), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is performed.

Even in the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 17 (15) to 18 (20), the hold icon change notice and the zone effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 15 may be executed.

In FIG. 18 (22), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 18 (22) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode, has become the variable icon h0, which is also the green display mode. Further, the icon that has been the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of the newly changed first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode at the time of shift movement, and the hold icon change notice which is a look-ahead notice has been started. There is. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the red display mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the green display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (23), the decorative symbol variation display is a high-speed downward variation.

In FIG. 18 (24), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (24) in which the reach state is established, the display sf3 of the dialogue notice, which is a kind of the normal notice, is also displayed. In the following FIG. 18 (25), it develops into a super reach, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (26), a red flash display fl1 indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed, and the event pre-reading notice in FIG. 18 (20) is developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. is doing. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (27), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" which is temporarily stopped and displayed from the red flash display fl1 is provided. In the same figure (28) that appears and follows, the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" continues. After that, in FIG. 18 (29), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect, and in FIG. 18 (30) where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative symbol is not visible due to the wipe display wp.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (31) following from FIG. 18 (30), the wipe-out has started, and a part of the decorative symbol can be seen. In the following FIG. 19 (32), the wipe effect is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is still temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect has ended in failure. Further, in FIG. 19 (32), the event look-ahead notice is executed by displaying the animation display js. Here, it is assumed that the execution was performed for the hold to be digested next, and in the variable display in which the event look-ahead notice was executed, it is foretold that a big hit will be made because the special super reach was executed.

It should be noted that the wipe effect may be started in FIG. 18 (28) before the start.

In FIG. 19 (33), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is performed.

During the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the special super reach, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is not established It is longer than the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (2)), and the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (12)- It is longer than the figure (13)). Furthermore, during the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the special super reach, even if it develops to the super reach, it becomes the special super reach. May be longer than the period of temporary stop display (FIG. 18 (19) to FIG. (20)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it does not develop.

In FIG. 19 (34), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was in the red display mode, has become the variable icon h0 in the red display mode, and the normal notice has started.

In FIG. 19 (35), the button notice, which is a kind of the normal notice, is also started, and the button image 136a, the meter display 136b, and the character display 136c of "press" are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, and the upper effect device 2 descends from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 19 (36), the upper effect device 2 is shown in FIG. 17 (6) in a state where high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. It has fallen more than at the time of, and the expectation of a big hit is high. Eventually, in FIG. 19 (37), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 19 (38), it develops into a super reach, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39), a rainbow-colored flash display fl2 indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed, which has developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. The rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit than red, and is a color indicating that the big hit is confirmed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (40), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" that is temporarily stopped and displayed appears from the rainbow-colored flash display fr2. However, in the following figure (41), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect. In FIG. 19 (42) where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern is once completely invisible due to the wipe display wp. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. The combination of the decorative symbols of "b" (3R normal jackpot) is displayed as a temporary stop, and the revival production is successful. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (44), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

The revival effect may be an effect that always occurs when the special super reach ends, or may or may not occur. In addition, the display content of the part that has begun to be seen by the wipeout becomes difficult to see due to the effect display ef (see FIG. 14 (7)) such as light emission, and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display content can be visually recognized. May be. Alternatively, high-speed fluctuation due to re-variation is performed during the wipe effect, and it is difficult to confirm the decorative pattern from the part that has begun to be seen by the wipe-out. The display may be made. Further, the wipe effect is not performed, and the high-speed fluctuation of the re-variation may be performed as the revival effect.

In the game progress examples shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the animation display js of the event look-ahead notice having the same effect mode is executed for each lost reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next fluctuation is the target of the look-ahead notice. Although it was fluctuating, in this way, the animation display js of the event look-ahead notice is not only performed each time by the continuous variable display of the decorative pattern, but also may be performed once. In this case, the change two ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice, the change three ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice, or the change four ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice. be. If there are two or more holds, the player does not know which change is the target change of the look-ahead notice.

Further, FIG. 19A summarizes the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event look-ahead notice and the event (suggested content) subject to the event look-ahead notice.

When the event look-ahead notice is executed in the normal reach loss, the event look-ahead notice is an effect of notifying that the super (SP) reach or the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

When the event look-ahead notice is executed due to the super (SP) reach loss, the event look-ahead notice is an effect of notifying that the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

If the event look-ahead notice is executed due to a loss while developing to the special super (SPSP) reach, the event look-ahead notice will be an effect of notifying the confirmation of the big hit.

In the case of normal reach loss, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach effect in the special figure low probability state (non-probability change game state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice is not executed, and if the pattern of the reach effect in the special figure high probability state is lost, the event is lost. The event look-ahead notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state, the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the special figure low probability state (non-probability change). In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the game state), the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach effect in the low probability state of the normal map (non-time saving game state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice is not executed, and if the reach effect in the high probability state of the normal figure is lost, the event look-ahead is performed. The notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach production in the normal figure high probability state, the event look-ahead notice is not executed and in the normal figure low probability state (non-time saving game state). In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern, the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

In addition, if there is a loss in the reach effect pattern in the advantageous state (special map high probability state, normal map high probability state, special map high and low probability state, normal map low probability state, special map low probability state, normal map high probability state), If the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the pattern of the reach effect in the normal state (special figure low probability state, normal figure low probability state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice may be executed, or conversely. , In the case of a loss in the pattern of reach production in the normal state (special figure low probability state normal figure low probability state), the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the advantageous state (special figure high probability state normal figure high probability state, special In the case of a loss in the pattern of reach effect in the high-low probability state, low-probability state, low-probability state, high-probability state, and high-probability state), the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

Further, the event look-ahead effect may not be a suggestion of reach but a suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit (see FIG. 20). Further, instead of the event look-ahead effect, an effect suggesting a set value changed in the setting change process of step S117 of FIG. 6 may be executed.

Furthermore, even if reach loss occurs, the event look-ahead notice is not always executed, and may not be executed. For example, even if a normal reach loss occurs and the next fluctuation develops into a super reach, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed. Alternatively, the variation display of the decorative symbol in a predetermined state (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the b time-saving gaming state (during play time), or the variation of the last decorative symbol in which the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is maintained). In the display, etc.), even if a reach loss occurs, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed.

Further, when the normal reach loss occurs and the event look-ahead notice is executed, the event look-ahead notice may be repeatedly executed until the change subject to the event look-ahead notice. That is, the same event look-ahead notice may be executed for each fluctuation (for each temporary stop display period).

Further, the event look-ahead notice is a specific display of the animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and is chanted as revenge, but it may be a specific sound or a specific light emission.

Subsequently, a modified example of the progress example of the game shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modified example of the event look-ahead notice step by step.

FIG. 20 (19') is in the same state as FIG. 18 (19), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows an animation showing the defeat of the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. It is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 20 (20'), the event mixing notice is started instead of the event look-ahead notice. In this event mixing notice, a single picture ec of the character that grabs the player's line of sight is displayed on the entire display screen, and if the character emits a line, a revival effect is performed or it is on hold. It becomes rich that there is a big hit. That is, the notice that the revival effect will be performed corresponds to the event normal notice, and the notice that there is a big hit in the hold corresponds to the event look-ahead notice. In the single picture ec displayed in FIG. 20 (20'), the line "Still still" is emitted, and in FIG. 20 (21'), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect and the wipe-in is completed. At 20 (22'), the single picture ec cannot be seen due to the wipe display wp. Next, a wipe-out is performed, and in FIG. 20 (23'), the wipe effect is completed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (23'), a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration 4" (3R normal jackpot of "special figure b") is temporarily stopped. The revival production has been successful. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (24'), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 20 (19'') is also in the same state as FIG. 18 (19), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows an animation in which the lord is defeated by an enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. Is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 20 (20 ″), the event look-ahead notice is started. This event look-ahead notice is not a look-ahead notice for any of the holds, but a look-ahead notice in which the fluctuations subject to the notice are determined. That is, if the character is in a pose with his thumb up, it will be a pre-reading notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the next fluctuation, and if the character issues a line, it will be a pre-reading notice that the big hit will be confirmed in the next fluctuation. become. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (20 ″) displays a display cp of the pose in which the character puts his thumb up.

In FIG. 20 (21 ″), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4” is performed.

In FIG. 20 (22 ″), the next variation, which was the subject of the event look-ahead notice, is started, first, the symbol variation display in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and in the following figure (23 ″). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In this next variation, the reach state is established in FIG. 20 (24''), it develops into super reach in FIG. 20 (25''), and in the figure (26''), “decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration”. The combination of the decorative symbols of the normal big hit such as "4" is confirmed and displayed.

According to the above description
"A look-ahead effect means for executing a plurality of types of look-ahead effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] and
A notice effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] that executes a notice effect [for example, button notice, dialogue notice] in the currently performed symbol change display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The look-ahead effect of one of the plurality of types of look-ahead effects is the first look-ahead effect [for example, hold icon change notice, zone effect].
One type of look-ahead effect among the plurality of types of look-ahead effects is a second look-ahead effect [for example, an event look-ahead notice].
The look-ahead effect means may execute the first look-ahead effect in parallel with the advance notice effect [for example, the look-ahead notice and the dialogue notice by the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 14 (9). Display sf1, display of look-ahead notice and dialogue notice by empty zone in FIG. 14 (13) sf2],
The look-ahead effect means may not execute the second look-ahead effect in parallel with the advance notice effect [for example, FIGS. 17 (13), 18 (20), 18 (28) to the same. In FIG. (32), the advance notice effect is not executed, and only the event look-ahead advance notice is executed]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the second look-ahead notice can be made conspicuous.

Although the advance notice effect is a so-called normal advance notice, a look-ahead effect other than the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the advance notice effect.

Further, the advance notice effect, the first look-ahead effect, and the second look-ahead effect are displays, but the display is not limited to the display, and may be a sound, light emission, a movable body operation, or the like.

again,
In the first period [for example, the period from the start of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol to the start of the final display of the decorative symbol], the first look-ahead effect [for example, hold] The execution of the icon change notice] is not started [for example, if there is a hold increase in the first period, it is not started but is started at the time of shift movement].
The look-ahead effect means may start executing the second look-ahead effect during the first period [for example, FIGS. 17 (13), 18 (20), 19 (32)). ], A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first period may have a different period length.

again,
"A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a variable display of a decorative symbol that variablely displays the display of the decorative symbol is provided.
The decorative symbol variation display may include a suggestion period [for example, a period during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 18 (28) and FIG. 19 (32)]] that suggests the result of the pass / fail determination.
The first period is a period including the suggested period [for example, a period from FIG. 18 (28) to FIG. 19 (32), in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol cannot be seen (FIG. 18 (29)). )-Including FIG. 19 (31))].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means can execute the stop display of the decorative symbol following the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the first period is the period during which the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (for example, the figure). 19 (33) may be a period that does not include the period of definite display of the decorative pattern). It can be said that the stop display of the decorative symbol also suggests the result of the hit / fail determination, but the stop display of the decorative symbol can be said to notify the result of the hit / fail determination.

Further, the first period may be a period including a period in which the display of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (shaking display) is displayed. More specifically, in the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display disappears once, and then the temporary stop display is visible again. It may be a period until the display of the main stop (confirmed display) is displayed. Alternatively, during the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol begins to be displayed, the temporary stop display is temporarily invisible, and the temporary stop display is not visible again. It may be a period until the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed. That is, the first period may be a period from the start of displaying the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol to the display of the main stop display (confirmed display).

again,
"The decorative pattern variation display has a plurality of types of variation display patterns [for example, variation patterns including reach patterns].
The second look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that is started after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether it will be a big hit]. ,
The second look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests different contents depending on the pattern [for example, FIG. 19 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The pattern of one of the plurality of types is the first pattern [for example, the variation pattern in which the reach is not established], and the pattern of one of the plurality of types is the second. [For example, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach], and the second pattern has a longer suggestion period than the first pattern [for example, FIGS. 17 (12) to 17 (12) rather than FIG. 17 (2). FIG. 13 (13) is longer], the look-ahead effect means does not perform the second look-ahead effect in the first pattern [for example, FIG. 17 (2)], and the look-ahead effect. The effect means may execute the second look-ahead effect in the second pattern [for example, FIG. 18 (20)], and the look-ahead effect means may also perform the second look-ahead effect in the first pattern. Even in the pattern of FIG. 17 (1), the first look-ahead effect [for example, the hold icon change notice] may be executed [for example, the hold icon change notice may be executed in FIG. 17 (1), and FIG. 17 (12). -In the same figure (13), the hold icon change notice is executed by the second hold icon h12]. ”Furthermore, the second pattern is a reach effect (two same decorative symbols are confirmed). It is a pattern of a variable display effect in which the third decorative symbol cannot be confirmed in a state where it can be performed, and the first pattern is a non-reach effect (two different decorative symbols can be confirmed). It may be a pattern of variable display) in which the third decorative symbol cannot be confirmed in the state.

"The pattern of one of the plurality of types of patterns is the pattern of the first reach effect, and the pattern of the variation display of one type of the patterns of the plurality of types of variation display is the second pattern. It is a pattern of reach effect, and the look-ahead effect means may not execute the second look-ahead effect in the pattern of the first reach effect, and the look-ahead effect means is the second reach effect. In the pattern of, the second look-ahead effect may be executed. ”Furthermore, the pattern of the second reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern of the first reach effect. It is a pattern of high reach production. For example, the second reach effect pattern may be a super reach or special super reach pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a normal reach pattern. Further, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state (probability change game state), and the first reach effect pattern is the special figure low probability state (non-probability change game state). It may be a pattern of reach production in. Or conversely, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure low probability state, and the first reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state. good. Further, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the normal figure high probability state (time saving game state), and the first reach effect pattern is the normal figure low probability state (non-time saving game state). It may be a pattern of reach production in. Or, conversely, the pattern of the second reach effect is the pattern of the reach effect in the low probability state of the normal figure, and the pattern of the first reach effect is the pattern of the reach effect in the high probability state of the normal figure. May be. Further, the second reach effect pattern is reach in an advantageous state (special figure high probability state, normal figure high probability state, special figure high and low probability state, normal figure low probability state, special figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state). It is an effect pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal state (special figure low probability state, normal figure low probability state). Alternatively, conversely, the second reach effect pattern may be the reach effect pattern in the normal state, and the first reach effect pattern may be the reach effect pattern in the advantageous state.

"The pre-reading effect means has the same effect mode [for example, a character riding a motorcycle appears and is called revenge", although the suggested content [for example, the event subject to the pre-reading notice] differs depending on the type of the pattern. Animation display js] The second look-ahead effect may be feasible. "That is, the second look-ahead effect has different suggestions depending on the type of the pattern, but the effect mode is the same. You may.

"In the look-ahead effect means, when the reach effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit / fail determination is lost in the suggestion period, the reach effect higher than the reach effect is performed as the second look-ahead effect (the second look-ahead effect). For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests that a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect or a reach effect with a longer effect time than the reach effect) is executed, and the highest reach is performed. When the effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the pass / fail judgment is lost in the suggestion period, the look-ahead suggesting that the decorative symbol variation display that makes a big hit in the hold is executed as the second look-ahead effect. It may be the one that performs the production. "
"The pre-reading effect means may execute the second pre-reading effect when the reach effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the pass / fail determination is a loss in the suggestion period, but it is predetermined. In the symbol variation display of the state (for example, the symbol variation display in the play time, the last symbol variation display in which the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is maintained, etc.), a reach effect is performed and a hit / fail judgment is made in the suggested period. Even if it is suggested that the result is a loss, the second look-ahead effect may not be executed. "
Next, the accessory vibration effect will be described. There are two types of effects, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B, in the accessory vibration effect, which is a normal notice. Both vibration effects are effects in which a common accessory (upper effect device 2) vibrates.

FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect A. The accessory vibration effect A may be performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach, or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in this table, when the character vibration effect A is performed during the super (SP) reach, the expectation of the jackpot is 40%, and it is performed during the special super (SPSP) reach. The expectation of a big hit is 55%. As described above, the accessory vibration effect A is an effect of a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. Further, in the accessory vibration effect A, an image related to the vibrating accessory (upper effect device 2) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the effect (vibration) starts.

FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect B. The accessory vibration effect B may be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, or may be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed. In the above-mentioned character vibration effect A, only one execution timing is prepared for one decorative symbol variation display, whereas in the accessory vibration effect B, execution in one decorative symbol variation display is prepared. There are multiple timings available. Then, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. That is, in the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, when the accessory vibration effect B is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the jackpot is 70%, and the reach state is first. The expectation of a big hit is 35% when it is performed during the reach (before the development of the super reach), and during the super reach (after the development of the super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative design). If it is done, the expectation of the jackpot is 45%, and if it is done while the temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols representing the loss is displayed (during the execution of the revival production), the expectation of the jackpot is 100%. be. Since the expectation of the big hit is 100%, the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss means that the revival effect that finally becomes the big hit is being executed. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative pattern where the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the term "during super reach" means that it is after the development of super reach and before the development of special super reach, and is said to be during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. This special super reach is after the development of the special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and if the character vibration production B is performed during the special super reach, it is a big hit. The expectation is 55%. Further, in the accessory vibration effect B, the vibration period of the vibrating accessory (upper effect device 2) is the same even if the execution timing is different.

In the table shown in FIG. 21, "during reach" may be when the reach is established or when the reach is fluctuating. Further, "during SP reach" may be during the development of super reach or during the fluctuation of super reach. Further, "in SPSP reach" may be during the development of the special super reach or may be during the fluctuation of the special super reach.

Further, the accessory vibration effect B may be executed at a timing when the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. That is, at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, during the reach where the reach state is first established and during the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss (during the execution of the revival effect), the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. This is the execution timing of the object vibration effect B.

Further, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B have the same vibration method (vibration mode), but may be different. For example, while the accessory vibration effect A repeats short vibrations, the accessory vibration effect B may end with one long vibration.

Further, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B may be an effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates instead of the upper effect device 2. Alternatively, the accessory vibration effect A may be an effect in which the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B may be an effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates. Further, the effect device that vibrates in the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B may be provided in the front frame door 106.

Further, the expectation of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21 may change depending on the gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, the non-probability-changing gaming state, the non-time-saving gaming state, or a combination thereof). It may be the same regardless of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing in stages a case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed and a case where the accessory vibration effect A is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 22, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

In FIG. 22, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper effect device 2 was an accessory that descends from the initial position by a button notice (see FIGS. 17 (7) and 19 (36)), but it also performs a vibration effect at the initial position.

FIG. 22 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 22 (2), the variable display of the decorative design has started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 22 (2) is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 22 (3), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 22 (4), it develops into a super (SP) reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5) displays a state in which the lord and the enemy samurai hold each other and face each other, and a vibration effect-related image 2hg related to the upper effect device 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Has been done. This vibration effect-related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image, and includes an arrow display 2hg1 and a character display such as "If you vibrate, you have a great chance" while paying attention to the upper effect device 2. Further, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is an image that attracts the player's attention to the upper effect device 2, and is also an image that attracts the player's attention to the upper effect device 2.

In addition, a suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration effect-related image 2 hg may be displayed may be executed before the vibration effect-related image 2 hg is displayed. The suggestion effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light emission effect. For example, in the case of a display effect, a semi-transparent upward arrow display may be used. Appears, gradually materializes, and finally becomes an arrow display 2hg1. In addition, it may disappear without being materialized. In this case, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is not displayed, and the accessory vibration effect A is not executed either. Further, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (even if the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed), the upper effect device 2 is noticed and the character display such as "a great chance if it vibrates" is not displayed. 2hg may not be displayed.

In FIG. 22 (6) following from FIG. 22 (5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 at the initial position starts vibration. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and also displays a production display of "big chance" that makes you expect a big hit. The upper effect device 2 continues to vibrate until the super reach effect is completed (until the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed). The accessory vibration effect A by the upper effect device 2 performed here is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 40%. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (7) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Is displayed as a temporary stop, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) has been won. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 22 (7) continued to vibrate until just before this, but at the timing of FIG. 22 (7), the vibration is terminated and the upper effect device 2 is in a stationary state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (8), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 2R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

It should be noted that the vibration of the upper effect device 2 may end before the effect display of "big chance" that makes a big hit expected.

Further, even if the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed, the accessory vibration effect A may not be executed. Further, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when the accessory vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than when the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. ..

Further, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 22 (2)), and is displayed at the time of super reach development (FIG. 22 (FIG. 22)) as the execution timing of the accessory vibration effect A during super reach. It may vibrate at the timing of 4)) or at the timing after the development of super reach (timing of FIG. 22 (6)). That is, the accessory vibration effect A may start execution at different timings during the super reach or the special super reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 22 (6') following FIG. 22 (5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 at the initial position does not start vibration, and the accessory vibration effect A is executed. It is an example that did not exist. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (6') shows the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (7') shows that the lord has been defeated by the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, there is a lost decorative symbol such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (8'), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example stepwise following FIG. 22 (3).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (4) following from FIG. 22 (3) has developed into a super (SP) reach. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5''), which follows, shows how the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, but the vibration effect-related image 2hg shown in FIG. 22 (5) is displayed. Not.

In FIG. 23 (6 ″), the upper effect device 2 at the initial position is vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other. In this example, the vibration period of the upper effect device 2 is short, and the upper effect device 2 is stopped before the super reach effect is completed. The character vibration effect performed by the upper effect device 2 corresponds to the character vibration effect B, and is expected to be a big hit even though it is in the same super reach as the character vibration effect A performed in FIG. 22. The degree is a little high. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6 ″) does not display the effect display of the great chance shown in FIG. 22 (6). Since the vibration effect-related image 2hg is not displayed before the character vibration effect B is executed, the vibration period is shorter than that of the character vibration effect A, and the effect display of a big chance is not displayed, the character vibration effect B is previously displayed. It can be said that it is a normal notice that a player who is familiar with this pachinko machine 100 knows from. On the other hand, it can be said that the accessory vibration effect A is a normal notice that even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 100 can understand.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (7 ″) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a jackpot decorative symbol such as “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The combination of is displayed as a temporary stop, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 2R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing stepwise another example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed. In this example as well, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 24 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed, as in FIG. 22 (1). In FIG. 24 (2), as in FIG. 22 (2), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is a variable display that develops into a super reach as shown in FIGS. 22 (1) to 22 (4). At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice that the expectation of a big hit is 70%. In the accessory vibration effect B, the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher at the execution timing at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol than during the reach or the super reach. At the time of disclosure of the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is not known that the reach will be established in the first place, but a player familiar with the pachinko machine 100 has a hot expectation from the start of the fluctuation when the upper effect device 2 vibrates when the variable display is disclosed. Attention will be paid to the variable display of decorative patterns. In FIG. 24 (3), the super reach effect is developed, and in FIG. 24 (4), the combination of the decorative symbols of the probabilistic jackpot such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 24 (3-1) is a state continuing from FIG. 22 (2), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. That is, normal reach has started. During this reach, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 35%. In FIG. 24 (3-2), it has developed into a super reach effect, but in FIG. 24 (4'), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is definitely displayed. ..

FIG. 24 (6-1) is a state continuing from FIG. 23 (5''), the super reach effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6-1) has an enemy samurai. In the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit is 100%, and in the following FIG. 24 (6-2), a wipe effect which is a revival effect is started. After the wipe-in shown in FIG. 24 (6-3) is completed, the wipe-out is performed, the wipe effect which is the revival effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4'') has "decoration 7". -Decoration 13-Decoration 7 "is a definite display of a combination of normal jackpot decorative patterns.

In both the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B described above, the effect was an effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit, but the upper effect device 2 is a vibration effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit. It may be possible to perform a vibration operation different from that of. In the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot, the strength of the vibration may be weaker than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A, or may be weaker than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect B. Alternatively, in the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot, the vibration time may be shorter than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A, or may be shorter than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect B. Further, the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot may be a notification operation executed when a predetermined number of holds are accumulated. For example, the upper effect device 2 may execute the vibration operation when the number of holdes one step before the hold full tank reaches 3. This vibrating motion suggests a stop.

Subsequently, the button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates will be described. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice effect, like the accessory vibration effect. Further, as for the button vibration effect, the image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed as in the accessory vibration effect B. This point is different from the button notice in which the button image 136a and the like shown in FIGS. 17 (6) and 19 (35) are displayed.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a table relating to the button vibration effect. The button vibration effect may be executed by a variable display of a decorative pattern in which a reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect are combined. Even in the case of normal reach, it is executed at the time of the first temporary stop by the pseudo-continuous production (see FIG. 12 (2)), and the expectation of the big hit at this execution timing is 13%.

Further, the button vibration effect is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the super (SP) reach is performed, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, as in the accessory vibration effect B. It may be done in. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the button vibration effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the first time by the pseudo-continuous effect. The expectation of the jackpot is 13% when it is performed at the time of the temporary stop display of, and the expectation of the jackpot is 15% when it is performed at the time of the second temporary stop display by the pseudo-ream effect. The expectation of a big hit is 30% when it is performed at the time of the third temporary stop display by the production, and the expectation of a big hit is 36% when it is performed at the time of the development of super reach. Further, when the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss is performed (during the execution of the revival effect), the expectation of the big hit is 100%. This means that, as with the character vibration effect B, the expectation of a big hit is 100%, which means that a revival effect that will eventually become a big hit is being executed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super reach (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing at the time of the development of the special super reach is added. If the button vibration effect is performed during the development of this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit will be 48%.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the button vibration effect step by step. In this example as well, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended. Further, in FIG. 26, an effect button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (1) to 26 (9) is the same as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 12 (1) to 12 (9). That is, in FIG. 26 (1), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 has started. In FIG. 26 (2), the pseudo-ream effect is started, and the pseudo-ream symbol (decorative symbol described as “NEXT”) suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the area 208a, and "decoration 7" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the first temporary stop display is performed. FIG. 26 (2) shows that the effect button 136 is vibrating at the time of the first temporary stop display, and the button vibration effect is performed. The expected degree of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 13%. In FIG. 26 (3), the display screen is blacked out, and in FIG. 26 (4), the state immediately before the start of the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous production is shown. In FIG. 26 (5), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative pattern is started.

When the effect button 136 vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a predetermined period, a response display (for example, a character display of "hot") may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 26 (6), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and in FIG. 26 (7), the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been done. In the following FIG. 26 (8), the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). (Variable display), and in the figure (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is confirmed and displayed.

The effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (e) is the same as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 13 (18) to (22). That is, in FIG. 26 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started under the stage of the hall, and in the figure (a), the reach state is established, and the right symbol is also displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. "Decoration 2" is also temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In FIG. 26 (c), it has developed into a super reach. FIG. 26 (c) shows that the effect button 136 is vibrating during the development of Super Reach, and the button vibration effect is performed. The expected degree of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (d), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal jackpot decoration such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" is displayed. The combination of symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the figure (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

In the button vibration effect described above, the image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed, the vibration period is shorter than that of the accessory vibration effect A, and the effect display according to the button vibration effect is not displayed. It can be said that it is a normal notice that a player who is familiar with this pachinko machine 100, who has known the vibration effect for a long time, can understand.

The button vibration effect may be an effect in which the determination button 1930 vibrates instead of the effect button 136.

Further, the effect button 136 may also perform the same vibration operation as the vibration operation irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot described in the description of the upper effect device 2.

According to the above description
"The first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] capable of executing the first vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect A] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
It is a game table equipped with
The display means starts displaying a first image [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] related to the first vibration means before the execution of the first vibration operation is started. , A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is difficult for the player to overlook the first vibration operation. In addition, the player may advance the game in anticipation of the first vibration operation, and the interest of the game may be improved.

The first vibration operation may be an effect operation or a notification operation.

Further, the first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibrating means, or may be an image that attracts attention to the first vibrating means.

Further, the display means may start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibration operation is started and after the reach effect is started [for example. , FIG. 22 (5)].

Further, an effect suggesting that the first image may be displayed before the display of the first image is started (for example, a display effect or a sound effect). It may be a light emission effect). Even if this effect is executed, the first image may not be displayed.

again,
"The display means ends the display of the first image before the execution of the first vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 22 (5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first vibration means is capable of performing the second vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect B].
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 23 (6'')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the second vibration operation may be an operation in which the timing of vibration start is different from that of the first vibration operation [for example, at the time of disclosure of fluctuation shown in FIG. 21 (b), during reach, and a loss symbol. During temporary stop], the operation may be different from the first vibration operation.

again,
"The first vibration operation has a longer vibration time than the second vibration operation [for example, the vibration continues until the super reach effect is completed (until the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second vibrating means different from the first vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 and the decision button 1930] are provided.
The second vibration means can execute a third vibration operation [for example, a button vibration effect].
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibration means before the execution of the third vibration operation is started [for example, FIGS. 26 (1) and 26 (a)). None of them are displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first vibration means may not execute the first vibration operation even when the first image is displayed on the display means." Further, the first vibration means. The expectation of a big hit may be higher when the first vibration operation is executed after the image of is displayed than when the first vibration operation is not executed.

"The first vibration means is the first timing [for example, after the first image is displayed on the display means [for example, displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol of FIG. 22 (2)]. When the execution of the first vibration operation is started at the timing at the time of super reach development in FIG. 22 (4), and at the second timing later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the super reach development (for example, the timing after the super reach development). The execution of the first vibration operation may be started at the timing of FIG. 22 (6)]. ”That is, the first vibration means has the first image on the display means. After being displayed, the execution of the first vibration operation may be started at different timings.

"The first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on the door member [for example, the front frame door 106], and can vibrate even when the door member is closed or open. Further, the first vibration means is arranged on the door member, and the door member opens the first vibration operation started in a state where the door member is closed. It may be in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being unsuccessful. Alternatively, the first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and is in a state of being open even when the door member is closed. However, it may be vibrable. Further, the first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and the door member is started in a closed state. The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is opened. The second vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 or the decision button 1930] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage plate], and is in a state of being open even when the door member is closed. However, it may be vibrable. Further, the second vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 or the decision button 1930] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage plate], and starts in a state where the door member is closed. The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is opened. Alternatively, the second vibrating means [for example, the lower effect device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door 108 with a ball storage dish], and is described above. The door member may be vibrable regardless of whether it is closed or open. Further, the second vibrating means [for example, the lower effect device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage plate]. The first vibration operation started with the door member closed may be continued even when the door member is opened.

"The display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] finishes displaying the first image [for example, the vibration effect related image 2hg], and then displays the characters of the third image [for example," hot ". ] May be started to be displayed. The third image may be a response display to the operation of the first vibration means [for example, the effect button 136].

"The first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] can execute the fourth vibration operation, and the first vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect A] is expected to be a big hit. It is an effect operation that suggests the degree [for example, the expected degree of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21 (a)], and the second vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] is also the expected degree of the jackpot [for example, FIG. 21]. It is an effect operation that suggests the expectation degree of the big hit shown in (b)], and the fourth vibration operation does not have to be the effect operation that suggests the expectation degree of the big hit. " The strength of the vibration may be weaker than that of the first vibration operation, or may be weaker than that of the second vibration operation. Alternatively, in the fourth vibration operation, the vibration time may be shorter than the first vibration operation or shorter than the second vibration operation. Further, the fourth vibration operation may be a notification operation executed when a predetermined number of holds are accumulated.

Next, a background effect, which is a normal notice effect similar to the button vibration effect, will be described. Here, the execution (start) timing of the background effect and the expectation of the big hit will be explained.

FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a table for background effect. The background effect may also be executed (started) by the variable display of the decorative pattern, which is a combination of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. The background effect is not executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol with normal reach, but during the variable display of the decorative symbol with super (SP) reach and the variable display of the decorative symbol with special super (SPSP) reach. It may be executed (started) during. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the big hit is 20% when the background effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the second time by the pseudo-continuous effect. When the temporary stop is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%, and when it is performed during the super reach, the expectation of the jackpot is 35%. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super reach (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing during the special super reach is added. If the background effect is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit will be 40%.

Next, the mini character production will be described. The mini character production includes a production in which the mini character A appears and a production in which the mini character B appears. In addition, there may be an effect in which a different type of mini character appears. The mini character production is also a normal notice production, but the expectation of a big hit is the same even if the appearing mini character changes. However, if the mini character that appears changes, the expectation of the big hit may also change. Further, the execution timing is the same even if the mini character is changed, but the execution timing may be changed if the mini character is changed. Further, the mini character displayed may be changed depending on the effect mode, or the mini character displayed may be changed as a result of the internal lottery regardless of the effect mode.

FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a table relating to the mini character production. This table is common to mini character A and mini character B.

Similar to the character vibration effect, the mini character effect may be performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in the table of FIG. 27 (b), in the mini character effect, a plurality of execution timings in one variable display of the decorative symbol are prepared. However, the expectation of a big hit is the same regardless of the execution timing. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, even if the mini character effect is executed before the reach state is first established, it is during the super reach (after the development to the super reach). Even if it is performed before the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol) or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the big hit is 55%. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative pattern where the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the term "during super reach" means that it is after the development of super reach and before the development of special super reach, and is said to be during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. This special super reach is after the development of the special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative design. Even if the mini character production is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit is 55%.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of mini character production step by step. In the example shown in FIG. 28, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 28 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 28 (2), the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (2), a mini character-related image mcg related to the mini character effect is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. This mini-character related image mcg includes a notice that the mini-character production may be started and a tutorial-like character display such as "It will be hot if it appears".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (3), the mini character-related image mcg disappears, and the decorative symbol is rapidly changed in all of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this state, a part of the mini character Amcr is beginning to be seen above the left edge of the display screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (4), the entire mini character Amcr is displayed. This mini character Amcr is a rocket character and is flying to the right.

In FIG. 28 (5), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. The mini character Amcr continues to fly, but is lowering its altitude.

In FIG. 28 (6), it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. Even on the screen that has evolved into Super Reach, the mini character Amcr is displayed, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (7), which follows, shows that the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly, but this time he is raising the altitude.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (8), the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other is displayed, and the mini character Amcr is still displayed. The mini character Amcr that appeared before the reach was established in FIG. 28 (3) continues to be displayed until the super reach effect is completed, that is, until the temporary stop display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (9) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a decorative symbol of a normal jackpot such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1" is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the mini character Amcr has disappeared, but the mini character Amcr was displayed until just before this. In FIG. 28 (10), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

The mini character Amcr disappeared at the same time as the end of the super reach effect (start of display of the temporary stop display), but may disappear before the end of the super reach effect (before the temporary stop display is displayed). In addition, the mini character Amcr may disappear once after appearing and may reappear.

FIG. 28 (3') is another example following the figure (2), in which the mini character-related image mcg is displayed in the figure (2), but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (3'). Unlike the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 (3), a part of the mini character Amcr is not visible. In FIG. 28 (5'), the reach production was started, and the mini character Amcr did not appear before the reach was established. Although the super reach effect is performed in FIG. 28 (7'), the mini character Amcr has not appeared, and in the end, the super reach effect has ended without the mini character appearing, and the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 28 (9') has been completed. On the display device 208, the appearance of the defeat of the lord by the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In FIG. 28 (10'), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the accessory vibration effect B and the mini character effect are performed. In FIG. 29, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 29 (7-1), after developing into a super reach effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the lord and the enemy samurai hold each other and face each other, and also displays a mini character-related image mcg. As shown in FIG. 28 (2), the mini character-related image mcg may be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) that follows also shows that the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, but the mini character related image mcg disappears and the mini character Amcr is above the left edge of the display screen. A part of is beginning to be seen. Further, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) is vibrating, and the accessory vibration effect B is performed. In this way, during the super reach, the mini character effect and the character vibration effect B may be executed in parallel. By doing this, it is possible to produce a hot effect by overlapping the two types of normal notices. However, the execution of the mini character effect and the execution of the character vibration effect B are not started at the same time. That is, the start timing of the execution of the mini character effect and the start timing of the execution of the accessory vibration effect B are different from each other. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″) displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the rocket mini character Amcr is flying toward the right side. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″) has finished vibration and is in a stationary state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9''), the mini character Amcr disappears, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. Although not shown, the combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed as in FIG. 28 (10').

FIG. 29 (7-1') is in the same state as FIG. 29 (7-1), and after the development into the super reach effect, the mini character-related image mcg is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2'), the mini character-related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini character Bmcu begins to be seen above the left end of the display screen. On the other hand, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2') does not vibrate and remains stationary at the initial position. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″ ″) displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the mini character Bmcu is flying toward the right side. The mini character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1), the mini character Bmcu disappears, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. There is. In this example, the mini character Bmcu appears, but the same applies when the mini character Amcr appears. Further, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1) is vibrating, and the accessory vibration effect B is performed.

In the following FIG. 29 (9-2), the temporary stop display is finished, and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, is started. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-2) is in a stationary state after vibration. In the following FIG. 29 (9-3), the wipe-in is completed. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. In Fig. 29 (9-4), the wipe effect is finished and the normal jackpot decoration such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1" is completed. The combination of symbols is displayed as a temporary stop, and the revival production is successful. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (10 ″), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, unlike during the super reach, the mini character effect and the character vibration effect B are not executed in parallel during the temporary stop of the lost symbol. This is because if the accessory vibration effect is performed during the temporary stop of the lost symbol, the big hit is confirmed, so that the game is sufficiently excited without giving two types of normal notices.

Further, the character vibration effect B has the same effect execution period length (vibration period length) even if the start timing is different, whereas the mini character effect has the effect execution period when the start timing is different. The length (display period length) is also different. That is, if the mini character production is started before the reach is established, the execution period is from FIG. 28 (3) to immediately before the figure (9), and if it is started during the super reach, FIG. 29 (7-2). ) ~ Immediately before (9'') in the figure, and the lengths of both execution periods are different.

According to the above description
"Display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, upper effect device 2, decorative pattern display device 208], and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the character vibration effect B] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a mini character effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
The effect means can execute the first effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The effect means can execute the second effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The first effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation is different depending on which start timing is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 21B].
The second effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation does not differ regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by two types of production.

again,
"When the effect means performs the first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] at the first start timing [for example, a certain timing during super reach], the second effect [for example". , Mini character A effect] can be executed in parallel with the first effect [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)].
When the effect means executes the first effect at the second start timing [for example, a certain timing during the temporary stop of the lost symbol], the second effect is performed in parallel with the first effect. A game table characterized in that it is infeasible [for example, the mini character effect disappears when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped] [for example, FIG. 29 (9-1) when the mini character Amcr appears instead of the mini character Bmcu]. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The effect means can perform the first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] in both the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a loss [for example, FIG. 24 (2)]. For example, FIG. 29 (7-2)] is feasible.
The effect means that the second effect [for example, the mini character A effect] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, immediately before FIG. 28 (3) to FIG. (9)] are lost. It is feasible even in the variable display [for example, immediately before FIG. 29 (7-2) to FIG. 9 (9'')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first effect is an effect in which the execution period length of the effect is not different even if the start timing is different, and the second effect is an effect in which the execution period length of the effect is different when the start timing is different. [For example, if it is started before the reach is established, it is from FIG. 28 (3) to immediately before the figure (9), and if it is started during the SP reach, it is from FIG. 29 (7-2) to the same. Until just before the figure (9'')]. "
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a mini character B effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the effect means is that the third effect is also performed once. It is executed at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27 (b)] in the decorative symbol variation display, and the third effect is the execution. Even if the start timing is different, the suggested jackpot expectation is the same [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)], and the jackpot expectation suggested by the third effect is the above-mentioned first. It may be the same as the expectation of the big hit suggested by the second effect. "Or, the second effect may be a plurality of effect modes [for example, an effect mode in which the mini character Amcr appears and an effect in which the mini character Bmcu appears." Aspect] may be an effect.

"The effect means can perform the first effect in both the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a loss [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2). ] Although it is feasible, it may not be feasible at a specific timing in the decorative symbol variation display that causes a loss [for example, the timing during the execution of the revival effect that eventually causes a loss] [for example, FIG. 27 (for example, FIG. 27 ( b) Multiple execution timings shown in)]. "
"The effect means may not start the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect at the same time." That is, the start timing of the execution of the first effect and the above. It may be different from the start timing of the execution of the second effect.

"The effect means may include a first effect means [for example, an upper effect device 2] and a second effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208]." In this case, the above-mentioned effect means. The first effect means may be capable of executing the first effect, and the second effect means may be capable of executing the second effect. Alternatively, the effect means may include a plurality of types of effect means, and the first effect and the second effect may be executed by different effect means, or the plurality of types of effect means may be executed. In some of the effect means [for example, the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452], at least a part of the first effect and the second effect can be executed in common [for example, the above-mentioned It may emit light at the start of the first effect, and may also emit light at the start of the second effect].

"The first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] is the first when it is executed in the second gaming state [for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the probabilistic and time-saving gaming state]. The expected jackpot suggestion may be higher than when executed in one gaming state [eg, non-probable variable gaming state, non-time saving gaming state, or normal gaming state (non-probable and non-shortening gaming state)]. "The second effect [for example, the mini character effect] is also expected to be a jackpot that is suggested when it is executed in the second gaming state than when it is executed in the first gaming state. The degree may be high. "Or, the first effect is suggested whether it is executed in the second gaming state or in the first gaming state. Expectations for big hits may be the same. Whether the second effect is executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state, the suggested jackpot expectation is the same. May be good. The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Although the term "game state" is used here, the game state can be read as the effect mode when the effect mode is based on the game state.

In addition, the production means may perform the first production at a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when the reach is established, when the super reach develops, after the super reach develops, when the special super reach develops, and after the special super reach develops. ] May be executed at one start timing selected from the above, and the effect means also the second effect may be executed at a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when reach is established, super reach]. It may be executed at one start timing selected from [at the time of development, after the development of super reach, at the time of development of special super reach, after development of special super reach].

In the progress example of the game described above, a button notice (FIGS. 17 (5) and 19 (35)) using the effect button 136 and a button vibration effect (FIG. 26) may be performed. Here, the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137, which may be operated in the progress of the game, will be described again.

In the button sensor 426 shown in FIG. 4, each operation surface (upper surface) of the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the decision button 1930 arranged on the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is operated (pressed) to a predetermined pressing position. Then, a detection signal indicating that the operation has been performed is output. The maximum operation strokes of the various buttons 136, 1910 to 1930 may be up to the predetermined pressing position (detection position), or may be operated beyond the predetermined pressing position. That is, the position of the operation end point may be the predetermined pressing position or a position beyond the predetermined pressing position. Hereinafter, the operation amount (stroke amount) from the start point position which is the initial position to the end point position which is the position of the operation end point is simply referred to as an operation amount.

FIG. 30A is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the effect button 136, and the operation surface 1361 of the effect button 136 is also shown.

In FIG. 30A, the effect button 136 at the starting point position, which is the initial position, is indicated by a solid line, and the downward arrow indicates the operation direction. The effect button 136 at the end point is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

The effect button 136 may be such that the operation amount may change. That is, the effect button 136 may be in a state in which the amount of operation is large and a state in which the amount of operation is small.

FIG. 30B is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the upper button 1910 arranged in the operation key unit 190, and the operation surface 1911 of the upper button 1910 is also shown.

Also in FIG. 30B, the upper button 1910 at the starting point position, which is the initial position, is indicated by a solid line, and the downward arrow indicates the operation direction. The upper button 1910 at the end point is indicated by a two-dot chain line. The operation amount of the lower button 1920 arranged in the operation key unit 190 is also the same as the operation amount of the upper button 1910.

The operation amount of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 30A is larger than the operation amount of the upper button 1910 shown in FIG. 30B. Further, the operation amount of the determination button 1930 (not shown here) arranged in the operation key unit 190 is smaller than the operation amount of the effect button 136 and larger than the operation amount of the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920. However, the operation amount of the decision button 1930 and the operation amount of the effect button 136 may be the same.

The lever sensor 427 shown in FIG. 4 outputs a detection signal indicating that the operation lever 137 has been operated to a predetermined position (when it is tilted). The maximum operating stroke of the operating lever 137 may be up to the predetermined operating position (detection position), or may be operated beyond the predetermined operating position. That is, the position of the operation end point may be the predetermined operation position or a position beyond the predetermined operation position. As for the operation lever 137, the operation amount (stroke amount) from the start point position which is the initial position to the end point position which is the position of the operation end point is simply referred to as an operation amount.

FIG. 30C is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the operation lever 137, and the central axis 1371 of the operation lever 137 is also shown by a dotted line.

In FIG. 30C, the operating lever 137 at the starting point position, which is the initial position, is shown by a solid line. The operating lever 137 at the starting point is in a vertical position and can be tilted 360 degrees in any direction. In FIG. 30 (c), an arc-shaped arrow indicates that the operating lever 137 is tilted in a certain direction. The operating lever 137 at the end point is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

The operation amount of the operation lever 137 shown in FIG. 30 (c) is larger than the operation amount of the upper button 1910 shown in FIG. 30 (b), and is larger than the operation amount of the decision button 1930 (not shown). It is larger than the operation amount of the effect button 136 shown in.

The above various comparisons are comparisons of the amount of operation up to the end point position, but in the case of various buttons 136, 1910 to 1930, the amount of operation from the start point position to the predetermined pressing position (detection position) is used. The same applies to the operation lever 137 even when the operation amount is set from the start point position to the predetermined operation position (detection position). That is, regarding the amount of operation up to the detection position by the sensors 426 and 427, the operation lever 137 has the largest amount, and the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920 have the smallest amount.

Next, an operation effect using operation means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 will be described. It should be noted that this operation effect also includes the button notice executed in FIGS. 17 (5) and 19 (35). Further, the operation effect is an effect in which related images (each button-related image, each lever-related image) related to the operation means (effect button 136, operation lever 137, etc.) described later are displayed. That is, it can be said that it is a period during which the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation lever 137 is effective.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a table summarizing button-related images related to the effect button 136. The button-related image related to the effect button 136 referred to here is an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the operation effect, and is an image urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period. .. More specifically, it includes a button image imitating the effect button 136, a meter display indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect button 136, and a character display indicating the operation type of the effect button 136.

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 31, a normal button related image is shown. The normal button-related image includes a normal size button image 136aN, a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN. The normal size here is the standard display size. Further, in the description of FIGS. 30 to 46, the white color is not hatched and is not patterned. The button image 136aN of the normal button-related image is an image simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position). Further, in the blue meter display 136bN, a blue bar portion is displayed on a white background, and the blue bar portion decreases. In the description of FIGS. 30 to 46, hatching is performed diagonally downward to the left to represent blue. In this table, the blue bar part is shown to be slightly reduced. Further, "press" of the black character display 136cN is a display of black characters urging the effect button 136 to be pressed once.

Below the normal button related image, the red button related image is shown. The red button-related image includes a normal size red button image 136aR, a normal size red meter display 136bR, and a normal size "press" red character display 136cR. The red button-related image has the same display size as the normal button-related image, but the color is different. In the description of FIGS. 30 to 46, cross-hatching is applied to represent red color.

In the table shown in FIG. 31, the magnification of the display size with respect to the normal size is shown on the right side of the button-related image. In addition, the magnification of the operation valid period length is also shown on the right side of the magnification of the display size. The magnification of the operation valid period length is a magnification with respect to the length of the operation valid period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button-related image. In the image related to the red button, the magnification of the display size is 1 times, and the magnification of the operation valid period is also 1 times.

The red button image 136aR is an image simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits red light at the initial position. Further, in the red meter display 136bR, a red bar portion is displayed on a white background, and the red bar portion decreases. In this table, the red bar part is shown to be slightly reduced. Further, "press" of the red character display 136cR is a display of red characters urging the effect button 136 to be pressed once.

Below the red button related image is the large button related image. The large button related image includes a large button image 136aB that is twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 136bB that is twice the normal size, and a large black character display 136cB that is larger than the normal size. .. The large button image 136aB is an image in which the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position is largely displayed. Further, the large blue meter display 136bB is displayed with a display size twice that of the normal size, but the length of the operation valid period is one time. When the player sees the large blue meter display 136bB, he / she tends to think that the operation valid period is extended as compared with the blue meter display 136bN, but in the present embodiment, the operation valid period is not extended and the blue meter is not extended. It has the same period length as the display 136bN. The large black character display 136cB is not as large as twice the display size of the black character display 136cN, but may be twice the display size. In addition, the blue meter display 136bN of the normal size may be displayed instead of the large blue meter display 136bB which is twice the normal size, and the large black character display 136cB of "press" which is larger than the normal size may be displayed instead of the normal size. The black character display 136cN of "press" may be displayed.

Below the large button related image, the small button related image is shown. The small button related images include a small button image 136aS 0.8 times the normal size, a small blue meter display 136bS 0.8 times the normal size, and a small black character "press" 0.8 times the normal size. Display 136cS is included. The small button image 136aS is an image in which the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position is displayed in a small size. Further, the small blue meter display 136bS is displayed with a display size 0.8 times the normal size, but the length of the operation valid period is 1 time. When the player sees the small blue meter display 136bS, he / she tends to think that the operation valid period is shorter than that of the blue meter display 136bN, but in the present embodiment, the operation valid period is not shortened and the blue meter is not shortened. It has the same period length as the display 136bN. This small button-related image is a rare image having the lowest appearance frequency among the button-related images shown in the table of FIG. 31.

Below the image related to the small button, the image related to the repeated hit button is shown. The image related to the continuous hit button includes a normal size button image 136aN, a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a black character display 136cC called "continuous hit" having the same character size as the normal size. In this continuous button-related image, only the character display indicating the operation type is different from the normal button-related image. Further, the operation valid period is displayed using a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and the period length of the operation valid period looks the same as the period length of the normal button-related image. However, unlike the case where the normal button-related image that requires only one operation is displayed, when the continuous hit button-related image is displayed, the operation time is long because the continuous hit operation is required. Therefore, when the image related to the repeated hit button is displayed, the operation valid period is extended, and the operation valid period is 1.6 times longer than that when the normal button related image is displayed.

Below the image related to the continuous hit button, the image related to the long press button is shown. The long-press button-related image includes a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a black character display 136cL called "long-press" having the same character size as the normal size. Even in this long-press button-related image, as in the continuous push button-related image, only the character display indicating the operation type is different from the normal button-related image. Further, the operation valid period is displayed using a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and the period length of the operation valid period looks the same as the period length of the normal button-related image. However, even when the long-press button-related image is displayed, the operation validity period is extended because the operation time becomes longer due to the long-press operation, which is 1.6 times that when the normal button-related image is displayed. The operation is valid for.

In the image related to the continuous hit button and the image related to the long press button, a button image different from the normal size button image 136aN may be displayed. For example, an animation in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit may be displayed, or an image imitating the effect button 136 at the end point position may be displayed. Further, the length of the operation valid period may be different between the image related to the continuous hit button and the image related to the long press button. For example, the image related to the repeated hit button may be longer (1.8 times as an example).

Further, although the button-related images for the effect button 136 are used here, the button-related images for the various buttons 1910 to 1930 constituting the operation key unit 190 may also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Alternatively, even when the button-related image for the effect button 136 is displayed, the operations of the various buttons 1910 to 1930 constituting the operation key unit 190 may be accepted instead of the effect button 136. ..

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a table summarizing lever-related images related to the operation lever 137. The lever-related image related to the operation lever 137 referred to here is an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the operation effect, and is an image urging the operation lever 137 to be operated within the operation valid period. .. More specifically, a lever image imitating the operation lever 137, a meter display showing the remaining period of the operation valid period of the operation lever 137, and a character display such as "lever on" are included.

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 32, a normal lever related image is shown. The normal lever-related image includes a normal size lever image 137aN, a normal size blue meter display 137bN, and a normal size "lever on" black character display 137cN. The normal size here is the standard display size. The lever image 137aN of the normal lever-related image is an image simulating a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position). Further, in the normal size blue meter display 137bN, a blue bar portion represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left is displayed on a white background, and this blue bar portion decreases. In this table, the blue bar part is shown to be slightly reduced. The length of the operation validity period represented by this normal size blue meter display 137bN is the same as the length of the operation validity period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button related image. Further, "lever on" of the black character display 137cN is a display of black characters urging the operation of the operation lever 137.

Below the normal lever-related image, the red lever-related image is shown. The red lever related image includes a normal size red lever image 137aR, a normal size red meter display 137bR, and a normal size "lever on" red character display 137cR. The red lever-related image has the same display size as the normal lever-related image, but the color is different.

In the table shown in FIG. 32, the magnification of the display size with respect to the normal size is shown on the right side of the lever-related image. In addition, the magnification of the operation valid period length is also shown on the right side of the magnification of the display size. The magnification of the operation validity period length is a magnification with respect to the length of the operation validity period represented by the normal size blue meter display 137bN in the normal lever-related image. In the image related to the red lever, the magnification of the display size is 1 times, and the magnification of the operation valid period is also 1 times.

The red lever image 137aR is an image simulating a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits red light at the initial position. Further, in the red meter display 137bR, a red bar portion is displayed on a white background, and the red bar portion decreases. In this table, the red bar part is shown to be slightly reduced. Further, "lever on" of the red character display 137cR is a display of red characters urging the operation of the operation lever 137.

Below the red lever related image is the large lever related image. The large lever related image includes a large lever image 137aB that is twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 137bB that is twice the normal size, and a large black character display 137cB that is twice the normal size "lever on". There is. The large lever image 137aB is an image in which the state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position is largely displayed. Further, the large blue meter display 137bB is displayed with a display size twice that of the normal size, but the length of the operation valid period is one time. When the player sees the large blue meter display 137bB, he / she tends to think that the operation valid period is extended as compared with the blue meter display 137bN. It has the same period length as the display 137bN. The large black character display 137cB is twice the display size of the black character display 137cN, but is not limited to twice, and may be larger than the black character display 137cN. In addition, the normal size blue meter display 137bN may be displayed instead of the large blue meter display 137bB that is twice the normal size, and the normal size may be displayed instead of the large black character display 137cB that is twice the normal size "lever on". The black character display 137cN of "lever on" may be displayed.

As described above, in the lever-related image, the length of the operation valid period is the same regardless of the type of the image. The length of the operation validity period of the operation lever 137 is longer than the length of the operation validity period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button related image. This is because the operation lever 137 has a larger operation amount than the effect button 136, so that it takes a longer time to complete the operation. However, the length of the operation validity period of both may be the same.

In addition, the button-related image type includes an image that prompts a continuous hit operation (a continuous hit button-related image) and an image that prompts a long-press operation (a long-press button-related image), but the lever-related image prompts a continuous hit operation. No image (for example, an image related to a continuous striking lever) or an image prompting a long press operation (for example, an image related to a long press lever) is provided. In this way, by not providing the continuous striking operation and the long press operation using the operation means having a large amount of operation (here, the operation lever 137), the operation means having a large amount of operation is not given an annoying impression. There is. In addition, the frequency of use can be suppressed to increase the rarity and increase the expectation (excitement) when used.

In the tables of FIGS. 31 and 32, the description of 1 times may be 1.1 times or 0.9 times. That is, there may be a slight difference, or a difference may be intentionally provided.

Further, the operation validity period of the effect button 136 in the operation effect will be explained by taking a normal button-related image as an example. From the start of the display of the normal button-related image to the disappearance of the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN. The period becomes the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the operation effect. The same applies to the image related to the red button, the image related to the large button, the image related to the repeated hit button, and the like. Further, the operation validity period of the operation lever 137 in the operation effect will be explained by taking a normal lever-related image as an example. From the start of the display of the normal lever-related image to the disappearance of the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 137bN. The period becomes the operation valid period of the operation lever 137 in the operation effect. The same applies to the red lever-related image and the large lever-related image. Further, the operation valid period may be a period before the display of the normal button-related image or the normal lever-related image is started.

Subsequently, a rough flow of the operation effect using the operation means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 will be described. The operation effect is an effect performed between the introduction effect described later and the response effect executed as a result of operating the operation means. The response effect is an effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means (effect button 136, operation lever 137, etc.) in the operation effect (the effective period ends without the operation means being operated in the operation effect). The response effect includes a development effect, a reach determination effect, a cut-in effect, a winning effect, and the like.

In addition, the introduction effect and the operation effect may be combined as an operation effect, the response effect and the operation effect may be combined as an operation effect, and the introduction effect, the response effect, and the operation effect may be combined as an operation effect. Is also good.

FIG. 33A is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect, the type of the development effect, and the expectation of the big hit.

The development production is a production that suggests whether or not to develop from normal reach to super reach, and is performed at the end of the normal reach period. The jackpot expectation level represents the reliability of jackpot hitting in the currently performed symbol variation display.

If it does not develop from normal reach to super reach, it will fail to develop, resulting in a loss in normal reach. In this case, in the operation effect, the image related to the continuous hit button may be displayed, the image related to the long press button may be displayed, or the image related to the normal button may be displayed.

There are multiple types of SP reach for SP (super) reach, but here, the development to SP reach 1 and the development to SP reach 2 are targeted. SP reach 2 has a longer reach period than SP reach 1, and is a reach production with high expectations for big hits.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the expectation of a big hit when the image related to the continuous hit button is displayed and developed to SP reach 1 is 20%, and the image related to the long press button is displayed and developed to SP reach 1. The expectation of the jackpot is 30%, and the expectation of the jackpot when the normal button-related image is displayed and the SP reach 1 is developed is 40%. In addition, when the normal lever-related image is displayed, the development is always successful, and the expectation of a big hit when developing to SP reach 1 is 50%. Even when the normal lever-related image is displayed, the development may fail.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the image related to the continuous hit button is displayed and the SP reach 2 is developed, the expectation of the big hit is 30%, and the image related to the long press button is displayed and the SP reach 2 is displayed. The expectation of the jackpot when it develops to is 40%, and the expectation of the jackpot when the image related to the normal button is displayed and it develops into SP reach 2 is 50%. In addition, when a lever-related image is normally displayed and the SP reach 2 is developed, the expectation of a big hit is 60%.

When the image types of the operation effects are described in descending order of expectation of big hit based on FIG. 33 (a), the order is the normal lever-related image, the normal button-related image, the long-press button-related image, and the continuous push button-related image.

The table shown in FIG. 33 (a) does not include the large button related image. The development effect itself is not an effect that directly suggests the expectation of a big hit, and the large button-related image is not displayed when the response effect is not an effect that directly suggests the expectation of a big hit. Although the table shown in FIG. 33A does not include the red button-related image, the red button-related image may be displayed even when the response effect is not an effect that directly suggests the expectation of a big hit. It may be. On the other hand, in the case of successful development, since the expected degree of big hit is indirectly known by the type of SP reach, a lever-related image may be displayed normally.

FIG. 33B is a diagram showing a determination table of the introduction effect started during the normal reach. During the normal reach, the introduction effect is started and the operation effect is executed, and if the operation means is operated within the operation valid period and the development is successful, the development effect is performed. In the case of a development failure, an effect of notifying the development failure is performed, the normal reach effect ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the operating means is not operated within the operation valid period, when the operation effect is completed, the development effect or the development failure notification is performed.

This introduction effect determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG.

The introductory effect is an effect that is executed before the operation effect is started, and is an effect that suggests the start of the operation effect. The introduction effect pattern 1 or the introduction effect pattern 2 is executed before the operation effect in which the button-related image is displayed, and the introduction effect pattern 3 or the introduction effect pattern 4 is executed before the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed. Is executed. The introduction effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern having a longer effect time than the introduction effect pattern 1, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern having a longer effect time than the introduction effect pattern 3. The introduction effect pattern 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 (b1) to (b4). The longer the production time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, in the introduction effect pattern 2 and the introduction effect pattern 3, the introduction effect pattern 2 is longer. Further, in the introduction effect pattern 1 and the introduction effect pattern 3, the introduction effect pattern 3 is longer, and in the introduction effect pattern 2 and the introduction effect pattern 4, the introduction effect pattern 4 is longer. Alternatively, the effect time of the introduction effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, the introduction effect pattern 3 tends to be longer than the introduction effect pattern 1 and the introduction effect pattern 3, and the introduction effect pattern 2 and the introduction effect pattern 2 are introduced. Introduced effect pattern 4 tends to be longer than the effect pattern 4.

The flow of the effect such as introduction effect → operation effect → development effect → no SP reach or SP reach effect is determined in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8 before the start of the change of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), when the image related to the repeated hit button is displayed but the development fails, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 has a probability of remaining 5%. Is selected. If the image related to the long press button is displayed but the development fails, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 10%. If the normal button-related image is displayed but the development fails, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 15%. On the other hand, when the image related to the repeated hit button is displayed and the development is successful, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 40%. When the image related to the long press button is displayed and the development is successful, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 55%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 45%. When the normal button-related image is displayed and the development is successful, the introduction effect pattern 1 and the introduction effect pattern 2 are selected with a probability of 50%, respectively. Further, when the normal lever-related image is displayed, the development is always successful as described above, the introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a probability of remaining 70%. ..

As described above, the flow of the effect such as introduction effect → operation effect → development effect → no SP reach or SP reach effect is determined in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8 before the start of the change of the decorative symbol. When SP reach 1 is executed as the SP reach effect, a cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach 1 effect. The cut-in effect is a notice effect that suggests whether or not a big hit is made in the currently performed symbol variation display, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 1. That is, the SP reach 1 at which the cut-in effect is finally performed is the SP reach 1. However, even with SP reach 1, there may be cases where the cut-in effect is not performed.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the normal button-related image is displayed during the effect of SP reach 1, the expectation of a big hit is 10%. Further, during the production of SP reach 1, the expectation of a big hit when a red button-related image is displayed is 15%, and the expectation of a big hit when a large button-related image is displayed is 18%. Therefore, the expectation of the jackpot of the large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times the expectation of the jackpot of the normal button-related image (normal button image 136aN). Since the display size of the large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is twice the display size of the normal button-related image (normal button image 136aN), the expectation of a big hit is not as large as the display size. However, by displaying the image at twice the display size, it is possible to make the person feel that the degree of expectation is higher than the actual degree of expectation. Further, when the small button-related image, which is a rare image having the lowest appearance frequency among the button-related images, is displayed during the production of SP reach 1, the expectation of a big hit is 100%. That is, if the image related to the small button is displayed, the big hit is confirmed. Further, during the production of SP reach 1, the expectation of a jackpot when a normal lever-related image is displayed is 20%, and the expectation of a jackpot when a red lever-related image is displayed is 50%. The expected degree of big hit when the big lever related image is displayed is 80%.

When the image types of the operation effects are described in descending order of the jackpot expectation degree based on FIG. 34 (a), the small button related image, the large lever related image, the red lever related image, the normal lever related image, the large button related image, and red. Button-related images, then normal button-related images.

FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the cut-in effect performed during SP reach 1 and the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In the cut-in effect, one type of cut-in image is displayed from among a plurality of types of cut-in images. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the expectation of the jackpot when the green cut-in image is displayed is 20%, and the expectation of the jackpot when the red cut-in image is displayed is 50%. When the gold cut-in image is displayed, the expectation of a big hit is 80%.

FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a gold cut-in image.

The cut-in image is an image displayed by operating the operation means within the operation valid period in the operation effect, and also in FIG. 35 (a), the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, the cut-in image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the effect display of SP reach 1 is performed. In the description of FIGS. 30 to 46, vertical stripe hatching is applied to represent gold color. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a) displays a gold cut-in image CTG whose edge portion is gold.

The cut-in image is displayed when the operation effect is completed even if the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period after the operation effect is started.

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in image is different from the expected degree of jackpot for each image type of the operation effect described with reference to FIG. 34 (a), and the image type of the operation effect displayed earlier. If the expectation of the jackpot of the cut-in image displayed later is higher than the expectation of the jackpot of, the interest of the game is likely to improve.

In addition, instead of the cut-in effect, the dialogue notice effect may be executed. In this case, instead of the cut-in image, the serif preview image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the dialogue notice production, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the dialogue. The dialogue preview image is an image displayed by operating the operation means within the operation valid period in the operation effect, but when the operation effect is started and the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period, the operation effect is displayed. The dialogue preview image may not be displayed even after the end of.

Further, the cut-in effect is also executed when the operation lever 137 is operated within the operation valid period. Alternatively, even if the operation lever 137 is operated within the operation valid period, the dialogue warning effect is executed.

FIG. 34 (c) is a diagram showing a determination table of the introduction effect started during SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect is started, the operation effect is executed, the operation means is operated within the operation valid period, and the cut-in effect is performed.

The introduction effect determination table shown in FIG. 34 (c) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG.

The introductory effect performed during SP reach 1 is the same as the introductory effect performed during normal reach, and the relatively short introductory effect pattern 1 or relatively long is performed before the operation effect in which the button-related image is displayed. The introduction effect pattern 2 is executed, and the relatively short introduction effect pattern 3 or the relatively long introduction effect pattern 4 is executed before the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed. The production time of each introduction effect pattern is as described in FIG. 33 (b). In addition, the introduction effect performed during SP reach 1 may be different from the introduction effect performed during normal reach.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the normal button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 5%. When the red button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 10%. When the large button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with an 85% probability, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining 15% probability. When the small button-related image for which the big hit is confirmed is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 40%. Therefore, it is unknown whether or not the small button-related image is displayed at the stage of the introduction effect. When the normal lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a 55% probability, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a remaining 45% probability.

35 (b1) to 35 (b4) shown on the right side of FIG. 35 (a) are views showing the introduction effect pattern 3.

In FIG. 35 (b1), the reach effect of SP reach 1 has started. In the reach effect display of the SP reach 1, an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is greatly projected is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right. Similar to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (b1) is also provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. A mini design is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 35 (b2), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 3 is started. In the introduction effect pattern 3, the wipe display wp is expanded from each of the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 like a wipe effect, and wipe-in is performed. In FIG. 35 (b3), the wipe-in is completed, the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display wp, and the reach effect display of the SP reach 1 is invisible. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner and the mini symbol in the upper left corner are visible.

When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out is started, and in FIG. 35 (b4), the wipe-out is completed and the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 3 is completed. In FIG. 35 (b4), a normal lever-related image is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, a normal size lever image 137aN that imitates a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (start point position), a normal size blue meter display 137bN, and a normal size "lever on" black character display 137cN are displayed. Has been done. The lever image 137aN and the black character display 137cN overlap with a part of the reach effect display of SP reach 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the red lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 and the introduction effect pattern 4 are each selected with a probability of 50%. When the large lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a probability of remaining 70%.

The production during the SP reach 1 has been described above, but when the SP reach 2 is executed as the SP reach production, the winning effect is performed at the end of the SP reach 2 production. Similar to the above-mentioned cut-in effect, the winning effect is also a notice effect that suggests whether or not a big hit is made in the currently performed symbol variation display, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 2. That is, the SP reach 2 is the SP reach where the winning effect is performed last. However, even with SP reach 2, there may be cases where the winning effect is not performed.

FIG. 36A is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

The relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation of the jackpot shown in FIG. 36 (a) is the same as the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation of the jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (a). That is, the expectation of the big hit is 10% when the normal button-related image is displayed and 15% when the red button-related image is displayed during the production of SP reach 2, and the big button. When the related image is displayed, it is 18%. Therefore, even in SP reach 2, the expectation of the jackpot of the large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times the expectation of the jackpot of the normal button-related image (normal button image 136aN), which is twice as high. By displaying in the display size, it is possible to make the expectation higher than the actual expectation. Further, it is 100% when the small button-related image is displayed, 20% when the normal lever-related image is displayed, and 50% when the red lever-related image is displayed. When the large lever related image is displayed, it is 80%. Therefore, if the image types of the operation effect are described in descending order of the jackpot expectation, the small button related image, the large lever related image, the red lever related image, the normal lever related image, the large button related image, the red button related image, and the normal button related image are described. It will be in the order of the images.

FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a determination table of the introduction effect started during SP reach 2. During SP reach 2, the introduction effect is started, the operation effect is executed, the operation means is operated within the operation valid period, and the winning effect is performed. It should be noted that the winning effect is also an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period after the operation effect is started.

The introduction effect determination table shown in FIG. 36 (b) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG.

The introduction effect performed during SP reach 2 is the same as the introduction effect performed during normal reach or SP reach 1, and the relatively short introduction effect pattern 1 is performed before the operation effect in which the button-related image is displayed. Alternatively, the relatively long introduction effect pattern 2 is executed, and the relatively short introduction effect pattern 3 or the relatively long introduction effect pattern 4 is executed before the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed. The production time of each introduction effect pattern is as described in FIG. 33 (b). It should be noted that the introduction effect performed during SP reach 2 may be different from the introduction effect performed during normal reach or SP reach 1.

As shown in FIG. 36B, when the normal button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 5%. When the red button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 10%. When the large button-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with an 85% probability, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining 15% probability. When the small button-related image for which the big hit is confirmed is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a probability of remaining 40%. Further, when the normal lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 55%, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a probability of remaining 45%. When the red lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 and the introduction effect pattern 4 are each selected with a probability of 50%. When the large lever-related image is displayed, the introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a probability of remaining 70%. Each of the selectivity described above is the same as the selectivity described with reference to FIG. 34 (c), but may be different.

Next, specific examples of the introduction effect, the operation effect, and the response effect, which are executed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the final display is performed, will be described.

FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing each of the four specific examples (A) to (D). In each timing chart shown in FIG. 37, time elapses at the same speed from left to right. The timing of (a1) shown in FIG. 37 (A), the timing of (b1) shown in FIG. 37 (B), the timing of (c1) shown in FIG. 37 (C), and the timing shown in FIG. The timings of d1) are the same, the timings at which normal reach is started ((a2), (b2), (c2), (d2)) are also the same, and the timings at which super reach is started ((a6)). ), (B6), (c6), (d6)) also match.

In FIG. 37 (A), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the normal button-related image is executed, and then the development effect is performed to develop into the SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is started, the operation effect of displaying the normal button-related image is executed, and then the cut-in effect of displaying the green cut-in image is performed, resulting in a loss. This is an example in which the combination of decorative patterns of is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a specific example shown in FIG. 37 (A) step by step. The figure shown in (a1) in FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a state at the timing of the reference numeral (a1) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A), and the figures shown after (a2) are also the same. It is a figure which shows the state at the timing of the reference numeral which is shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A).

FIG. 38 (a1) is the same state as shown in FIG. 12 (1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is usually variable. Further, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable icon h0 in the green display mode is displayed. In the description of FIGS. 30 to 46, hatching is performed diagonally downward to the right to represent green. The variation icon h0 in the green display mode is a notice suggesting that the expected degree of jackpot is 25% in the currently performed symbol variation display. A hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are both white display modes (default display modes). Further, a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 38 (a2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol changes only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 38 (a2-1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the introduction effect has not started yet.

In FIG. 38 (a3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction effect here is the effect of the introduction effect pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 38 (a3), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative symbol cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is being performed (the period of t1 shown in FIG. 37A), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 38 (a4), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 ends, and the operation effect starts. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a4), the decorative symbol becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative symbol continues only in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, an image related to a normal button is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position), a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are displayed. Has been done. At the timing of FIG. 38 (a4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. Depending on the operation of the effect button 136, development success or development failure is displayed. That is, if the development is successful, the development production is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, the development failure is notified. In the case of development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notifying the development failure. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is shown that the development effect is started when the entire period t2 of the operation valid period elapses, but this is to show the period length of the entire period t2. In fact, the development effect is started according to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of the entire period t2. The specific example in FIG. 37 (A) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated immediately before the entire period t2 elapses, but in the development effect, the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period. Even if it is, since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed, it can be seen as an example when the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 38 (a5) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "SP reach" is displayed below the decorative symbol in which the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The player who sees the display screen of this development effect finds that the player develops into SP reach after that, and the interest of the game is improved.

In FIG. 38 (a6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 1 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the expectation of a big hit by the normal button-related image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a4) was 40% as shown in FIG. 33 (a). become. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a6), an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is greatly projected is displayed as the reach effect display of the SP reach 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right. ing.

In FIG. 38 (a6-1), the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is still continued. That is, the introduction effect has not started yet.

In FIG. 38 (a7), the introduction effect is started. The introduction effect here is also the effect of the introduction effect pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 38 (a7), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, and the reach effect display of the SP reach 1 is not visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is being performed (the period of t3 shown in FIG. 37A), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 remains blacked out. The introduction effect here is the same introduction effect pattern 1 as the introduction effect in the normal reach period, but different patterns may be introduced with the same t3 period length. For example, an introduction effect may be performed in which a flash display is displayed on the entire display screen over a period of t3.

In FIG. 38 (a8), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 ends, and the operation effect starts. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a8), the reach effect display of the SP reach 1 becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is still continuing. In addition, the normal button-related image is displayed again at the lower left of the display screen. Here, too, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position, a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are displayed. .. A part of the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the button image 136aN and the black character display 136cN. The expected degree of jackpot by the normal button-related image here is 10% as shown in FIG. 34 (a). At the timing of FIG. 38 (a8), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. The cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136. That is, a cut-in image foretelling a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is shown that the cut-in effect is started when the entire period t4 of the operation valid period elapses, but again, in order to show the period length of the entire period t4. Therefore, in reality, the cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of t4 for the entire period. The specific example in FIG. 37 (A) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated immediately before the entire period t4 elapses, but in the cut-in effect, the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if it is not, it can be seen as an example when the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 38 (a9) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the cut-in effect is started. A green cut-in image CTM having a green edge is displayed so as to overlap the reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expected degree of jackpot of this green cut-in image CTM is 20% as shown in FIG. 34 (b).

In FIG. 38 (a10), the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right starts the temporary stop display in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation display). Also, an animation of the disappointed lord is displayed. At this stage, the mini symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking display of "-" indicating that the symbol is being displayed in the special figure 1 continues.

After the temporary stop display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is performed, the definite display of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also shows FIG. 38 (a11). As shown, the final display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is performed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x" indicating the deviation, and "767" is also stopped and displayed on the mini symbol.

In FIG. 37B, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the normal button-related image is executed, and then the development effect is performed to develop to the SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, the operation effect of displaying the large button related image is executed, and then the cut-in effect of displaying the red cut-in image is performed, resulting in a loss. This is an example in which the combination of decorative patterns of is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a specific example shown in FIG. 37 (B) step by step. The figure shown in (b1) in FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a state at the timing of the reference numeral of (b1) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B), and the figures shown after (b2) are also the same. It is a figure which shows the state at the timing of the reference numeral which is shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B). Hereinafter, the description including the explanation overlapping with the example shown in FIG. 38 will be described.

FIG. 39 (b1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 12 (1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is usually variable. The variable icon h0 in the red display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 in the white display mode (default display mode) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , H12 are displayed. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode is a notice suggesting that the expectation of the jackpot is 50% in the currently performed symbol variation display. Further, a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 39 (b2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol changes only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 39 (b3), the introduction effect is started. The timing of (b3) shown in FIG. 37 (B) is earlier than the timing of (a3) shown in FIG. 37 (A), and the period from the start of normal reach to the start of the introduction effect is long. It can be seen that the specific example (example shown in FIG. 39) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B) is shorter than the specific example (example shown in FIG. 38) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A). The introduction effect in the example shown in FIG. 39 is the effect of the introduction effect pattern 2. In the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 39 (b3), it seems that a normal size effect button 136 is imitated on each of the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. An unmaterialized translucent image appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 39 (b3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 39 (b3-2), the two images are overlapped at the lower left, and in the following figure (b4), the operation effect is started, and the two images overlapped at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 are real. It is a button image that has been converted. That is, in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b4), a normal size button image 136aN simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) is displayed. In addition, a normal size blue meter display 136bN and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are also displayed, and a normal button-related image is displayed. The introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 39 (b3) to FIG. 39 (b4) (the period of t5 shown in FIG. 37 (B)), and the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 2 is It can be seen that it is longer than the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 1 (the period of t1 shown in FIG. 37 (A)).

At the timing of FIG. 39 (b4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. In response to the operation of the effect button 136, the development effect is started if the development is successful, and the development failure is notified if the development is unsuccessful. In the case of development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notifying the development failure. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (B), it is shown that the development effect is started when the entire period t6 of the operation valid period elapses, but this is to show the period length of the entire period t6. In fact, the development effect is started according to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of the entire period t6. The specific example in FIG. 37 (B) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated immediately before the entire period t6 elapses, but as described above, in the development effect, the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if it is not operated, it can be seen as an example when the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 39 (b5) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "SP reach" is displayed below the decorative symbol in which the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The player who sees the display screen of this development effect finds that the player develops into SP reach after that, and the interest of the game is improved.

In FIG. 39 (b6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 1 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the expectation of a big hit by the normal button-related image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b4) was 40% as shown in FIG. 33 (a). become. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b6), an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is greatly projected is displayed as the reach effect display of the SP reach 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right. ing.

In FIG. 39 (b7), the introduction effect is started. The timing of (b7) shown in FIG. 37 (B) is earlier than the timing of (a7) shown in FIG. 37 (A), and is the period from the start of SP reach 1 to the start of the introduction effect. It can be seen that the length is shorter in the specific example (example shown in FIG. 39) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B) than in the specific example (example shown in FIG. 38) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A). .. The introduction effect in the example shown in FIG. 39 is the effect of the introduction effect pattern 2. In the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 39 (b7), it seems that an effect button having a size larger than the normal size is imitated on each of the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, a translucent image that is not materialized appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 39 (b7-1), both the upper left image and the upper right image move toward the center. Then, in FIG. 39 (b7-2), two images are overlapped and materialized near the center, and an animation that expands to a larger size is displayed. In the following figure (b8), a large button is displayed. The image 136aB is displayed, and the operation effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (b8) displays a large-sized button image 136aB in which the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position) is enlarged. In addition, a large-sized large blue meter display 136bB and a large-sized large black character display 136cB called "press" are also displayed, and a large button-related image is displayed. Most of the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the large button image 136aB. Further, even with the large black character display 136cN, a part of the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped. The expected degree of big hit by the big button related image here is 18% as shown in FIG. 34 (a). The introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 39 (b7) to FIG. 39 (b8) (the period of t7 shown in FIG. 37 (B)), and the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 2 is It can be seen that it is longer than the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 1 (the period of t3 shown in FIG. 37 (A)). At the timing of FIG. 39 (b8), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the large blue meter display 136bB is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. The cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136. That is, a cut-in image foretelling a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (B), it is shown that the cut-in effect is started when the entire operation valid period t8 elapses, but again, this is to show the period length of the entire period t8. Therefore, in reality, the cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of t8 for the entire period. The specific example in FIG. 37 (B) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated immediately before the entire period t8 elapses, but as described above, the cut-in effect is the effect button 136 within the operation valid period. Since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if is not operated, it can be seen as an example when the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

Here, the total period t8 of the operation valid period in the operation effect in which the large button image 136aB is displayed is the same as the total period t4 of the operation valid period in the operation effect in which the button image 136aN is displayed. In order to maintain fairness or to make the player feel uncomfortable, the effect in the introduction effect of the operation effect in which the large button image 136aB, which has a relatively large display size, is displayed while keeping the length of the operation valid period the same. By lengthening the time, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the large button image 136aB will be displayed.

FIG. 39 (b9) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the cut-in effect is started. A red cut-in image CTR with a red edge is displayed so as to overlap the reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expected degree of jackpot of this red cut-in image CTR is 50% as shown in FIG. 34 (b).

Although not shown at the timing of (b10) in FIG. 37 (B), the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right is displayed on the left, as in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a10). Temporary stop display is started in each of the area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation display). To.

Further, at the timing of (b11) in FIG. 37 (B), although not shown, the loss such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is the same as that of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a11). The final display of the combination of decorative patterns is performed.

When a large button-related image including the large button image 136aB is displayed, the effect button 136 may vibrate during execution of the operation effect and / or after the operation of the effect button 136, and it always vibrates. You may. On the other hand, when the button-related image including the normal size button image 136aN is displayed, the effect button 136 does not vibrate during the execution of the operation effect and / or after the operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, the effect button 136 may vibrate, but the rate at which the effect button 136 vibrates is lower than when the large button-related image is displayed.

In FIG. 37C, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the image related to the repeated hit button is executed, and then the development effect is performed to develop into the SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect is started, the reach selection effect is first performed, then the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is started, the operation effect in which the normal button-related image is displayed is executed, and then the winning effect is performed. This is an example in which the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is confirmed and displayed. That is, in this example, it is an example that develops into SP reach 2.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a specific example shown in FIG. 37 (C) step by step. The figure shown in (c1) in FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a state at the timing of the code of (c1) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C), and the figures shown after (c2) are also the same. It is a figure which shows the state at the timing of the reference numeral which is shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C). Hereinafter, the description including the explanation overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 will be described.

FIG. 40 (c1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 12 (1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is usually variable. The variable icon h0 in the red display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 in the white display mode (default display mode) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , H12 are displayed. Further, a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 40 (c2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol changes only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 40 (c3), the introduction effect by the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and it seems that a normal size effect button 136 is imitated on each of the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c3). However, a translucent image that is not materialized appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 40 (c3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 40 (c3-2), the two images are overlapped at the lower left, and in the following figure (c4), the operation effect is started, and the two images overlapped at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 are It is a materialized button image. That is, in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c4), a normal size button image 136aN simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) is displayed. In addition, a normal size blue meter display 136bN and a black character display 136cC called "continuous hit" having the same character size as the normal size are also displayed, and images related to the continuous hit button are displayed. The introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 40 (c3) to FIG. 40 (c4) (the period of t9 shown in FIG. 37 (C)), and FIGS. 39 (b3) to 39 (b3). This is an effect having the same period length as the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 described up to b4).

At the timing of FIG. 40 (c4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is repeatedly hit within the operation valid period. In response to the repeated hits of the effect button 136, the development effect is started if the development is successful, and the development failure is notified if the development is unsuccessful. In the case of development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notifying the development failure. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (C), it is shown that the development effect is started when the entire operation valid period t10 has elapsed. In the case of the continuous striking operation, unlike the one-push operation, the continuous striking operation is basically performed until the entire operation valid period t10 elapses. Exceptionally, the development effect may be started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of the entire period t10. The length of the total period t10 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (C) is the length of the total period t2 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (A) and the total period of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (B). It can be seen that it is longer than the length of t6. However, the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 40 (c4) and the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 38 (a4) are the same as the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 39 (b4). The size (length). As described above, since the continuous striking operation takes longer than the one-push operation, the operation valid period is 1.6 times longer than the operation valid period requiring the single-push operation.

FIG. 40 (c5) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "SP reach" is displayed below the decorative design in which the variable display of the decorative design continues, and the character display of "duel" is also displayed above it. If you are a player who is familiar with this game table, you can see that by seeing this development effect, you will develop not SP Reach 1 but SP Reach 2 with high expectation of big hits, and the interest of the game will be greatly improved. Even in the case of developing to SP reach 2, the character display of "duel" may not be displayed, and the same development effect as that of SP reach 1 may be executed.

In FIG. 40 (c6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 2 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 2. Due to the development to SP reach 2, the expectation of a big hit by the image related to the repeated hit button displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c4) was 30% as shown in FIG. 33 (a). become. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c6), the opening effect of the reach effect display of the SP reach 2 is performed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right.

In FIG. 40 (c7), the reach selection effect is started. This reach selection effect is an effect in which the stage of the duel effect can be selected by the operation of the player, and the jackpot expectation does not differ depending on the stage. That is, the reach selection effect is not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. The reach selection effect is composed of an introduction effect and an operation effect. First, the introduction effect is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c7) displays an introduction effect in the reach selection effect. The effect period of the introduction effect is the period of t11 shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C), which is shorter than the period of t9 of the introduction effect pattern 2 and further shorter than the period of t1 of the introduction effect pattern 1. It is limited to a short period so that the player does not have high expectations by lengthening the production period of the introductory production.

When this short introduction effect is completed, the operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c8), the operation effect is started. Even in the operation effect of the reach selection effect, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) is displayed. In addition, a normal size blue meter display 136bN is also displayed. In addition, the character display indicating the operation type is a tutorial-like display, and a character display 136cT such as "select by button operation" is displayed with the same character size as the normal size. As described above, in the operation effect of the reach selection effect, the normal button-related image (button image 136aN) is displayed, and the large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is not displayed. The large button related image is not displayed when the response effect is not an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit. Since the display size of the large button-related image is large, it is easy for the player to expect a big hit, and the large button-related image is not displayed intentionally to prevent misunderstanding. The red button-related image may not be displayed when the response effect is not an effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit, or conversely, the red button-related image may be displayed. Also, the lever-related image is not displayed when the response effect is not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. In the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed, the operation of the operation lever 137, which has a large amount of operation, is required. In return for performing many operations, a response effect that suggests the expectation of the big hit is performed, and by not performing a response effect that does not suggest the expectation of the big hit, it is possible to reduce the feeling of annoyance to the operation. can do.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c8) has a castle town stage, a sea stage, a fusuma stage, and a wilderness stage at the 12 o'clock position, the 3 o'clock position, the 6 o'clock position, and the 9 o'clock position. The background images are displayed small, and the background image displayed at the 12 o'clock position is displayed in the selected window CW. In the operation effect of the reach selection effect, the background image moves clockwise each time the effect button 136 is operated, and when the operation valid period elapses, the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW is displayed. Set. In the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C), the entire operation valid period in the reach selection effect is shown as t12. The entire period t12 is the operation valid period (t2, t6) when the normal button-related image before the development effect is displayed, and when the normal button-related image or the large button-related image before the cut-in effect is displayed. It is longer than the operation valid period (t4, t8) (for example, 1.2 times longer), but shorter than the operation valid period (t10) when the image related to the repeated hit button is displayed, and the player selects it slowly to some extent. The period is as long as possible. As a result, it can be avoided that the operation of the effect button 136 is not in time. Even before the elapse of the entire operation valid period t12, if the effect button 136 is double-clicked, it can be set to the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time. good.

In FIG. 40 (c9), the entire operation valid period t12 has elapsed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the selected stage. In this example, the wilderness stage is supposed to be selected.

In the following Figure 40 (c6-1), the duel production on the wilderness stage has started, and the hero's lord and the villain of the enemy role are holding a gap at the decorative pattern display device 208 at a distance. An animation of how it is being displayed is displayed. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c6-2), the state is displayed in a large size, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 7", which has been reduced and displayed in the lower right, is displayed in the central portion.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 40.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c6-3) following from FIG. 40 (c6-2), an animation in which the distance between the hero's lord and the villain of the enemy role is shrinking is displayed.

Eventually, the introduction effect according to the introduction effect pattern 1 is started at the timing (c10) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C). As shown in FIG. 41 (c10), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, and the animation of the duel effect cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is being performed (the period of t13 shown in FIG. 37C), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 41 (c11), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 ends, and the operation effect starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c11), the animation of the duel effect becomes visible, and the hero's lord and the villain of the enemy role are still holding each other for a short time. In addition, an image related to a normal button is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. That is, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position), a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are displayed. Has been done. The expected degree of jackpot by the normal button-related image here is 10% as shown in FIG. 36 (a). At the timing of FIG. 41 (c11), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. The winning effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a winning effect that announces a big hit. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (C), it is shown that the winning effect is started when the entire operation valid period t14 elapses, but this is also for showing the period length of the entire period t14. In fact, the winning effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of the entire period t14. The specific example in FIG. 37 (C) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated immediately before the entire period t14 elapses, but as described above, the winning effect is also the effect button 136 within the operation valid period. Since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if is not operated, it can be seen as an example of the case where the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 41 (c12) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the winning effect is started. When the winning effect is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene in which the hero's lord and the villain who plays the enemy slash each other, and an animation in which one of them collapses at the end of the winning effect is displayed. If the hero's lord collapses, it will be a loss notice, and if the enemy ronin falls, it will be a big hit notice. The notice of loss may be a notice of confirmation of loss (expectation of big hit is 0%) or a notice of rich loss (expectation of big hit is 5%). Further, the notice of the big hit may be a notice that the big hit is confirmed (the expectation of the big hit is 100%) or a notice that the big hit is rich (the expectation of the big hit is 95%). In addition, in the case of a notice of rich loss or a notice of rich big hit, the decorative design may be re-changed after the winning effect is completed, and the result may be reversed. In this example, an animation in which the main character's lord collapses (an animation that announces a loss) is displayed.

In FIG. 41 (c13), the winning effect is finished, and the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) of the combination of decorative symbols is started. That is, while the animation in which the main character's lord collapses is displayed, "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed. Temporary stop is displayed. At this stage, the mini symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking display of "-" indicating that the symbol is being displayed in the special figure 1 continues.

After the temporary stop display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is performed, the definite display of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also shows FIG. 41 (c14). As shown, the final display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is performed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x" indicating the deviation, and "767" is also stopped and displayed on the mini symbol.

In FIG. 37 (D), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the image related to the repeated hit button is executed, and then the development effect is performed to develop into the SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect is started, the reach selection effect is first performed, then the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 4 is started, the operation effect in which the normal lever-related image is displayed is executed, and then the winning effect is performed. This is an example in which the combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is confirmed and displayed. That is, in this example, it is an example of developing into SP reach 2 and making a big hit.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a specific example shown in FIG. 37 (D) step by step. The figure shown in (d1) in FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a state at the timing of the reference numeral (d1) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D), and the figures shown after (d2) are also the same. It is a figure which shows the state at the timing of the symbol shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D). Hereinafter, explanations will be given including explanations that overlap with the examples shown in FIGS. 38 to 41.

FIG. 42 (d1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 12 (1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is usually variable. The variable icon h0 in the red display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 in the white display mode (default display mode) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , H12 are displayed. Further, a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 42 (d2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol changes only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 42 (d2-1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the introduction effect has not started yet.

In FIG. 42 (d3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction effect here is the effect of the introduction effect pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 42 (d3), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative symbol cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is being performed (the period of t15 shown in FIG. 37 (D)), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 42 (d4), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 ends, and the operation effect starts.
In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d4), the decorative symbol becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative symbol continues only in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, an image related to the repeated hit button is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal size button image 136aN imitating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) and a normal size blue meter display 136bN are displayed, and further, a "normal size" character size " A black character display 136cC called "repeated hits" is also displayed.

At the timing of FIG. 42 (d4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The effect button 136 is repeatedly hit within the operation valid period. In response to the repeated hits of the effect button 136, the development effect is started if the development is successful, and the development failure is notified if the development is unsuccessful. In the case of development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notifying the development failure. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (D), it is shown that the development effect is started when the entire operation valid period t16 has elapsed. In the case of the continuous striking operation, unlike the one-push operation, the continuous striking operation is basically performed until the entire operation valid period t16 elapses. In addition, as an exception, the development effect may be started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the elapse of the entire period t16. The length of the total period t15 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (D) is the length of the total period t2 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (A) and the total period of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37 (B). It is longer than the length of t6 and 1.6 times longer. However, the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 42 (d4) and the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 38 (a4) are the same as the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 39 (b4). The size (length).

FIG. 42 (d5) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "SP reach" is displayed below the decorative design in which the variable display of the decorative design continues, and the character display of "duel" is also displayed above it. In addition, even if it develops to SP reach 2, the character display "Duel" is not displayed so that the type of SP reach is not known in the development production, and the same development production as the development production of SP reach 1 is performed. It may be executed.

In FIG. 42 (d6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 2 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 2. Due to the development to SP reach 2, the expectation of a big hit by the image related to the repeated hit button displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d4) was 30% as shown in FIG. 33 (a). become. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d6), the opening effect of the reach effect display of the SP reach 2 is performed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right.

In FIG. 42 (d7), the reach selection effect is started. The reach selection effect here is the same effect as the reach selection effect described with reference to FIGS. 40 (c7) to (c9), and the introduction effect is first performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d7) displays an introduction effect in the reach selection effect. The effect period of the introduction effect is the period of t17 shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D), which is shorter than the period of t9 of the introduction effect pattern 2 and further shorter than the period of t1 of the introduction effect pattern 1.

When this short introduction effect is completed, the operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d8), the operation effect is started, and a normal size button image 136aN imitating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) is displayed. .. In addition, a normal size blue meter display 136bN and a character display 136cT such as "select by button operation" with the same character size as the normal size are also displayed. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 also displays a selection window CW on which the background image of the selected stage is displayed. In the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D), the entire operation valid period in the reach selection effect is shown as t18. The entire period t18 is also the operation valid period (t2, t6) when the normal button-related image before the development effect is displayed, and when the normal button-related image or the large button-related image before the cut-in effect is displayed. It is longer than the operation valid period (t4, t8) (for example, 1.2 times longer), but shorter than the operation valid period (t10) when the image related to the repeated hit button is displayed. Even before the elapse of the entire operation valid period t18, if the effect button 136 is double-clicked, it can be set to the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time. good.

In FIG. 42 (d9), the entire operation valid period t18 has elapsed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the selected stage. In this example, the castle town stage is selected.

In the following Figure 42 (d6-1), the duel production on the castle town stage has started, and the hero's lord and the villain of the enemy role are holding a gap at the decorative pattern display device 208 at a distance. An animation of how it is being displayed is displayed. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d6-2), the state is displayed in a large size, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 7", which has been reduced and displayed in the lower right, is displayed in the central portion. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the figure (d6-3), an animation in which the distance between the hero's lord and the villain of the enemy role is shrinking is displayed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42.

Eventually, the introduction effect according to the introduction effect pattern 4 is started at the timing (d10) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D). The timing of (d10) shown in FIG. 37 (D) is earlier than the timing of (c10) shown in FIG. 37 (C), and is the period from the start of SP reach 2 to the start of the introduction effect. It can be seen that the length is shorter in the specific example (example shown in FIG. 43) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D) than in the specific example (example shown in FIG. 41) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C). .. The introduction effect in the example shown in FIG. 43 is the effect of the introduction effect pattern 4. In the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 4, as shown in FIG. 43 (d10), it seems that a normal size operation lever 137 is imitated on each of the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. An unmaterialized translucent image appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 43 (d10-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 43 (d10-2), the two images are overlapped at the lower left, and in the following figure (d10-3), the two overlapping images are covered by the effect image ef and are temporarily invisible. It should be noted that this effect image ef also covers a part of the main character's palace and the decorative pattern of "decoration 7" on the left side, and these covered displays are temporarily invisible.

In FIG. 43 (d11), the operation effect is started, the effect image ef disappears in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the two overlapping images are embodied lever images. That is, in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (d11), a normal size lever image 137aN simulating a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (start point position) is displayed. In addition, a normal size blue meter display 137bN and a normal size "lever on" black character display 137cN are also displayed, and a normal lever-related image is displayed. The normal size lever image 137aN and the black character display 137cN that says "lever on" cover a part of the decorative pattern of "decoration 7" on the left side, and the normal size blue meter display 137bN covers a part of the main character's palace. ing. The expected degree of jackpot by the normal lever-related image here is 20% as shown in FIG. 36 (a). The introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 4 is executed over the period from FIG. 43 (d10) to FIG. 43 (d11) (the period of t19 shown in FIG. 37 (D)), and the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 4 is It can be seen that it is longer than the effect period of the introduction effect pattern 2 (the period of t7 shown in FIG. 37 (B)).

At the timing of FIG. 43 (d11), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 137bN is in the state before the decrease starts, but the decrease starts immediately.

The operation lever 137 is operated within the operation valid period. The winning effect is started according to the operation of the operating lever 137. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a winning effect that announces a big hit. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37 (D), it is shown that the winning effect is started when the entire period t20 of the operation valid period elapses, but this is also for showing the period length of the entire period t20. In fact, the winning effect is started according to the operation of the operation lever 137 without waiting for the elapse of t20 for the entire period. The specific example in FIG. 37 (D) can be seen as an example in which the operation lever 137 is operated immediately before the entire period t20 elapses, but as described above, the winning effect is also the operation lever 137 within the operation valid period. Since it is an effect that is executed when the operation effect is completed even if is not operated, it can be seen as an example of the case where the operation lever 137 is not operated within the operation valid period.

Further, in the example in which the normal button-related image shown in FIG. 41 is displayed, when the operation lever 137 is operated instead of the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, the operation lever 137 is operated in response to the operation of the operation lever 137. Although the winning effect is not started, in the example in which the normal lever-related image shown in FIG. 43 is displayed, when the effect button 136 is pressed once instead of the operation lever 137 within the operation valid period. Even so, the winning effect is started according to the operation of the effect button 136. Since the operation lever 137 has a larger amount of operation than the effect button 136, even if there is a player who feels that the operation is troublesome, the operation of the operation lever 137 can be substituted by the operation of the effect button 136, and the operation is troublesome. It will be resolved.

FIG. 43 (d12) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol display device 208 when the winning effect is started. When the winning effect is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene in which the hero's lord and the villain who plays the enemy slash each other, and an animation in which one of them collapses at the end of the winning effect is displayed. In this example, an animation in which a ronin who plays the role of an enemy collapses (an animation that announces a big hit) is displayed.

In FIG. 43 (d13), the winning effect is finished, and the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) of the combination of decorative symbols is started. That is, while the animation of the fallen ronin of the enemy role is displayed, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. Temporary stop is displayed. At this stage, the mini symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking display of "-" indicating that the symbol is being displayed in the special figure 1 continues.

After the temporary stop display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is performed, the definite display of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also shows FIG. 43 (d14). As shown, the final display of the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is performed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "○" indicating a big hit, and "777" is also stopped and displayed in the mini symbol.

As described above, the normal button-related image (normal lever-related image) and the large button-related image (large lever-related image) have the same effective period length, but the meter display size (length) is different. Therefore, the speed at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or the speed at which it increases) is different. That is, the meter display of the large button-related image (large lever-related image) reduces the display area faster than the meter display of the normal button-related image (normal lever-related image). The size (length) of the meter display may be the same for the normal button-related image (normal lever-related image) and the large button-related image (large lever-related image).

In addition, the size (length) of the meter display is the same for the normal button-related image and the repeated hit button-related image, but the length of the valid period is different, so the speed at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or increases). Speed) will be different. That is, the meter display of the image related to the repeated hit button has a slower rate of decrease in the display area than the meter display of the image related to the normal button.

In the present embodiment, the development effect is executed in the normal reach period, but the development effect may be executed in the SP reach 1 period or the SP reach 2 period.

Further, the introduction effect pattern 1 of the present embodiment is such that the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, but it seems to imitate the effect button 136 as in the introduction effect pattern 2, but it is not materialized. It may be produced using a translucent image. Even in that case, it is preferable that the introduction effect pattern 2 has a longer effect period than the introduction effect pattern 1.

Further, the introduction effect pattern 3 of the present embodiment is an effect in which the wipe display wp expands from each of the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 to perform wipe-in and wipe-out as in the wipe effect. An effect using a semi-transparent image that seems to imitate the operation lever 137 but is not materialized as in the effect pattern 4 may be used. Even in that case, it is preferable that the introduction effect pattern 4 has a longer effect period than the introduction effect pattern 3.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effect is executed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, but the operation effect is executed not only in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. It may be executed in other states as well. For example, it may be executed in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and in such a case, the lever is performed in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state rather than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. It suffices to make the related image easy to display. In addition, the lever-related image is more likely to be displayed in the special map low-probability normal map high-probability state than in the special map low-probability normal map high-probability state. , The lever-related image may be displayed more easily in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state than in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

Next, a modified example of FIG. 37 (A) will be described. Also in this modification, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the normal button-related image is executed, and then the development effect is performed to develop to the SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and if it is displayed, the small button related image of the big hit is displayed. After the operation effect is executed, the gold cut-in image is displayed. This is an example in which an in-effect is performed and the combination of decorative symbols of the jackpot is confirmed and displayed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example of FIG. 37 (A) will be mainly described, and the duplicated description may be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a stepwise modification of FIG. 37 (A).

The figure shown in the figure number (a'2) of FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a state corresponding to the timing of the reference numeral (a2) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A), and is a diagram showing a state corresponding to the timing of the reference numeral (a'3) and thereafter. The same applies to the figure shown in. That is, the presence or absence of ‘’ is ignored, and the reference numerals shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A) and the figure numbers in FIG. 44 correspond to each other.

In FIG. 44 (a'2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (a'2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is displayed only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The fluctuation display of is continuing. The variation icon h0 in this modification is a red display mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is 50%.

In FIG. 44 (a'2-1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still continued only in the middle symbol display area 208b.

In FIG. 44 (a'3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction effect here is an effect of the introduction effect pattern 1, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out.

In FIG. 44 (a'4), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 ends, and the operation effect starts. In the normal reach state, the image related to the normal button is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position), a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are displayed. Has been done.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period, the development effect is started in FIG. 44 (a'5), and the character display "SP reach" is displayed.

In FIG. 44 (a'6), the development effect is completed, and the normal reach is changed to the SP reach 1.

In FIG. 44 (a'7), the introduction effect by the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and although it seems to imitate the normal size effect button 136 on the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is materialized. A translucent image that is not displayed appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 44 (a'7-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 44 (a'7-2), an animation in which the two images are overlapped and materialized in the lower left and is reduced to a smaller size is displayed, and in the following figure (b8), it is large. The button image 136aB is displayed, and the operation effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (a'8) displays a small-sized small button image 136aS in which the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position) is reduced. In addition, a small-sized small blue meter display 136bS and a small-sized small black character display 136cS called "press" are also displayed, and a small button-related image for confirming a big hit is displayed. The length of the operation valid period here is the same as the length of the period of t4 shown in FIG. 37 (A). In the case of the small button image 136aS, it may be difficult to notice because it is a small size. Therefore, if the operation valid period is shortened according to the size of the image, the operation may be delayed and the operation may not be in time. By not shortening the validity period, it is possible to prevent the operation from being missed.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period, and the cut-in effect is started in FIG. 44 (a'9) in response to the operation of the effect button 136. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (a'9) displays a gold cut-in image CTG whose edge portion is gold so as to overlap the reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expected degree of jackpot of this gold cut-in image CTG is 80% as shown in FIG. 34 (b), but the jackpot is confirmed by displaying the small button image 136aS.

In FIG. 44 (a'10), the decorative symbol reduced to the lower right starts temporary stop display in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and "decoration 7". -Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "is a temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation display) of a combination of jackpot decorative symbols. In addition, an animation of the lord who has a peace signed hand protruding forward is also displayed.

Then, in FIG. 44 (a'11), a definite display of a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is performed.

Subsequently, a modified example of FIG. 37 (B) will be described. In the modified example of FIG. 37 (B), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started during the normal reach, the operation effect of displaying the image related to the red button is executed, and then the development effect is performed to the SP reach 1. Develop. During the execution of this introduction effect, the lower plate full tank error is detected, and the display of the ball removal error notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, the operation effect of displaying the large button-related image is executed, and then the cut-in effect of displaying the red cut-in image is performed. Up to this point, the display of the ball removal error notification remains displayed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example of FIG. 37 (B) will be mainly described, and the duplicated description may be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a stepwise modification of FIG. 37 (B).

The figure shown in the figure number (b'1) of FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a state corresponding to the timing of the reference numeral (b1) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B), and is a diagram showing a state corresponding to the timing of the reference numeral (b'2) and thereafter. The same applies to the figure shown in. That is, the presence or absence of ‘’ is ignored, and the reference numerals shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B) correspond to the reference numerals in FIG. 45.

In FIG. 45 (b'1), the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is usually variable.

In FIG. 45 (b'2), the reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (b'2), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is displayed only in the middle symbol display area 208b. The fluctuation display of is continuing.

In FIG. 45 (b'3), the introduction effect by the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and it seems that the normal size effect button 136 is embodied in the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. A translucent image that is not displayed appears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, it is detected that the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 is full due to the game ball, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an error display BER such as "Please pull out the ball", which is a display of the ball removal error notification. Is displayed above the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This error display BER is displayed overlapping with the image on the right side that moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 45 (b'3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the following figure (b4'), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 ends and the operation effect starts. The image related to the red button is displayed at the lower left of the display screen in the normal reach state. The red button-related image displayed in this modification is slightly different from the red button-related image described with reference to FIG. 31. That is, the point that the red button image 136aR imitating the state in which the button lamp 138 emits red light at the initial position is displayed is the same, but the normal button is replaced with the red meter display 136bR in which the red bar portion is displayed. The blue meter display 136bN, in which the blue bar portion is displayed, which is displayed when the related image is displayed, is displayed. Blue is a color with high visibility, and even when the red button image 136aR is displayed, high visibility is maintained by displaying the blue meter display 136bN, and the operation validity period is easily transmitted to the player. However, if the button image is displayed in a color with a considerably high expectation of a big hit (for example, a rainbow color in which the expectation of a big hit is 100%), the meter display is also displayed in that color (for example, a rainbow color). It may be done. Further, instead of the red character display 136cR, which is a display such as "press" in red characters, the black character display 136cN, which is also displayed in the case of a normal button-related image, is also displayed. .. Even if the operation effect is started, the ball discharge lever 132 shown in FIG. 1 is not operated, and the error display BER is still displayed. The error display BER does not overlap with the red button related image. The normal button-related image may be displayed instead of the red button-related image, and the error display BER does not overlap with the normal button-related image.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period, the development effect is started in FIG. 45 (b'5), and the character display "SP reach" is displayed. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the ball discharge lever 132 is not operated, and the display of the ball removal error notification remains displayed. When developing to SP reach 2, the character display of "duel" (see FIG. 42 (d5)) is overlapped by the error display BER.

In FIG. 45 (b'6), the development effect is completed, and the normal reach is changed to the SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the degree of expectation of a big hit by the red button-related image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (b'4) is not shown in FIG. 33 (a). For example, 45%. The ball discharge lever 132 has not been operated yet, and the animation in which the face of the lord is greatly projected, which is the reach effect display of SP reach 1, is overlapped by the error display BER.

In FIG. 45 (b'7), the introduction effect by the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and it seems that the effect buttons having a size larger than the normal size are imitated on the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. A translucent image appears that is not materialized. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'7-1), both the upper left image and the upper right image move toward the vicinity of the center. Then, in FIG. 45 (b'7-2), an animation is displayed in which the two images are overlapped and materialized near the center and enlarged to a larger size, which is followed by the same figure (b'8). Then, the large button image 136aB is displayed, and the operation effect is started. The ball discharge lever 132 is not operated even during the introduction effect by the introduction effect pattern 2, the error display BER remains displayed, and the unmaterialized translucent image and the animation enlarged to a large size are overwritten by the error display BER. Wrapped.

When the operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'8), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a large size in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position). The button image 136aB is displayed. This large size button image 136aB is also overlapped by the error display BER. In addition, a large-sized large blue meter display 136bB and a large-sized large black character display 136cB called "press" are also displayed.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period, and in response to the operation of the effect button 136, a red cut-in image CTR having a red edge is displayed in FIG. 45 (b'9). Up to this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is still not operated, and the red cut-in image CTR is also overlapped by the error display BER.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a state when the front frame door 106 is opened while the operation effect is being performed.

FIG. 46 (a) shows the same situation as the timing of (a4) in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the operation effect is started under the normal reach state, and the operation effect is related to the normal button. The image is displayed. That is, a normal size button image 136aN that imitates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (start point position), a normal size blue meter display 136bN, and a normal size "press" black character display 136cN are displayed. Has been done. A voice "press" is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

On the left side of FIG. 46A, the effect button 136 when the operation effect is being executed is displayed, and the button lamp 138 emits white light.

In FIG. 46B, the front frame door 106 that is openably and closably attached to the front surface of the main body 104 is opened while the operation effect is being performed. That is, the front frame door 106 is opened within the operation valid period and before the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the operation effect is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208. However, when it is detected that the front frame door 106 is opened, the button lamp 138 is restricted from emitting light, and the button lamp 138 is turned off. Even if the button lamp 138 is turned off, the button image 136aN displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change, and continues to be displayed while imitating the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light. Further, although the voice "press" is no longer output from the speaker 120, the normal size "press" black character display 136cN displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an error display DER notifying that the front frame door opening error has occurred.

Even if the effect button 136 is operated with the front frame door 106 open, the response effect such as the development effect is executed.

In the operation effect, in addition to the sound output from the speaker 120, the lamps such as the game board lamp 442 shown in FIG. 4 are also lit or blinking, and when a front frame door opening error is detected, these lamps are also lit. The light emission is not restricted, and it keeps lighting and blinking. However, these lamps may also be turned off due to light emission restrictions.

Further, when the front frame door opening error occurred, the button lamp 138 was turned off, but instead of turning off the button lamp 138, instead of the light emission in the operation effect (here, white light emission). The light may be emitted in a mode of notifying that an error of opening the front frame door has occurred (a mode different from the light emission in the operation effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'-3-1), when the lower plate full tank error is detected, the light emission regulation of the button lamp 138, the sound output regulation of the speaker 120, the game board lamp 442, etc. When the effect button 136 is operated, a response effect such as a cut-in effect is executed.

As mentioned above, some examples of performing the operation effect of operating the effect button 136 and the operation lever 137 have been described, but when the number of reserved special figures is accumulated by a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect button 136 may vibrate. There may be. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of reservations for special figures are accumulated, the effect button 136 does not vibrate, but the enter button 1930, or the upper button 1910 or the lower button 1920 may vibrate.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 47. Here, FIG. 47 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 47), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, an appropriate number of each symbol is printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three cards are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 has a built-in button lamp. The chance button 1100 is an operating means corresponding to the effect button 136 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can similarly take a plurality of states (light emitting state, etc.), and operates the chance button 1100. The state may be changeable during the validity period.

The information display button unit 1050 is composed of a plurality of buttons such as an up button, a down button, a left button, a right button, an OK button, and a cancel button. For example, a user menu (for example, a player's individual game history information is set). It functions as an operation button for calling up the menu), and as an operation button for adjusting the volume of the speaker and the amount of light of various lamps. The information display button unit 1050 is an operating means corresponding to the operating key unit 190 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Further, an effect lever 1046 is provided on the right side of the information display button unit 1050. The effect lever 1046 can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057, and a lever lamp is arranged inside. The effect lever 1046 is an operating means corresponding to the operating lever 137 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

It should be noted that the predetermined conditions for selecting music are that if the slot machine 1000 is shown in FIG. 47, the bonus of the n consecutive villas is won, and that a specific symbol (for example, 7 red symbols) is aligned and the bonus is won. Winning a bonus with all the symbols on the winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT of the 10th consecutive villa, winning the predetermined number of sets or adding the predetermined number of games, predetermined It is possible to win an AT that has the same role as.

Further, the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 is a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, or the like in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47. In addition, the time-saving gaming state becomes the ART state, the AT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, and becomes the AT state, the RT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the ART state. ..

In the above description,
"The first operating means [for example, the effect button 136] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a first operation image [for example, a button image imitating a normal size button such as a button image 136aN and a red button image 136aR, or a black character "press" in an operation effect using the first operation means. It is a means capable of promoting operations such as display 136cN and red character display 136cR, or displaying a normal size character image indicating an operation type, or a combination of a button image and a character image].
The display means is a large size of a second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a combination of a large button image 136aB and a large black character display 136cB in an operation effect using the first operation means. Image] is a means that can be displayed,
The second operation image is an image having a display size of a first magnification [for example, 2 times shown in the table of FIG. 31] larger than the display size of the first operation image.
The length of the second operation validity period is the length of the second magnification of the length of the first operation validity period.
The second operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed.
The first operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed.
The second magnification is a magnification smaller than the first magnification [for example, 1 times shown in the table of FIG. 31].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game console, when a second operation image with a larger size than usual is displayed, if the operation validity period is lengthened at the same magnification as the image magnification, the player will feel uncomfortable, so the operation is effective. By making the length of the period smaller than the magnification of the image, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort. In addition, it is possible to prevent a redundant effect for a player who does not perform the operation.

The second operation image may be an enlarged image of the first operation image, or may be an image prepared separately from the first operation image.

Further, the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed and the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed may be the same effect (common effect), or different effects (the former is the first). The operation effect, the latter may be the second operation effect).

Further, the length of the second operation valid period may be the same as the length of the first operation valid period. That is, the value of the second magnification may be 1.0.

again,
"The display means promotes an operation such as a third operation image [for example, a black character display 136cC of" repeated hit "and a black character display 136cL of" long press "in an operation effect using the first operation means, or an operation type. It is a means that can display a normal size text image that represents
The third operation image is an image having a display size of the second magnification [for example, 1 time] of the display size of the first operation image.
In the operation effect in which the third operation image is displayed, the length of the third operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective is longer than the length of the second operation valid period. Is the length of the magnification of
The third magnification is a magnification larger than the second magnification [for example, 1.6 times shown in the table of FIG. 31].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third magnification may be smaller than the first magnification.

again,
"The display means displays, together with the first operation image, an image relating to the first operation validity period [for example, a blue meter display 136bN, a red meter display 136bR].
The display means displays an image related to the second operation validity period [for example, a large meter display 136bB] together with the second operation image.
The display means displays an image related to the third operation validity period [for example, a blue meter display 136bN] together with the third operation image.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A second operating means [for example, an operating lever 137, an up button 1910, a down button 1920, or an enter button 1930] is provided.
The second operating means is an operating means different from the first operating means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In the first operating means, the operation amount from the reference position, which is the non-operation position, to the end point position, which is the position of the operation end point, is the first operation amount [for example, see the arrow shown in FIG. 30A]. It is a thing
In the second operating means [for example, the operating lever 137], the operating amount is the second operating amount [for example, see the arrow shown in FIG. 30 (c)].
The second operation amount is larger than the first operation amount.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the display size of the second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a large size image of a combination of the large button image 136aB and the large black character display 136cB] is the display size of the first operation image. It is n times (n> 1) [for example, twice as shown in the table of FIG. 31] of the display size of [for example, the button image 136aN or the black character display 136cN of "press" or the combination of the button image and the character image]. The first operation image suggests an expectation that a special game (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the second operation image also suggests the expectation. The expectation degree suggested by the second operation image is m times (n> m> 1) of the expectation degree suggested by the first operation image [for example, the table of FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. 36 ( In the table of a), it is 1.8 times]. For example, n = 2 and m = 1.8. By increasing the display size of the operation image, it is possible to make the expectation higher than the actual expectation.

Further, while displaying the second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a large size image of a combination of a large button image 136aB and a large black character display 136cB], the one operation means [for example. , Effect button 136] may execute a suggestion effect [for example, a cut-in effect, a winning effect] that suggests the degree of expectation, but an effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation [for example, a development effect]. , Reach selection effect] may not be executed. On the other hand, when the first operation means is operated while the first operation image [for example, the button image 136aN or the black character display 136cN of "press" or the combination of the button image and the character image] is displayed, the suggestion effect is produced. In some cases, an effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is executed. Further, the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed and the effect that does not suggest the expectation degree is executed, or the effect that the first operation image is displayed and the effect that does not suggest the expectation degree is executed may be executed. In a certain operation effect, the length of the first operation valid period [for example, t12 shown in FIG. 37 (C) or t18 shown in FIG. 37 (D)] is changed to the length of the second operation valid period [. For example, it is made longer than t8] shown in FIG. 37 (B). In addition, the introduction effect performed before the start of this operation effect [for example, the introduction effect performed in the period of t11 shown in FIG. 37 (C) or the introduction effect performed in the period of t17 shown in FIG. 37 (D)]. The effect period is longer than that of the second introduction effect [for example, the introduction effect performed in the period of t7 shown in FIG. 37 (B)] performed before the start of the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed. Short or easy to get short. When the first operation means is operated in the operation effect in which the second operation image having a relatively large display size is displayed, the suggestion effect is executed in combination with the size of the display size, and the game is played. There is a case that the expectation that the player has an advantage is increased, but by preventing the display that does not suggest the degree of expectation from being displayed, the first one is prevented from being misunderstood that the player has a high expectation that the player has an advantage. Since the operation valid period is long, it is possible to prevent the operation of the first operating means from being missed.

Further, the second introduction effect [for example, the introduction effect performed in the period of t7 shown in FIG. 37 (B)] is usually the first operation image [for example, button image 136aN, red button image 136aR]. A button image that imitates a size button, a normal size character image that promotes operations such as black character display 136cN and red character display 136cR that says "press", or a combination of button image and character image that indicates the operation type] is displayed. The effect period is longer or tends to be longer than that of the first introduction effect [for example, the introduction effect performed in the period of t3 shown in FIG. 37 (A)] performed before the start of the operation effect. The length of the operation valid period [for example, t8 shown in FIG. 37 (B)] and the length of the first operation valid period [for example, t4 shown in FIG. 37 (B)] are the same. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid discomfort), the introduction effect of the operation effect (the first operation effect) in which the second operation image having a relatively large display size is displayed while keeping the length of the operation valid period the same. By lengthening the introduction effect), it is possible to improve the expectation that the second operation image will be displayed.

Further, the first operation image is displayed in the first color [for example, white] (hereinafter referred to as "first case") and in the second color [for example, red]. There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), and regardless of whether it is the first case or the second case, a period image relating to the first operation valid period [for example, a meter display]. The color of [the image of the bar portion] is the same color [for example, FIG. 45 (b'4)]. The same color is a color with high visibility, and by displaying the period image relating to the first operation valid period in the same color regardless of whether it is the first case or the second case. High visibility is maintained, and it is possible to easily inform the player of the operation validity period. However, when the first operation image is displayed in a third color [for example, rainbow color], the color of the period image changes [for example, changes to the third color (rainbow color)].

Further, the display means is a fourth operation image [for example, a reduced image of a button image, a reduced image of an operation promotion image, or a combination of a button image and an operation promotion image in an operation effect using the first operation means. The fourth operation image is a means capable of displaying [reduced image], and the fourth operation image is an image having a display size of a fourth magnification (for example, 0.8 times) of the display size of the first operation image. The value of the fourth magnification is less than 1, and the fourth operation image may be a reduced image of the first operation image. In this case, the size of the display size is the fourth operation image <first operation image <second operation image, and the size of the expectation is the first operation image <second operation image <. It becomes the fourth operation image. On the other hand, the length of the fourth operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation effect using the first operation means is the same as the length of the first operation valid period. It is also the same as the length of the operation valid period of [For example, FIG. 44 (a'8)]. In the case of the fourth operation image, it may be difficult to notice, so if the operation valid period is shortened according to the size of the image, the operation may not be in time, and the operation is performed by not shortening the operation valid period. Prevents you from being too late.

Further, the display size of the first period image [for example, blue meter display 136bN] regarding the first operation valid period and the second period image [for example, large meter display 136bB] regarding the second operation valid period are also displayed. Is different. Both the first period image and the second period image are images showing the length of the remaining time of the operation valid period or the elapsed time of the operation valid period [for example, the image of the bar portion of the meter display]. Yes, the rate of change, such as the rate at which the remaining time decreases or the rate at which the elapsed time increases, differs between the first period image and the second period image, which have different display sizes. For example, the speed at which the display area of the meter image decreases and the speed at which it increases are different. When the length of the first operation valid period and the length of the second operation valid period are the same, and the display size of the second period image is larger than that of the first period image. The change rate of the second period image is faster than that of the first period image. However, the display size may be the same and the change rate may be the same between the first period image and the second period image.

Further, the error display [for example, the error display BER such as "please pull out the ball"] is displayed on the upper layer, and the first operation image [for example, the button image 136aN or the black character display 136cN or the button image "press" is displayed. And the combination of the character image] [for example, FIG. 45 (b'4)], the second operation image [for example, the large button image 136aB or the large black character display 136cB, or the large button image 136aB and the large black character]. Large-sized image with a combination of display 136cB] overlaps [eg, FIG. 45 (b'8)].

Further, when a predetermined error [for example, a door opening error] is detected, a part of the operation effect is regulated [for example, light emission regulation, sound output regulation, etc. of the first operating means], but the first. The operation of the operation means of is effective. Further, when another certain error [for example, a lower plate full tank error] is detected, the operation effect is not restricted, and the operation of the first operating means is also effective [for example, FIG. 45]. Example shown in].

Further, when the second operation image is displayed, the rate of vibration of the first operation means is higher than when the first operation image is displayed.

In the above description,
"The first operating means [for example, the effect button 136] and
A second operating means [for example, operating lever 137],
It is a game table equipped with
In the first operation means, the operation amount from the start point position which is the initial position before the operation to the end point position which is the position of the operation end point is the first operation amount [for example, the arrow shown in FIG. 30A]. And
In the second operating means, the manipulated variable is that of the second manipulated variable [for example, the arrow shown in FIG. 30 (c)].
The second operation amount is larger than the first operation amount,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

By providing the operation means having different operation amounts, it is possible to provide variations in the operation effect using the operation means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The operation amount is the maximum operation amount in each operation means.

again,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] at least including effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, button lamp 138, lever lamp 139, upper effect device 2, lower effect. Device 3, side effect device 4, etc.]
The display means can display a first operation promotion image [for example, a button image 136aN, a blue meter display 136bN, a black character display 136cN, or a normal button-related image] that encourages the operation of the first operation means.
The display means can display a second operation promotion image [for example, a lever image 137aN, a blue meter display 137bN, a black character display 137cN, or a normal lever-related image] that encourages the operation of the second operation means.
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion image is being displayed, the effect means is expected to perform a special game [for example, a jackpot game] that is advantageous to the player [for example, the jackpot game]. There are cases where a suggestion effect [for example, a cut-in effect, a winning effect, a dialogue notice effect] that suggests [the degree of expectation of a big hit] is executed.
When the second operation means is operated while the second operation promotion image is being displayed, the effect means has a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation [for example, a cut-in effect, a winning effect, a dialogue notice effect]. May run,
The first operation promotion image also suggests the degree of expectation [for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 34 (a), 10% shown in the table of FIG. 36 (a)].
The second operation promotion image also suggests the degree of expectation [for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 34 (a), 20% shown in the table of FIG. 36 (a)].
The expected degree suggested by the second operation-promoted image is higher than the expected degree suggested by the first operation-promoted image.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By increasing the amount of operation of the second operating means having a high degree of expectation, the higher the degree of expectation, the more responsive the operation becomes, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The degree of expectation suggested by the first operation promotion image [for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 34 (a), 10% shown in the table of FIG. 36 (a)] and the first operation. The expectation degree suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the operation of the first operating means while the promotion image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation degree shown in the table of FIG. 34 (b), the jackpot in the winning effect. Confirmation (100%) and Loss confirmation (0%)] are different. That is, the expectation degree suggested by the suggestion effect may be higher or lower than the expectation degree suggested by the first operation promotion image. In addition, there may be a case where the expectation degree of both is the same.

Further, the expectation degree [for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 34 (a), 20% shown in the table of FIG. 36 (a)] and the second operation suggested by the second operation promotion image. The expectation degree suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the operation of the first operating means while the promotion image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation degree shown in the table of FIG. 34 (b), the jackpot in the winning effect. Confirmation (100%) and Loss confirmation (0%)] are different. That is, the expectation degree suggested by the suggestion effect may be higher or lower than the expectation degree suggested by the second operation promotion image. In addition, there may be a case where the expectation degree of both is the same.

Further, the suggestion effect executed by operating the first operating means and the suggestion effect executed by operating the second operating means are the same effect (common effect) [for example, cut-in. It may be a notice effect] or a different effect (the former is the first suggestion effect [for example, cut-in notice], and the latter is the second suggestion effect [for example, the winning effect]).

Further, the first operation promotion image is an image displayed in an operation effect using the first operation means. The second operation promotion image is an image displayed in an operation effect using the second operation means.

again,
"The effect means is the first operation means [for example, effect button 136" while the second operation promotion image [for example, lever image 137aN, blue meter display 137bN or black character display 137cN or normal lever-related image] is displayed. ] Is operated, the suggestion effect [for example, the winning effect] may be executed.
The effect means is the second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] while the first operation promotion image [for example, the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN or the black character display 136cN or the normal button-related image] is displayed. Even if is operated, the suggestion effect [for example, the winning effect] is not executed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the operation of the first operation means is effective while the second operation promotion image is being displayed, but the operation of the second operation means is invalid while the first operation promotion image is being displayed. ..

The second operation means can be used to provide an operation having an appropriately large amount of operation to a player who is seeking an operation means having a responsive operation, and the first operation means having a small amount of operation can be used as an operation amount. By making it possible to use it in place of the second operation means having a large amount of operation, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player who thinks that the operation with a large amount of operation is troublesome.

Although the player may think that the second operation means is troublesome to operate because the operation amount is larger than that of the first operation means, the operation of the second operation means is the first operation. It can be substituted by the operation of the operation means of.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation promotion image in the first aspect [for example, the aspect of the normal button-related image].
The display means can display the first operation promotion image in a second mode [for example, a mode of a large button-related image].
The first operation-promoting image of the second aspect is an image having a display size of the first magnification [for example, 2 times] of the display size of the first operation-promoting image of the first aspect.
The length of the operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means when displaying the first operation promotion image of the second aspect is effective [for example, the length of the period of t8 in FIG. 37 (B)). [Sa] is the length of the operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective when displaying the first operation promotion image of the first aspect [for example, t2 in FIG. 37 (A). And the length of the period of t4 or the length of the period of t6 in FIG. 37 (B)] is the length of the second magnification [for example, 1 time].
The second magnification is a smaller magnification than the first magnification.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The operation valid period is a period started before the first operation promotion image is displayed regardless of whether it is the second aspect or the first aspect. It may be the period during the display of the first operation promotion image, or it may be the period including the period after the first operation promotion image is displayed. .. That is, at least the period during the display of the first operation promotion image may be included. Further, the length of the operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the effect of displaying the operation promotion image of the first aspect of the second aspect is the first of the first aspect. The operation of the first operation means in the effect of displaying the operation promotion image of the above may be the length of the second magnification of the length of the operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective. If the value of the second magnification is 1.0, the lengths of the operation valid periods of both are the same.

again,
"A third operating means [for example, up button 1910 or down button 1920] is provided.
In the third operation means, the operation amount is that of the third operation amount [for example, the arrow shown in FIG. 30 (b)].
The third operation amount is smaller than the first operation amount,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the second introduction effect [for example, the lever introduction effect executed during the period of t19 in FIG. 37 (D)] performed before the start of the operation effect in which the second operation promotion image is displayed is better. The effect period is longer than the first introduction effect [for example, the button introduction effect executed in the period of t13 in FIG. 37 (C)] performed before the start of the operation effect in which the first operation promotion image is displayed. Or it tends to be long. However, the length of the first operation valid period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation effect in which the first operation promotion image is displayed [for example, the period of t14 in FIG. 37 (C)). [Length] and the length of the second operation valid period in which the operation of the second operation means is effective in the operation effect in which the second operation promotion image is displayed [for example, t20 in FIG. 37 (D). Length of period] is the same. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid discomfort), the length of the operation validity period is the same, and the introduction effect of the operation means with a large amount of operation is lengthened to operate the operation means with a large amount of operation. Is ready and can prevent the operation from being missed.

Further, the display mode [for example, color or size] of the image [for example, blue meter display 136bN] relating to the first operation valid period and the image [for example, blue meter display 137bN] relating to the second operation valid period. The display mode [for example, color or size] is also the same.

Further, the launching operation means [for example, the ball launching handle 134 shown in FIG. 1] to be operated when launching the game ball is provided, and the second operating means [for example, the operating lever 137] is the first operating means. It is provided on the launching operation means side rather than [for example, the effect button 136]. The second operating means is provided on the launching operating means side because it interferes with the opening of the door [for example, the front frame door 106].

Further, the second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] is operated while the second operation promotion image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN or the black character display 137cN or the normal lever-related image] is displayed. Then, the suggestion effect [for example, cut-in effect, winning effect] may be executed, but the effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation [for example, reach selection effect] may not be executed. On the other hand, the first operation means [for example, effect button 136] is operated while the first operation promotion image [for example, button image 136aN, blue meter display 136bN or black character display 136cN or normal button related image] is displayed. Then, the suggestion effect may be executed, or the effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation may be executed. When the second operating means having a relatively large amount of operation is operated, the suggestion effect may be executed in return for performing many operations, but the effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of troublesome operation.

In addition, the operation effect of continuously operating the second operating means is not executed. Since it is troublesome to continuously operate the operation means having a relatively large amount of operation, it is preferable not to provide an operation effect for continuously operating the operation means.

Further, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of reservations are accumulated, the first operating means [for example, the effect button 136] may vibrate. Alternatively, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of holds are accumulated, the first operating means does not vibrate, but the third operating means [for example, the enter button 1930 or the up button 1910 or the down button 1920] vibrates. There may be cases.

Further, when the second operation promotion image [for example, lever image 137aN, blue meter display 137bN or black character display 137cN or normal lever-related image] is displayed, the first operation promotion image [for example, button image 136aN] is displayed. , Blue meter display 136bN or black character display 136cN or normal button-related image] is displayed at a higher rate of vibration of the first operating means [for example, effect button 136].

Further, the first operating means [for example, the effect button 136] may be such that the operating amount may change. That is, the first operating means may be capable of taking a state in which the amount of operation is large and a state in which the amount of operation is small.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, and the like. Etc. may be applied. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. are applied to the other embodiments, the modified example, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 80. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 48 to 80 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 48 to 80, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 48 to 80 are shown. In the description using FIG. 80, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 48 to 80 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp that is built in the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light. 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store to lend a ball, and a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. It is provided with a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. In FIG. 48, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 50.

FIG. 49 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 48 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 52). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to give a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 52). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 52) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 52). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 52), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 60 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. Although no setting is provided in the present embodiment, a plurality of settings may be provided and the jackpot probability or the like may be changed depending on the setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 50A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 50, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124, and as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are provided on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, 2nd special symbol display device 214, normal symbol hold lamp 216, 1st special symbol hold lamp 218, 2nd special symbol hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, one). It is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of a normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, and a first special drawing starting opening 230 are arranged, and a game area 124 is also arranged. A variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the above.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided at appropriate positions in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged in the variable winning device 2340 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a and 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning openings 226a and 226b have won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, the entry may be detected by different ball detection sensors, or each of the plurality of general winning openings may be entered. The ball passages that guide the ball may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they are entered, a predetermined number (for example, one) is used. The prize ball may be paid out, and the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special drawing starting port 230 does not change.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), and only one is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, and a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right is provided. While the 232a is closed, it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, and when the tulip variable game is won and the tulip display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the variable winning device 2340. Here, FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the variable winning opening 2340, and FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the closed state, and FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram. Is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in the open state. In FIG. 51, the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

The variable winning device 2340 is provided with, for example, a flat plate-shaped mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted at a predetermined interval on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to move forward and backward in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slightly downwardly inclined toward the front and is inclined from the right to the left, and is configured to be displaceable by the drive of the solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 52). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is blocked, and the first of the game balls. When the entry to the rolling region SP1 is blocked and the game is retracted backward (open state), the first rolling region SP1 is released and the game ball enters the first rolling region SP1. Entry is allowed. Further, in the present embodiment, on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, a plurality of ribs 2340i project rearward at substantially equal intervals so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is long. In the present embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). It may be possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to see the shutter member 2351a.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is disposed at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and the number based on the winning (for example, 10 pieces). ) To pay out the prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a are the same, but the first variable winning opening 234a has the same number of prize balls. The number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins may be different from the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured such that a V passage 2340 g and a general passage 2340 h are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the accepted game ball is guided to one of the passages and discharged downward. .. A V-passing switch SW2 is arranged in the V-passage 2340g, and the game ball guided by the V-passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V-passing switch SW2. As described above, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is a region provided at a position where the game ball that has entered at least the second variable winning opening 235a can enter. The V-passing switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the V passage switch SW2, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340 g. Further, a plate-shaped V shutter 2352a is provided so as to cover the upper part of the V passage 2340g so as to be able to move forward and backward in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The V shutter 2352a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, a game ball to the V passage 2340g. The game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the general passage 2340h by rolling on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of retreating backward (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, entry of the game ball into the V passage 2340g is permitted. , The game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340 g. Further, a discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the prize count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the V passage switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are used to obtain the second variable prize of the game ball. By monitoring the in / out of the mouth 235a, it may be possible to monitor the illegal passage of the game ball into the V passage 2340g. Specifically, the number of game balls detected by the winning count switch SW1 of the second variable winning opening 235a is counted as the number (IN number) accepted by the second variable winning opening 235a and stored in the RAM 308. On the other hand, the total number of game balls detected by each of the V-passing switch SW2 and the ejection ball detection switch SW3 is counted as the number ejected from the second variable winning opening 235a (OUT number) and stored in the RAM 308. .. Then, regarding the number of INs and OUTs, for example, in the above-mentioned special electric function remaining ball detection process, a process of confirming whether the number of INs and the number of OUTs match is executed, and when the number of INs> the number of OUTs. Is determined to be in the winning excess state, and when the number of INs is less than the number of OUTs, the winning error can be determined by determining the emission excess state. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called big ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the present embodiment, according to the above-described configuration, only the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a can enter the V passage 2340g, and the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is the V passage. It is configured so that it cannot enter 2340 g.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the game ball passes through the V-passing switch SW2 during the small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened as a small hit, the game shifts to the big hit game. It is possible to do.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the V passage detection switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are used to obtain a second variable winning of the game ball. By monitoring the in / out of the mouth 235a, it may be possible to monitor the fraudulent winning. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called big ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, first variable winning openings 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a) or starting opening (1st special drawing starting opening 230, 2nd special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or normal drawing start The out port 240 is reached only by passing through the port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharging ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a do not allow the game ball to enter in the closed state, but the winning may be possible, and at least from the open state. However, it suffices if it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). To control the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) The door of the drive circuit 330, the drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 as a normal electric accessory, and the first variable winning opening 234a as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the shutter member 2351a of the member 2341a and the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1. Remember in. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings. Here, FIG. 53A shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, FIG. 53B shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, and FIG. 53C shows a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. "Variable display" (special figure variable game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 53A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 53 (a), six types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure F", are shown. In FIG. 53A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, five types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 3 round (R) big hit symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened, and after the big hit game is completed. , The control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “a time saving state”) until the variation display of the special figure is executed eight times. That is, the electric support state is set to 8 times in a short time. Further, "Special Figure B" is a 3 round (R) big hit symbol, and when "Special Figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to the big hit game state, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes a time saving state until the fluctuation display of the special figure is executed four times. Further, "Special Figure C" is a 3 round (R) big hit symbol, and when "Special Figure C" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a opens, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes a time saving state until the fluctuation display of the special figure is executed twice. Further, "Special Figure D" is a 3 round (R) big hit symbol, and when "Special Figure D" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a opens, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes a time saving state until the fluctuation display of the special figure is executed once. Further, "special figure E" is a 3 round (R) big hit symbol, and when "special figure E" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a opens, and the big hit game ends. After that, it does not shift to the a time saving state, but becomes a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In the present embodiment, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that one type may be prepared and a plurality of types of jackpot symbols other than the five types may be prepared. In addition, a small hit symbol or a sudden time saving symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the game is a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the big hit symbol is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In the present embodiment, the game may shift to a time saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). ) Will rise to 100/100 (that is, it will always be a hit). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure D" are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, the electric support is performed until the special figure variable game of the number of times corresponding to the big hit symbol is executed. The state (a time saving state) is maintained, and then the state shifts to the non-electric support state (normally low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (for example, "Special Figure E") is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed, and " When "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure F" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 53 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 53 (b), six types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, and one of the special figures is a jackpot symbol ("special figure a"). ing. "Special figure a" is a 9R big hit symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, the special figure The control state becomes a time saving state until the fluctuation display is executed eight times, and then shifts to the non-electric support state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, three types of stop symbols (“special symbol b” to “special symbol d”) are prepared as small hit symbols. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens 12 times for 0.5 seconds after the symbol is stopped. That is, if a small hit is made with the "special figure b", many game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235a, and a large number of balls can be obtained. The opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be appropriately set. Further, in the case of a small hit, the V shutter 2352a is opened, and the game ball can enter the V passage 2340g. Then, when the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the V passing switch SW2 provided in the V passage 2340g, a big hit is made and the big hit game is started. In this embodiment, since the small hit game is counted as the first round, when the big hit game is started, it is started from the second round. After shifting to the jackpot game, the round game in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened is executed until the final round. After that, when the big hit game is completed, the control state becomes a time saving state until the variation display of the special figure is executed eight times. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds differs depending on the type of the small hit symbol, and "special figure b" is stopped and displayed to be a small hit, and the small hit is a big hit during the small hit game. In that case, the round game is executed up to the 9th round, "Special Figure c" is stopped and displayed, and it becomes a small hit. Is executed, "Special Figure d" is stopped and displayed, and a small hit is made. If a big hit is made during the small hit game for the small hit, the round game is executed up to the third round.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a sudden time saving symbol that shifts to the electric support state without shifting to the big hit. "Special figure e" is a sudden time saving symbol. In the present embodiment, when "special figure e" is displayed and the state shifts to the electric support state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "c time saving state"), the electric support state is changed while the special figure variation game is performed 200 times. It is maintained, and at the 201st time, it shifts to the non-electric support state (normally low probability state). In this embodiment, when the "special figure e" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the gaming state before the symbol is stopped is maintained, but the "special figure e" is stopped in the electric support state. If it is displayed, the c time saving state may be started. Further, a plurality of types of sudden time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of times of symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may differ depending on the symbol. For example, some of the plurality of types of sudden time-saving symbols may be displayed. The number of times (for example, 600 times, etc.) may be larger than the number of times (555 times) of the symbol variation display in which the play time is maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 53 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" may be performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation of the special figure 1 is performed in the non-electric support state (the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state or the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state) in which the variation display is mainly performed. In the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed according to the display and the special figure 2 is mainly variable display, the special figure is special. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the variable display of FIG. 2. On the other hand, in the non-electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214. In the support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

When a big hit or a small hit is notified by the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol in which three decorative symbols having the same even number are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that "special figure A", "special figure a", and "special figure b" are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the symbol display area is used. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying that the "special figure e" that suddenly shifts to the time reduction (c time reduction) is stopped and displayed, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop display. Further, in the case of notifying either the "special symbol F" or the "special symbol f" lost symbol, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). , Barrage) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 53 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 53 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black-painted portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the special figure is executed 555 times after the ram is cleared after the big hit is completed or when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the electric support state until the variation display of the special figure is executed 200 times. In the following description, this electric support state may be referred to as "play time" or "b time reduction state".

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 has start information for special figures divided into areas of the maximum number (4 each in special figure 1 and special figure 2 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A storage unit is prepared, and a random number value storage area for a general drawing is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored one set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 54 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 49 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization process is executed, a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power failure without being initialized, for example, a big hit. Regarding the number of start times (TS) and the flag related to the execution of the play time (b time reduction state) described later, the specifications may not be cleared even if the setting is changed (including retyping the same setting). Further, even when the ram is not cleared, only predetermined data such as a flag related to the execution of the number of big hit start times (TS) and the play time (b time reduction state) may be cleared. In this case, the predetermined data may be arbitrarily cleared or may be forcibly cleared.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 52 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. When it matches with the general winning opening 226a, 226b, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing start opening 230 and the second special drawing starting opening 232. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball, or that the starting port 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252 has passed. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and these starting openings 230, 232, 228, 252. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first special figure start port sensor that detects the entry into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first It is determined that the special figure start port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 is performed, but the detection for the past three times is performed. If the information on the presence or absence of the signal does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and the starting openings 230, 232, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 52 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 alternately blink on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 53 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 53 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 9R big hit flag, a 3R big hit flag, a 9R small hit flag, a 6R small hit flag, a 3R small hit flag, a c time reduction transition flag, an off flag, a normal figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like. Flags are available. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 9R jackpot flag is on, and the normal figure. When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figures a and 9R small hit flags shown in FIG. 53 (b) are on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figures b and 6R shown in FIG. 53 (b) are on. The small hit flag is on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure c and 3R small hit flag shown in FIG. 53 (b) are on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, FIG. 53 (b). The special figure d and c shown in) are on, the special figure e shown in FIG. 53 (b) when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on, respectively. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 9R big hit symbol (special figure a), a 9R small hit symbol (special figure b), a 6R small hit symbol (special symbol c), and a 3R small hit symbol (special figure). Figure d), suddenly shortened time symbol (special symbol e), and lost symbol (special symbol f), one of the symbols is confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, the special 2 priority variable machine is described as an example, but it may be applied to a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 simultaneously change and display, and the pachinko machine 100 in this case may be applied. , The variation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, but if the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, Regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 2, and the missing symbol is stopped and displayed. If the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. Even if the small hit symbol of is displayed, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be continued.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, the small hit flag is turned on. When the small hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 2341a (second variable winning opening) of the first variable winning opening 234a until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a. A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds). The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a) of the first variable winning opening 234a. The signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds, 6 rounds or 3 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. In the present embodiment, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the end of this big hit game. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time reduction number of times (for example, 8 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal figure variation short). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is especially true until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the big hit game when the probability is high. Fig. 2 There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port 232 and the number of game balls (number of balls to be ejected) that can be acquired during the big hit increases, resulting in increased gambling. It is for solving. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is "1", the number of balls to be ejected during the big hit game does not substantially increase. You may also leave the time saving flag on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is suddenly shortened, the c time shorten transition flag is turned on. When this c time reduction transition flag is on, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Then, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating special figure 2 is set. At this time, the time reduction number (for example, 200 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag, a missed flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 3R jackpot flag is on, and the normal figure. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure A to special figure D, 3R jackpot flag is on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure E is on, and when the loss flag is on, special figure F is on. , The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 is one of the 3R big hit symbols (special figures A to D), the 3R big hit symbols (special figures E), and the lost symbols (special figures F). Confirmation display of one symbol is performed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order.

Further, in the above explanation, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is performed. By independently performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing in the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time (simultaneous variable machine). Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, it may be a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are performed at the same time. In the pachinko machine, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, but the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. In that case, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 2 at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 1, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, in the special figure 2 at the timing of the lost symbol display of the special figure 1, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2. The lottery result may be discarded and the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is discarded and lost at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. The symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the special map fluctuation display (sometimes referred to as a special prize inter-prize start (TS)) from the end of the big hit to the special figure low probability state to the big hit. The number of times is counted, and when the number of times reaches a predetermined number (555 times), the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (200 times) is set to the time saving number, and the time saving state (b time saving state or "play time"" is set. In some cases, move to.).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a), and the door is opened in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds). 1st variable winning opening 234a The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is held in a closed state by a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the 2nd variable winning opening 235a. The signal indicating the closing period is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative symbol display device 208. Information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the player to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit is to be completed is displayed. do. In the present embodiment, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number of times (for example, 8 times, 4 times, 2 times or 1 time) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308. , Turn on the time saving flag provided in RAM 308.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the lottery process related to the special figure 2, the variable game of the special figure 2 is not performed, the state of the special figure 2 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the game is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. .. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, neither the variable game of the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is performed, the states of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive. Special Figure 1 random number value storage, provided that the number of special Figure 2 variable games is not reserved and the number of reserved Special Figure 1 variable games is 1 or more, which is not in any of the big hit games. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the area.

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the time saving state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is awarded a prize. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in the normal gaming state, the winning of the special drawing 1 starting port 230 is performed. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Decide whether to make a big hit, a small hit, a sudden time reduction, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 is configured to be prioritized over the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure state update process and the special figure-related lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 and the special figure are not limited to this. By performing each of the two independently, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, big prize Information that can specify the type of command such as mouth open command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined corresponding to the command type) Information).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is added to the command data. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flag values, etc. are included, and in the case of the big hit round number specification command, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. .. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a first variable winning opening 234a has won a prize. Includes presence / absence, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, loss flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 54 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the normal figure-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Here, FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figure 1 is correct. FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination table, and FIG. 2D is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1 determination distribution table. (E) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 2 determination distribution table, and FIG. 2 (f) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table, which is the figure (g). Is a figure illustrating an example of the transition of the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 1.

The table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is shown in FIG. 56 (a), and is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used when determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 99, and the winning value is 0 to 99. That is, the probability of winning is 100/100 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 56 (b) is a table that is referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, and the probability of 329/65536 as a result of the win / fail judgment of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 ( A big hit is selected at about 1 / 199.8). This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of settings are not provided, but a plurality of settings may be provided so that the jackpot probability differs for each setting.

The special figure 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 56 (c) has a table that is referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, and the probability of 329/65536 as a result of the win / fail judgment of the big hit lottery of the special figure 2 ( A big hit is selected with a probability of about 1 / 199.8), a small hit is selected with a probability of 13945/65536 (about 1 / 4.7), and a sudden time reduction is selected with a probability of 18969/65536 (about 1 / 3.455). Be selected. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

FIG. 56D shows an example of the distribution table for determining the special figure 1, and the stop symbol is determined based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIG. 53 (a)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure A" to "special figure E" is selected. As described above, both "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are 3R jackpots opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "Special Figure A" has 8 time reductions after the end of the jackpot game. "Special figure B" is given the number of time reductions four times, "Special figure C" is given the number of time reductions twice, and "Special figure D" is given the number of time reductions once. "Special figure E" is not given a time reduction. As for each selection rate, "Special figure A" has a probability of 3/100, "Special figure B" has a probability of 15/100, and "Special figure C" has a probability of 15/100. "D" has a probability of 15/100, and "Special Figure E" has a probability of 50/100.

FIG. 56 (e) shows an example of the distribution table for determining the special figure 2, and determines the stop symbol based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIG. 53 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

Special Figure 2 If the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, "Special Figure a" is selected. As described above, the "special figure a" is a 9R jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and the number of time reductions is given eight times after the jackpot game is completed. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a small hit, any one of "special figure b" to "special figure d" is selected. As described above, both "special figure b" to "special figure d" are small hits opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a in the small hit game. Then, when the V-pass switch SW2 is passed, the game shifts to the big hit game starting from the 2Rth, and the "special figure b" is a 9R small hit in which the first variable winning opening 234a opens up to the 9Rth when the big hit occurs. Yes, "special figure c" is a 6R small hit in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened up to the 6th R in the case of a big hit, and "special figure d" is the first variable in the case of a big hit. It is a 3R small hit in which the winning opening 234a is opened up to the 3rd round. The selection ratios are 15/100 for "special figure b", 30/100 for "special figure c", and 55/100 for "special figure d".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 is easier to shift to the big hit game with a large number of balls than the case of the big hit in the special figure 1, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is advantageous. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to raise the expectation that a big hit will occur during the execution of the play time or suddenly shortening the time. Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 is more likely to be the big hit with a large number of time reductions than the case of the big hit in the special figure 1.

FIG. 56 (f) shows an example of the deviation pattern table in FIG. 1, and has four fluctuation pattern tables, and one of the fluctuation pattern tables is used depending on the state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, although not shown, it also has a special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table, a special figure 2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern table, and a special figure 2 big hit fluctuation pattern table, all of which are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. There is.

As shown in FIG. 56 (f), the out-of-order variation pattern table in FIG. 1 includes a normal time variation pattern table (No. 0), a time reduction time variation pattern table (No. 1), and b time reduction / c time reduction time. It is configured to include a variation pattern table (No. 2) and a variation pattern table (No. 3) at the time of crisp time. In addition to these, a variation pattern table may be provided.

The normal time fluctuation pattern table is mainly a normal table selected in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the time saving time fluctuation pattern table is a time saving state that shifts after the big hit game is completed. After shifting to (a time saving state), the a time saving table is selected by the time the symbol variation display number of special figure 1 reaches the 10th time, and the b time saving / c time saving time fluctuation pattern table is the idle time (b). It is a bc time saving table that is selected when the out-of-order symbol change of Special Figure 1 is executed in the time saving state (b time saving state / c time saving state) that suddenly shifts to the time saving (c time saving). The time-time variation pattern table is a crispy time table in which the number of symbol variation display times of the special figure 1 after the end of the big hit game is selected from the 201st to the 540th in the normal gaming state. The crispy time table in this embodiment will be described in detail later, but the composition of the effect content is the same as that of the normal table, but the distribution rate is different, and the normal table is more than the case where the normal table is selected. It is difficult to select the loss with reach, and therefore, the digestion time of the symbol variation display tends to be shorter than when the normal table is selected, and the expectation for the big hit when the reach is reached is high.

As shown in FIG. 56 (g), for example, after the end of the big hit game for the normal big hit (the big hit in "Special Figure E") in which the first big hit does not shift to the time saving state, the special figure starts after the end of the big hit game. The symbol variation display of 1 is executed, so that the normal table is selected from the 1st rotation to the 200th rotation, the crispy time table is selected from the 201st rotation to the 540th rotation, and the 541st rotation to the 555th rotation. The normal table is selected again until the turn. After that, when the play time shifts, the bc time saving table is selected. Further, when the big hit with a time reduction is completed and the big hit game for the big hit is completed, the time reduction table is selected from the 1st rotation to the 10th rotation of Special Figure 1, and the normal table is selected from the 11th rotation to the 200th rotation. It is selected, the crispy time table is selected from the 201st rotation to the 540th rotation, and the normal table is selected again from the 541st rotation to the 555th rotation. In addition, after the c time reduction state is reached, the symbol variation display is executed 200 times without a big hit, and after the c time reduction state is completed, the bc time reduction table from the first rotation to the 200th rotation in Special Figure 1 Is selected, and the normal table is selected from the 201st to the 555th rotation. It should be noted that these tables are selected according to the number of times the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and the number of times the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed is not considered, but the symbol of the special figure 2 is executed. The number of executions of the variable display may also be included.

Subsequently, the variation pattern selection table used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. Here, FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal time deviation variation pattern selection table, and FIG. 57 (a-1) is an example of the contents of the normal time reach and loss variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a time saving variation pattern selection table, and FIG. 2C is a diagram showing the contents of b time saving / c time saving variation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows an example, FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of.

The normal deviation variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 57A is a table that may be used when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 is the result of deviation in the normal gaming state. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 1 is the result of the deviation and the deviation variation pattern selection table is used in the normal state, the variation pattern of the deviation without reach is selected with a probability of 90/100. With a probability of / 100, a variation pattern with or without reach is selected. When a variation pattern with or without reach is selected, the variation pattern with or without reach during normal time is referred to in the figure (a-1), and the variation pattern with or without normal reach is selected with a probability of 50/100. Then, the fluctuation pattern of SP1 deviation is selected with a probability of 20/100, the fluctuation pattern of SP2 deviation is selected with a probability of 20/100, and the fluctuation pattern of normal relief reach deviation is selected with a probability of 5/100. With a probability of / 100, the fluctuation pattern of SP1 relief loss is selected, and with a probability of 2/100, the fluctuation pattern of SP2 relief loss is selected. The fluctuation pattern including the relief loss is a fluctuation pattern including that after the reach is lost, the middle symbol starts to change again and stops at the combination of the relief again. As described above, in the present embodiment, a reach may be applied at 10% in the case of a loss, and the game may be enjoyed.

The a time reduction time loss variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 57B is a table that may be used when the result of the hit / fail determination in FIG. 1 is the result of deviation in the time reduction state. Specifically, there is a 100/100 probability that no reach will be selected and the reach effect will not be executed. It should be noted that the table configuration may be such that the reach effect is executed.

In the b time reduction / c time reduction variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 57 (c), the result of the hit / fail judgment in FIG. 1 is the result of deviation in the b time reduction state (play time) or the c time reduction state (sudden time reduction). It is a table that may be used in some cases. Specifically, there is a 95/100 chance that no reach will be selected, and a 5/100 chance that a reach will be selected. As the reach effect to be executed, only the normal reach may be used, or the SP reach may be included. Further, there may be a configuration in which no reach loss is selected with a probability of 100/100.

The crispy time loss variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 57 (d) and the crispy time reach loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) are in a normal gaming state, and the special figure 1 after the end of the big hit. It is a table that may be used when the number of times of the symbol variation display of is 201st to 540th. The fluctuation time and effect content of each fluctuation pattern are the same as those of the above-mentioned normal time deviation fluctuation pattern selection table and normal time reach and loss fluctuation pattern table, but the distribution rate of each fluctuation pattern is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), there is a 99/100 probability that no reach loss is selected, and a 1/100 probability that reach / loss is selected. When the variation pattern with reach is selected, the variation pattern with reach and loss during crispy time shown in the figure (d-1) is referred to, and the variation pattern with normal reach is selected with a probability of 90/100. With a probability of 5/100, the fluctuation pattern of SP1 deviation is selected, with a probability of 2/100, the fluctuation pattern of SP2 deviation is selected, with a probability of 1/100, the fluctuation pattern of normal relief loss is selected, and 1/100. With a probability of, the fluctuation pattern of SP1 relief loss is selected, and with a probability of 1/100, the fluctuation pattern of SP2 relief loss is selected. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the crispy time, the reach is only 1% in the case of the loss, and even in the case of the reach, 90% is the normal reach, so that the digestion speed of the game is the crispy time. It may be possible to reduce the stress of the player faster than the normal game state other than the above. In addition, since it is difficult to execute super reach in the case of a miss, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit when the super reach is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 58A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 58 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 58B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 58 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 59 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 59B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 59 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed.

FIG. 59 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes). The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. Here, FIG. 60A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (the bonus ratio). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value. Since the model of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a model for which no setting is provided, "-" is displayed for the current setting value to notify that the model is not a model with a setting.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize. It should be noted that the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the special figure start opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second variable winning opening). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the 235a and winning a prize. It should be noted that the game acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, and the general winning opening 226a, 226b with respect to the number of out balls. It may be a ratio of the number of spheres.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 60 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 62 is a stage showing an example of a continuation of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 62.

FIG. 61 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". If the time is suddenly shortened, the stop is displayed with "☆", and if the time is off, the stop is displayed with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 61 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1, as well as the number of hold icons of special figure 1, and is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 61A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 61A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 61 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol fluctuation displays since the end of the jackpot game (may be referred to as "fitting count" in the following description) is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. At the same time, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot (display of the number of start between jackpots) and the number of symbol fluctuation displays required to shift to the play time (b time reduction state) (play). The number of remaining starts until the time) is displayed. In this embodiment, both the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure which is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is the electric support state. In some cases, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2, or different display modes may be used. ..

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 61 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. The hold icon and decorative design have not changed yet. At this time, the number of symbol variation displays and the number of symbol variation displays required before shifting to the play time are updated, and the numbers change to "after big hit = 135 times" and "to play time 420 times", respectively.

In FIG. 61 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 61 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 61 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 61 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 61 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 61 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 61 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 61 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 61 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 61 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, it may not enter the reach state, but it may be made to enter without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to the production that triggers the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 61 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed. , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach) has developed. In this embodiment, this "swordsman reach" may be referred to as "SP2 reach". The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to SP reach.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 61 step by step.

In FIG. 62 (p) following from FIG. 61 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 62 (s). In FIG. 62 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 62 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in the figure (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. In addition, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the mini symbol, the display of the number of start times between big hits, and the remaining start until the play time. Only the number of times is displayed. As for the mini-symbols, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (v), the decorative symbol starts to change and display again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration" is a combination of decorative symbols that is determined to be a big hit and shift to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a time reduction state of 8 times reduction) after the big hit game is completed. It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (w), the combination of the decorative patterns did not change from the combination of the jackpots of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", and again the jackpot of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is shown that the combination of is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (x), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 62 (x) is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 62 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 62 (y), as a jackpot game start effect, the characters "big hit" are displayed together with the background image (omitted here) celebrating the jackpot, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. Is urging right-handed.

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 62 (v), for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (w') to 62 (y'), the combination of the decorative symbols before the re-lottery changes. It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the jackpot to which the time saving state of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is given 8 times is confirmed is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing the re-lottery effect, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be more advantageous.

In this embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types, and the degree to which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols changes before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the re-lottery effect executed. It may be changed, for example, re-lottery effect of the mode accompanied by the movement of the character> re-lottery effect by displaying the symbol change by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed change> re-lottery effect by slow change. The expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit will change before and after the lottery may be high. The order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set.

FIG. 63 (r ″) shows another production example following FIG. 62 (q). That is, in FIG. 63 (r ″), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 61 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 63 (r ″). In FIG. 63 (r''), the hero's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role, and as in FIG. 62 (t), all but the fourth symbol display area 284 were temporarily hidden, and eventually, FIG. 63 (s). In''), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (t''), the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 indicates “x” and lights up, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4” is lit. Is displayed as stopped. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. It should be noted that the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the final display of the special figure 1 is performed.

FIGS. 63 (a1) to (a3) and FIGS. 63 (b1) to (b3) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of an effect in a big hit game centered on a decorative symbol display device. In FIGS. 63 (a1) to 63 (a3) and (b1) to (b3), only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device are shown. The illustrations of 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (a1), the combination of the jackpots of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the jackpot with 3R time reduction of 8 times is confirmed. It is shown that after directing that, the transition to the first round is shown. In the first round, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "Super Lucky!" ing. If it is confirmed that the jackpot is a big hit by the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, if the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is a jackpot), FIG. 63 As shown in (b1), the characters "Congratulations!" Are displayed instead of the characters "Super Lucky!" To give a sense of expectation as to which type of jackpot it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (a1), the number of big hits from the first big hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as "continuous chan number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the upper left corner is displayed. "Decoration 7", which is a big hit decorative pattern when a big hit is made, is displayed. In addition, the current number of rounds "1R" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen as the number of rounds, and the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed in the lower right of the display screen. This numerical value is added (counted up) to the number of prize balls acquired each time a game ball wins a prize in the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) in a big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a prize in the variable winning opening is added, but the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in another winning opening is also added. However, for example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a specific general winning opening that can be won by hitting right may be further added.

FIG. 63 (a2) shows how the third round is completed and the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot symbol of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a jackpot, the player can recognize that the jackpot is a jackpot with 8 times of time reduction. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect, the characters "8 more chances!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the time saving state continues until the special figure is variablely displayed 8 times. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a2), the display of the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is "acquired pt 00300 pt".

FIG. 63 (a3) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect is completed and the game state is shifted to the electric support state (a time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state, the characters "Challenge time time reduction 8 times chance" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the time reduction state has been performed.

On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (b1), the combination of the jackpots of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the 3R jackpot is confirmed. It is shown that after the production, the transition to the first round was made. In the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displayed the characters "Congratulations!" Along with the character of Miss Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the 3R jackpot. Since it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit of the type, the player is made to have a sense of expectation. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b1), the number of consecutive chans is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and "decoration 4", which is a big hit decorative pattern when a big hit occurs, is displayed in the upper left corner. Has been done. Further, in the upper center of the display screen, "1R", which is the current number of rounds, is displayed as the number of rounds, and in the lower right of the display screen, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed.

FIG. 63 (b2) shows a state in which the third round is completed, the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In this embodiment, since the combination of the jackpot symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" was a jackpot, it was difficult to recognize which type of jackpot was the jackpot, but this jackpot is given a shorter time. The text "Expect next time!" Is displayed to notify that it is a normal big hit.

FIG. 63 (b3) shows how the jackpot end effect has ended and the gaming state has shifted to the normal gaming state. Specifically, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative patterns at the time of a big hit, is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "Left" to encourage left-handedness is displayed above it. The words "Please hit me" are displayed, and a mini design is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are also started to be displayed, and the number of big hit start times and the remaining number of starts until the play time are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. .. After that, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon of the special figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b3'), when the big hit game ends and the game shifts to the normal game state, the number of start times between big hits and the number of remaining starts until the play time are not displayed, and FIG. 63 ( As shown in b4'), the display may be started at the start of the eleventh fluctuation of the special figure 1.

FIGS. 64 to 65 are diagrams for stepwise showing an example of an effect in an electric support state (a time saving state) centered on a decorative symbol display device. Even in FIG. 64, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

FIG. 64 (a) is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols displayed at the time of the jackpot in the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner after the jackpot game related to the jackpot with four time reductions is completed for the first jackpot. The stop display is displayed at "555", and the state of shifting to the electric support state is shown. At this time, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, three symbol change displays of special figure 1 are held and one symbol change display of special figure 2 is held. At the same time, the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 displays the jackpot display, and the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 displays the off display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (a), the number of consecutive chans is displayed in the lower left corner, and the number of balls acquired from the first big hit is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. (At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (a), "acquired pt 00300 pt" is displayed). Further, in the electric support state, since the symbol variation display is performed centering on the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 280 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 2 are displayed. do not have. The variable icon display area 280 or the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 2 may be displayed. Further, in the center of the display screen, the characters "challenge time time reduction 4 times chance" are displayed, and it is notified that the time reduction state (electric support state) is performed until the symbol variation display is executed 4 times.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (b), it is shown that the first symbol variation display has started after shifting to the electric support state (a time saving state). As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in preference to the special figure 1. If there is no hold of the special figure 2, the hold of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, "Challenge time 4 more times" is displayed in the center of the display screen as a display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (c), it is shown that the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. Along with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "514".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (d), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (d), the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is updated, and is updated to "challenge time 3 more times".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (e), it is shown that the third symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the big hit game is completed, and in the center of the display screen, "challenge time is 2 more". "Times" is displayed. Along with this, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 7".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (f), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the fourth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (f), the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is updated, and is updated to "challenge time one more time".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, and in response to this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed as "555". To. Then, in the center of the display screen, the characters "Chance! Aim for V !!" are displayed, prompting the player to win the game ball in the second variable winning opening 235a. After that, the small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), when the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 64 (i), a big hit occurs and the big hit game starts. Will be done. At this time, since the small hit game is counted as the first round, when the big hit game is started, it is started from the second round. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (i), the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "second time", and a small hit is made in the upper left corner of the display screen. The decorative pattern "5" displayed when becomes is displayed. In addition, the characters "Congratulations!" Are displayed along with Machiko's character MCK on the left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the big hit, but with any type of big hit (9R, 6R, 3R). Since it is difficult to recognize whether or not it exists, the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (j), it is shown that the sixth round is being performed. In this big hit, the big hit game is started in the small hit game in which the 6R small hit symbol with 8 times of time reduction is displayed and executed, so that the big hit game ends when the sixth round is completed. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "This time up to 6R" are displayed together with the character MCK of Mr. Machiko, informing the player that it is a 6R big hit. At the lower right of the display screen, "acquired pt 08850 pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by winning the variable winning opening in the first big hit game and the current big hit game is displayed.

FIG. 64 (k) shows how the sixth round is completed and the jackpot game is completed. In this embodiment, since the big hit is shown in the special figure 2, eight times of time reduction are given after the big hit game is completed, and continuous chan can be expected. Therefore, in the jackpot end production, the characters "High-speed RUSH rush!" And "8 more big chances!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the time saving state will continue until the special figure fluctuates 8 times. To.

FIG. 64 (l) shows a state in which the jackpot end effect is completed and the game state is shifted to the electric support state (a time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is completed and the state shifts to the electric support state, the characters "High-speed RUSH time reduction 8 times big chance" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the shift to the time reduction state. You will be notified that you have done so. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (m), the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started after shifting to the electric support state (a time saving state). At this time, "high-speed RUSH 8 more times" is displayed in the center of the display screen as a display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state.

In FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (m), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed for the eighth time after the transition to the electric support state. Since the electric support state ends with the symbol variation display this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "high-speed RUSH last" in the center of the display screen, and the player is notified to that effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, and in response to this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also out of "417". It is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, since only one symbol variation display of the special figure 2 can be held, the electric support state ends, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 can be executed only once. ing. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (c) shifts from the electric support state to the normal gaming state, but since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 can be executed only once, the upper center of the display screen is displayed. The text "One crying!" Is displayed, suggesting that the symbol variation display, which tends to be advantageous to the player, is executed only once as an extra. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), the decorative symbol is displayed, and it is displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7", and the number of consecutive chans and the total number of acquired balls are also displayed. It is displayed continuously. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (e), the sudden time saving symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, and the combination of the suddenly shortened decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. It is shown. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (e), the characters "Resurrection time has entered!" Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the time is shortened until the variable display of the special figure is executed 200 times. c) It has been notified that the time saving state) continues and suddenly shifts to the time saving state. In the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the c time saving state, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 200 times, but the electric support state may be performed at other times, and a plurality of types of suddenly shortening time symbols are used. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may be different depending on the stopped symbol. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (f), it is shown that the time saving state (c time saving state) suddenly shifts to the time saving state, and the symbol variation ideogram of the special figure 2 has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "Resurrection time!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, the decorative symbol is erased, and the display state of the number of consecutive chans and the total number of acquired balls is maintained.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (e') following FIG. 65 (d), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, indicating that the reach state is reached. There is. At this time, the characters "Big chance!" Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen to indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit, and the game is lively. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (f'), the "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, indicating that it is shaking and fluctuating. That is, it is suggested to the player that it will be a big hit or a small hit.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (g'), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (g'), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, and in response to this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed as "444". Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (h'), the characters "Chance! Aim for V !!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, prompting the player to win the game ball in the second variable winning opening 235a. .. After that, the small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (i'), when the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 65 (j'), it becomes a big hit and the big hit game. Is started. At this time, since the small hit game is counted as the first round, when the big hit game is started, it is started from the second round. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (j'), the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "third time", and the display is small in the upper left corner of the display screen. The decorative pattern "4" displayed at the time of hitting is displayed. In addition, the characters "Congratulations!" Are displayed along with the character MCK of Miss Machiko on the left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the big hit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the time saving state ends, it is possible to shift to the jackpot game advantageous to the player by the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 held at the end of the time saving state. There is.

Next, the effect after the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. Here, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect before and after the power cutoff, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing another example of the effect before and after the power supply cutoff stepwise, and FIG. 68 is a diagram showing another example of the effect before and after the power supply is cut off. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect before and after the power is cut off, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing another example of the effect before and after the power is cut off, and FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of the effect before and after the power is cut off. It is a figure which shows the example step by step. In addition, also in FIGS. 66 to 70, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special diagram 2 are shown. The holding lamp 220 and the normal drawing holding lamp 216 are not shown.

FIG. 66 (a) is a continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 65 (d), and shows how the result of the deviation is displayed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 after the transition to the normal gaming state. .. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and there is an opportunity to execute the symbol variation display in Special Figure 2. Since it was completed, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed to indicate that fact. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 66A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 66 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 and the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 66A, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a), the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the big hit game is completed is 9, but at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a), the number of big hit start times is displayed. And the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time is hidden.

In FIG. 66B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 becomes, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the number of fits is increased by one, and the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed as "after big hit = 10 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "545 times until the play time". In the present embodiment, until the a time saving state and the remaining symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are completed (at least until the a time saving state is completed), the jackpot start number display and the remaining start number until the play time are displayed. Therefore, the number of times the remaining start number until the play time is displayed after the end of the big hit game is displayed is larger than the number of times of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time after the end of the big hit game. It is said to be a small number of times. Further, in this production example, the display of the number of start times between big hits informs the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit game is completed. It can also be said that it suggests at least the number of displays. Further, in the present embodiment, since the display of the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the end of the time saving state is displayed in the time saving state, the display is the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time. It is not displayed at the same time, but it may be displayed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (c), a combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 display variable symbols. It is shown that there is no hold and the state is in a standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (c), "after big hit = 163 times" is displayed on the display of the number of start times between big hits, and "392 times until the play time" is displayed as the number of remaining starts until the play time.

After that, for example, when the amusement park is closed and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and the power is turned on the next day, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the backup is normally restored and the power is cut off. It returns to the state before. However, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment shifts to the play time when the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 555 times) after the end of the big hit game, so that the pachinko machine 100 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on. If the number of times these times can be confirmed by the visitor immediately after a certain opening of the store, the pachinko machine 100, which tends to shift to the play time, is likely to be targeted, and fairness may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66 (e), when the backup is restored, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit or the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is estimated. To make it difficult, the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed as "after big hit = ??? times", and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "until the play time ??? times". Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" (sometimes referred to as "morning eyes"). Therefore, for example, it may be difficult to determine whether the backup has been restored or the ram has been cleared when the power is turned on, and fairness may be maintained.

FIG. 66 (f) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start opening 230 and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. Here, too, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and the remaining until the play time still remains. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (g), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on. Also here, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and still until the play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the remaining symbol fluctuations are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (h), when the 100th symbol variation display after the power was turned on was completed, the number of symbol variation displays after the power was turned on was added to the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit before the power was turned off. The result is displayed. That is, the number of times the number of big hit start times and the number of remaining start times until the play time are displayed, which are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, are clarified, and are "after the big hit = 263 times" and "292 times until the play time", respectively. It is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed before the transition to the play time. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (h), the number of rotations exceeds 200 after the big hit, and the time has shifted to the crispy time described later. Therefore, the characters "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. Since the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is 300 times or less, the Sabohani character SBH suggesting to that effect is displayed. In this production example, when the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time is 300, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, which suggests at least the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time. Can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (e'), even when the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, it is difficult to estimate the number of symbol fluctuation display times after the big hit or the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the play time. The start count display is displayed as "after big hit = ??? times", and the display of the remaining start count until the play time is displayed as "until the play time ??? times". Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols on the first appearance in the morning of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4".

FIG. 66 (f') shows that the game ball has won a prize in the first special figure start opening 230, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. Here, too, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and the remaining until the play time still remains. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (g'), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on. Also here, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and still until the play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the remaining symbol fluctuations are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (h'), when the 100th symbol variation display after the power is turned on is completed, the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit counted from the power on is displayed. That is, the number of times the number of big hit start times and the number of remaining start times until the play time are displayed, which are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, are clarified, and are "after big hit = 100 times" and "455 times until the play time", respectively. It may be displayed and you may be able to recognize that it may have been cleared.

In this embodiment, an example of application to the so-called type 1 and type 2 type pachinko machine 100 is shown, but it may be applied to an ST machine or the like, and for example, a time reduction is given after the probability change state is completed. In this case, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time may not be suggested or notified until the time saving state is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are displayed in a mode that is difficult to recognize until the symbol variation display is executed 100 times. , It can be said that the number of times is less than the number of times of the symbol variation display from the end of the big hit game to the start of the play time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of start times between big hits at the time of turning on the power and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are "???". After starting the display with "555", which is the number of times of symbol variation display until the transition, when a predetermined condition (for example, 100 symbol variation display, execution of SP reach, etc.) is satisfied, the accurate number of times is notified. You may do it.

FIG. 67 shows another example showing the state before and after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and on.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (a), a combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 display variable symbols. It is shown that there is no hold and the state is in a standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 67A, the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed as "after big hit = 503 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "52 times until the play time".

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 was cut off, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (c) shows that the backup was restored. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the backup is restored, it is difficult to estimate the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the jackpot or the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time. The start count display is displayed as "after big hit = ??? times", and the display of the remaining start count until the play time is displayed as "until the play time ??? times". Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way in the morning of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4".

FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start opening 230 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Here, too, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and the remaining until the play time still remains. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (e), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed 52 times after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the 555th symbol variation display is executed in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit before the power is cut off. Also here, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and still until the play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the remaining symbol fluctuations are displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67 (f), when the 555th symbol variation display is completed after the jackpot game is completed with the power cut off, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (f) is shown. As shown above, the characters "Enter play time!" Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the play time (b time reduction state) is set before the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time becomes clear. It will be migrated. At this time, a right-handed display is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, urging the player to right-handed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the time saving state is continued until the symbol variation display is executed 200 times, and the state shifts to the b time saving state (play time). The area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are erased, the decorative symbol is also erased, and the variable display of the symbol is performed by the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, when shifting to play time, the display of the number of remaining starts until play time is also erased, and the characters "play time! 200 more times" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the play time can be executed. The number of fluctuation displays is notified. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to the play time, and after the play time ends, the game does not shift to the play time again unless it becomes a big hit. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (g), since there was no hold of the special figure 2, it is shown that the symbol variation display based on the hold of the special figure 1 is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (h), it is shown that the play time has shifted and the first symbol variation display has been completed. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, "434" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the display has been removed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is suspended, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1. It is shown. In addition, the display showing the remaining number of play times in the center of the display screen is updated to "Play time! 199 more times", suggesting that the play time will continue until 199 more symbol fluctuations are displayed. There is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in most cases, the play time is a big hit in which the time is shortened until the symbol variation display is executed eight times after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the number of remaining symbol variation displays until the play time is small, the player may think that it is better to enter the play time. That is, if a big hit occurs before shifting to the play time, it is hoped that the big hit will be given a time saving state, and even if the game shifts to the play time without becoming a big hit, the game can be played if the play time is entered. This is because it will be a big hit that is more advantageous to the person. Further, not only when the power is turned on, the configuration may be such that only the possibility of shifting to the play time is notified first, and then the accurate number of times is notified, for example, after the end of the big hit game or a. It may be configured to notify after the end of the time saving state. In addition, regarding the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time, at the start of the display, the number of symbol variation displays required from the end of the big hit game to the transition to the play time (for example, 555 times) is displayed. After that, the number of times of accurate symbol variation display may be notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot game is completed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 555 times), it is applied to the pachinko machine 100 which shifts to the play time as if it has reached the ceiling. Although an example is shown, it may be applied to a slot machine. For example, after the end of BB or RB, if the number of starts reaches a predetermined number and the ceiling is reached, bonuses such as RT and ART are started. It may be configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the play time is set when the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is executed after the jackpot game is completed, but the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It may be a configuration that becomes a big hit when is executed, or it may be a configuration that shifts to a probable change state.

FIG. 68 shows another example showing the state before and after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and on.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (a), a combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 display variable symbols. It is shown that there is no hold and the state is in a standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 68A, the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed as "after big hit = 164 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "391 times until the play time". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (d) are shown in FIG. 67 (b) except for the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot game is completed (the remaining number of symbol variation displays until the play time). )-Since it is the same as the figure (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (e), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed 52 times after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the 216th symbol variation display is executed in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit before the power is cut off. Also here, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and still until the play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the remaining symbol fluctuations are displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (f), it is shown that "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times".

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (g), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, for example, a re-variation effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 62. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 68 (h), the revariation effect fails, the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is maintained, and the display is stopped. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (h), the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are both "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times". There is up to. After that, the jackpot game is started without clarifying the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot game is completed (the remaining number of symbol variation displays until the play time). In this case, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time may be clarified.

FIG. 69 shows another example showing the state before and after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and on. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (e) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (f), the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in response to this, the mini symbol is also "534". It is shown that the display is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (g), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started 53 times (217 times after the end of the big hit game) after the power is turned on. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (g), the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time have not been clarified.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (h), when the power supply is cut off due to the influence of a lightning strike or the like and then the backup is restored, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The restoration display is displayed until the fluctuation time of the running symbol variation display elapses. After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69 (j), the decorative symbol and the mini symbol are displayed at the first appearance in the morning. If the symbol variation display is a big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and then the big hit game is started.

In this production example, after the power is turned on, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are not clarified until the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). From the time the power is turned on until the symbol variation display is executed 100 times, the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot game is completed (the remaining number of symbol variation displays until the play time) is not clarified. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 69 (k) to 69 (m), the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, that is, in the production example shown in FIG. 69, 318 times after the end of the big hit game. After executing the symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 69 (m), the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time become clear. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (m), the number of rotations exceeds 200 after the big hit, and the time has shifted to the crispy time described later. Therefore, the characters "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. Since the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is 300 times or less, the Sabohani character SBH suggesting to that effect is displayed.

FIG. 70 shows another example showing the state before and after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and on. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (f) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (f), the description thereof will be omitted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 70 (f) to (i) are provided by SP reach 2 (swordsman reach), which is different from the procedure shown in FIGS. 61 (l) to 62 (q) and 63 (r''). It is shown how it is being executed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (j), a combination of decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is displayed, and in response to this, the mini symbol is also displayed as "434". Will be done. At this time, in the present embodiment, if a specific effect (for example, swordsman reach) is executed before the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, the number of symbol variation displays is irrelevant. Instead, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time may be clarified. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (j), the number of rotations exceeds 200 after the big hit, and the time has shifted to the crispy time described later. Therefore, the characters "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. Since the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is 300 times or less, the Sabohani character SBH suggesting to that effect is displayed. In this embodiment, when a specific effect is performed, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are clarified with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/4). However, it may be made clear. On the other hand, if a specific effect is performed but the lottery is not performed, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are not clarified as shown in FIG. 70 (j'). ..

FIGS. 71 to 72 are diagrams showing step by step an example of such an effect after the transition to the crispy time and the end. Also in FIGS. 71 to 72, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special diagram 2 are shown. The holding lamp 220 and the normal drawing holding lamp 216 are not shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (b) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (c), the 209th symbol variation display (of which, special figure 1 is the 199th symbol variation display) is completed after the jackpot game is completed, and "decoration 4-decoration" is completed. It is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "1-Decoration 7" is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c), four symbol variation displays of Special Figure 1 are suspended, but the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is not suspended, and the number of start times between big hits is displayed. "After big hit = 208 times" is displayed, and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "347 times until the play time".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (d), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the 209th time (the 200th time of the special figure 1) is started after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 209 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "346 until the play time". "Times". Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 to become the second hold icon h12, and becomes the display position of the fourth hold icon h14. Each of the existing hold icons moves toward the display position of the third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1 and becomes the third hold icon h13. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (e), the 209th symbol variation display ends after the jackpot game ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed. It is shown that it is. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (e), three symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, but the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is not reserved.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (f), it is shown that the 210th symbol variation display (201st in Special FIG. 1) is started after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the characters "Crispy time rush" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the crispy time has been reached. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern table used in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 executed after that is changed in the normal time. You can switch from the pattern table to the crispy time fluctuation pattern table. Specifically, as described above, it is better to use the crispy time fluctuation pattern table to determine the fluctuation time than to use the normal time fluctuation pattern table to determine the fluctuation time. It may be possible to easily determine a variation pattern with a short variation time, promote digestion of the symbol variation display, and prevent the player from getting bored. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (g), the display of "crispy time rush" is erased, and the "crispy time" informing the upper part of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 that the crispy time is in progress. The characters are displayed. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (h), the 210th symbol variation display is completed after the jackpot game is completed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 7” is completed. The state displayed in is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (h), three symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not reserved.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (i), it is shown that the 211th symbol variation display (202nd in Special FIG. 1) is started after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 211 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "344 until the play time". "Times". Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The crispy time is continuing. Since the effect content when the crispy time variation pattern table is used is the same as the effect content when the normal time variation pattern table is used, the details of the effect will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (j), it is shown that the symbol variation display is performed for the 254th time after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it is shown that after that, when the symbol variation display is performed 301 times without becoming a big hit, the play time shifts. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 254 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "301 until the play time". "Times". At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (j), there are four hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon. h14 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (k), the 254th symbol variation display is completed after the jackpot game is completed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 4-Decoration 7-Decoration 1" is completed. The state displayed in is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (k), four symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, but the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is not reserved. In addition, crispy time is also ongoing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (l), it is shown that the 255th symbol variation display is started after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it is shown that when the symbol variation display is executed 300 times without becoming a big hit, the play time shifts. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH appears in the lower right part of the display screen, suggesting that there are 300 remaining play times. That is, it can be said that the character SBH of this Sabohani may appear in a crispy time. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11 and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h13 moved toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 to become the second hold icon h12, and was at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon moves toward the display position of the third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1 and becomes the third hold icon h13. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (m), it is shown that the symbol variation display is performed for the 549th time (540th time in Special Figure 1) after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it is shown that after that, when the symbol variation display is performed 6 times without becoming a big hit, the play time shifts. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 549 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "6 until the play time". "Times". At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (m), there are three hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon. h13 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, crispy time is also ongoing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (n), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the 549th time (540th time of the special figure 1) is completed after the big hit game is completed. That is, when the symbol variation display ends, the crisp time ends, and the table used switches from the crisp time variation pattern table to the normal time variation pattern table. Therefore, the display of "crispy time" displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is deleted. The Sabohani character SBH is continuously displayed. That is, it can be said that the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed even if the table used is a normal time fluctuation pattern table. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 280 shown in FIG. 71 (o), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11 and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 550 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "5 until the play time". "Times".

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 72 (p) following FIG. 71 (o), it is shown that the symbol variation display is performed for the 555th time after the jackpot game is completed. That is, it is shown that the play time transition condition is satisfied. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 555 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "0 until the play time". "Times". At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (p), there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon. h12 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani is also continuously displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (q), the 555th symbol variation display is completed after the jackpot game is completed, the Sabohani character SBH is erased, and the upper center of the display screen is displayed. The characters "Enter play time!" Are displayed, and when the game shifts to play time, it is notified that the play time (b time reduction state) continues until the symbol variation display is executed 200 times. In the present embodiment, when the play time is entered, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 200 times, but the number may be other. In addition, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, prompting right-handed. As a result, a big hit is likely to occur, which is advantageous for the player.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (r) shows that the play time has changed to the time saving state (b time saving state) and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "play time! 200 more times" are displayed in the center of the display screen, the display of the decorative symbol and the number of remaining starts until the play time is erased, and the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed. It has been updated to "after big hit = 556 times". As a result, it is notified that the play time will continue 200 times.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (s), it is shown that the play time has shifted and the first symbol variation display has been completed. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, the mini-design is stopped and displayed at "434", indicating that it is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (t), since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is suspended, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1. It is shown. In addition, the display showing the remaining number of play times in the center of the display screen is updated to "Play time! 199 more times", suggesting that the play time will continue until 199 more symbol fluctuations are displayed. There is.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed 200 times after the jackpot game is completed, the crispy time variation pattern table is selected. Therefore, for example, the symbol variation display after the power is turned on. It may be possible to infer whether the backup was restored or the ram was cleared by looking at the behavior.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the play time, the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) and the play time ends, the crispy time variation pattern table is not selected. However, it may be configured to be selectable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern table is configured to be modifiable in the normal gaming state, but the variable pattern table may be configured to be modifiable in other gaming states, for example, during a time saving state or a probable change state. It may be configured so that the variation pattern table may be changed in the process. Further, the variation pattern table may be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of consecutive chans) is satisfied during the time saving state or the probable change state.

Next, an example of the effect when the ram is cleared when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (d) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 66 (e ′) to FIG. 66 (h ′), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (e), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started for the 101st time after the power is turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 101 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "454 until the play time". "Times". Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 and becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (f), it is shown that the symbol variation display is performed 200 times after the power is turned on. In addition, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are "after the big hit = 200 times" and "355 times until the play time".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (g), the 200th symbol variation display is completed after the power is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed. The situation is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (g), three symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not reserved.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (h), it is shown that the 201st symbol variation display is started after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started 201 times, the time shifts to the crispy time, but when the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, the b time is shortened, or c. After the time saving state is over, it does not shift to the crispy time. In this production example, since the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, the time does not shift to crisp time, and the symbol variation display using the normal time variation pattern table is continuously executed. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11 and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 201 times" and "354 times until the play time".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (i), it is shown that the symbol variation display is performed for the 255th time after the power is turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 255 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "300 until the play time". "Times". In this production example, since the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times until the play time is 300 times, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. As described above, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed at a time other than the crisp time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, an example of the effect after the revival time (c time reduction state) starts and ends will be described. Here, FIG. 73 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect applied after the transition to the revival time and the end. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 65 (e) to (f), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (c), it is shown that the 199th symbol variation display is performed after the revival time (c time reduction state) is started, and in the center of the display screen, it is shown. "Resurrection time!" Is displayed. After that, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 ends at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (d), and the mini symbol also displays "434" in response to this.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (e), it is shown that the 200th symbol variation display is started after the revival time is started. That is, it is shown that the final symbol variation display in which the revival time is maintained is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, and in response to this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also out of "417". It is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns, and the resurrection time ends. In the present embodiment, only one symbol variation display of the special figure 2 can be held, but in the effect shown in FIG. 73 (f), the special figure 2 is not held, so that it is shown in FIG. 65. The variable effect of "one crying" is not executed. If there is a hold in Special Figure 2, "one crying" will be executed. It should be noted that the effect of "one time of crying" may not be performed, and the normal symbol variation effect according to the special figure 2 may be performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed, and is displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". The number display is erased, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays three hold icons h11 to h13. There is. In addition, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are displayed, and "after the big hit = 209 times" and "346 times until the play time" are displayed, respectively. In addition, the characters "Please hit left" are displayed above the decorative pattern, prompting you to hit left. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive chans and the display of the total number of acquired balls may be continuously displayed. After that, the gaming state shifts from the revival time to the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 73 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. .. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11 and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 210 times" and "345 times until the play time".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (h), the 254th symbol variation display (of which, special figure 1 is the 45th symbol variation display) is completed after the jackpot game is completed, and "decoration 7-decoration" is completed. It is shown that the combination of the decorative patterns on the outskirts of "5-Decoration 4" is displayed. In this production example, as described above, since it is a normal game state after shifting to the revival time (c time shortening state) and ending, it does not shift to the crispy time, but it may shift. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (h), three symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are reserved, but the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is not reserved, and the number of start times between big hits is displayed. "After big hit = 254 times" is displayed, and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "301 times until the play time".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (i), it is shown that the 255th symbol variation display is started after the big hit is completed. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, the display of the number of starts between big hits is "after the big hit = 255 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is "300 until the play time". "Times". In this production example, since the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times until the play time is 300 times, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. As described above, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed at a time other than the crisp time.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (j), the 409th symbol variation display after the jackpot ends (that is, the 200th symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 after the jackpot ends) ends, and "decoration" It is shown that the combination of the decorative patterns on the outskirts of "5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (j), three symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not reserved.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (k), the 410th symbol variation display (that is, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is 201 times after the jackpot is completed) is started after the jackpot is completed. It is shown how it was done. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started 201 times, the time shifts to the crispy time, but after the transition to the c time reduction state and the end, the crispy time Does not migrate to. In this effect example, since the c time has been shortened and the process has ended, the time does not shift to crisp time, and the symbol variation display using the normal time variation pattern table is continuously executed. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 to become the first hold icon h11 and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, the display of the number of starts between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 410 times" and "145 times until the play time". In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani is continuously displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, an example of the effect when the power is cut off and restored during the crisp time will be described. Here, FIG. 74 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect before and after the power is cut off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols that are out of the “decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4”, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed with variable symbols. It is shown that there is no hold and the state is in a standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 74A, the display of the number of start times between big hits is displayed as "after big hit = 325 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "230 times until the play time". Further, in this production example, after the jackpot game is completed, the number of symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 exceeds 200 times, so the time shifts to crispy time, and the number of remaining symbol variation displays until the play time is Since it is less than 300 times, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 was cut off, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (c) shows that the backup was restored. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), when the backup is restored, it is difficult to estimate the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit or the number of times the symbol change is displayed until the play time. The start count display is displayed as "after big hit = ??? times", and the display of the remaining start count until the play time is displayed as "until the play time ??? times". In addition, the display of the characters "crispy time" and the character SBH of Sabohani are also erased, and it is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the end of the big hit game. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way in the morning of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4".

FIG. 74 (d) shows a state in which the game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start opening 230 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Here, too, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and also "crispy time". Character display and non-display of Sabohani's character SBH continue, and it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times until the play time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e), it is shown that the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the 425th symbol variation display is executed in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit before the power is cut off. Also here, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are still "after the big hit = ??? times" and "until the play time ??? times", and also "crispy". The character display of "time" and the non-display of the character SBH of Sabohani are continued, and it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times until the play time. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), when the 100th symbol variation display after the power was turned on was completed, the number of symbol variation displays after the power was turned on was added to the number of symbol variation displays after the big hit before the power was turned off. The result is displayed. That is, the number of times the number of big hit start times and the number of remaining start times until the play time are displayed, which are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, are clarified, and are "after the big hit = 425 times" and "130 times until the play time", respectively. It is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of times the symbol variation is displayed before the transition to the play time. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (f), 200 rotations have been exceeded after the end of the big hit, and since the transition to the crisp time described later has occurred, the characters "crisp time" are redisplayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. At the same time, since the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is 300 times or less, the character SBH of Sabohani suggesting that fact is redisplayed. In addition, when the power is cut off or restored, one or both of the character display of "crispy time" and the character SBH of Sabohani may not be redisplayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern table to be used is switched to the crispy time fluctuation pattern table, the characters "crispy time rush" and "crispy time" are displayed, but these characters are displayed. You may not do it. In this case, "Crispy", "Crispy time", "Crispy fluctuating", etc., which suggest to the character SBH of Sabohani that the fluctuation pattern table in use may have been switched to the crispy time fluctuation pattern table, etc. It is desirable to add characters. That is, in this case, it can be said that the display of the Sabohani character SBH suggests that the fluctuation pattern table in use may be a crisp time fluctuation pattern table.

Next, the relationship between the notice and the effect of the decorative symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIG. 75. Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step how an example of the advance notice effect in the decorative symbol variation display is being performed. Even in FIG. 75, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 75 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 75 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, the number of hold of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 75A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 has a blue display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice display mode. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the big hit game is completed is the 156th time, and the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are "after the big hit". = 156 times "and" 399 times until the play time "are displayed.

In FIG. 75 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the big hit was won in the symbol change display this time. In addition, since the number of fits has increased by 1 to 157, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 157 times" and "398 times until the play time", respectively. Has been done.

Further, in this production example, it is shown that the dialogue notice is displayed. A plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the dialogue notice, and in the production example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the dialogue with the characters "SP1?" Attached to the lever symbol SLV whose ground pattern is the shape of the lever. It is shown that the notice is being made. The notice production including this lever symbol SLV is basically a notice with lower reliability than other line notices, but for example, if it develops into SP1 reach production after that, the expectation for a big hit than other line notices. It is said to be a high notice. If the SP1 reach effect is performed when the dialogue notice that the lever symbol SLV is displayed is performed, it may be a big hit or it may be missed. Further, when the dialogue notice that the lever symbol SLV is displayed is given and the SP1 reach effect is not performed, it may be missed or it may be a big hit. Also, as an example, if the lever symbol SLV is displayed and then develops into the SP1 reach effect, the reliability of the jackpot will be higher than when other notices are executed, but it is not limited to the SP1 reach effect and other It may be a reach effect, or if a specific notice is executed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when another notice is executed, or a certain effect and another effect may be performed. If both are executed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the other notice is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), when the dialogue notice was deleted, an icon with the characters "lever stock!" Was displayed, and the player was displayed with the lever symbol SLV in the dialogue notice. It suggests. In the present embodiment, the icon is displayed when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, but the icon may not be displayed, or the icon may or may not be displayed. good. Further, when the dialogue notice of the display mode other than the lever symbol SLV is displayed, another icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the state of reaching is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (e), the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left portion, the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center right side, and the line of "Random" is displayed. It is shown that SP1 reach (chappie reach) in which the character CHP of chappy is displayed is started. That is, it is shown that the effect corresponding to the lever symbol SLV displayed in the dialogue notice is executed, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the big hit is high. The display of the icon indicating that the lever symbol SLV is displayed is maintained.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (f), it is shown that the expectation degree display effect is started. This expectation degree display effect is a strong expectation degree display effect, and the appearance of the star-shaped frame with the characters "Gekiatsu!" Is displayed, suggesting that the expectation for the big hit is high. The situation is shown. In addition to the mode shown in the figure (f), the expectation degree display effect may be executed by the weak expectation degree display effect shown in the figure (f'). Specifically, the elliptical frame is used. The mode with the characters "heat!" Is displayed. Further, as shown in the figure (f''), the expectation degree display effect may not be executed. In this case, the player's expectation for the big hit is higher than the strong expectation degree display effect or the weak expectation degree display effect. Is also suggested to be low. In the expectation degree display effect, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed, but the lever symbol SLV may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (g), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol and SP1 reach is completed, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration” is shown in FIG. 75 (h). The shaking fluctuation display is performed by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "4", and then the stop display is performed by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" as shown in FIG. 75 (i). ..

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (j), the jackpot game start effect is started as shown in FIG. 62 (y).

Further, after the effect shown in FIG. 75 (c) is performed, as shown in FIG. 75 (d'''), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 4" is stopped on the right symbol. It may not be displayed and reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (e'''), the icon indicating that the lever symbol SLV is displayed is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (f''''), the middle symbol is displayed. "Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed after shaking and fluctuating due to the combination of the off-the-shelf decorative symbols.

In this production example, the lever symbol SLV may be displayed and may or may not reach, but when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, it may always reach. Further, even if the lever symbol SLV is displayed and the SP reach is not developed, the relief reach may be started after the development fails, and this relief reach may be a big hit. In this case, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the relief reach may be higher when the lever symbol SLV is not displayed than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, or conversely, it may be lowered. It is also good.

Next, another aspect regarding the relationship between the notice and the effect of the decorative symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Here, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step how an example of the advance notice effect in the decorative symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, also in FIG. 76, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 76 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, the number of hold of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 76A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 has a red display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice display mode. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the red display mode has a higher expectation for the jackpot than the look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the blue display mode. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the big hit game is completed is the 156th time, and the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are "after the big hit". = 156 times "and" 399 times until the play time "are displayed.

In FIG. 76B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, since the number of fits has increased by 1 to 157, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 157 times" and "398 times until the play time", respectively. Has been done.

Also, in this production example, it is shown that the dialogue notice is displayed. In the dialogue notice shown in FIG. 76 (b), the lever symbol SLV similar to that shown in FIG. 75 (b) is displayed in a manner of being displayed. Further, as another aspect of the dialogue notice, as shown in FIG. 76 (b'), when the decal lever symbol BLV in which the characters "SP1 de !!" is displayed is displayed on the ground pattern of the large lever. When the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed, SP1 reach is more likely to be executed than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, and the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed. There is. In addition, in the dialogue notice, as an embodiment other than the lever symbol SLV and the decal lever symbol BLV, as shown in FIG. 76 (b''), the characters "chance !!" are added in the white oval frame. When the dialogue notice of the mode or the dialogue notice of the highly reliable mode with the characters "Chance !!" added in the red oval frame is displayed as shown in the figure (b'''). There is also. The dialogue notice shown in FIG. 76 (b'') and FIG. 76 (b''') does not improve the expectation for a big hit when a specific effect is executed, and functions as a normal big hit notice. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than the lever symbol SLV is displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot when SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice is announced by other notices. Higher than if executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the dialogue notice is deleted, an icon with the characters "lever stock!" Is displayed, and the player is notified of the dialogue with the lever symbol SLV (decalever symbol BLV). Is displayed. Further, the display mode of the icon may be different depending on whether the lever symbol SLV is displayed or the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (d), it is shown that the button repeated hitting effect as a mission notice is being performed. In the button continuous striking effect, the result is displayed by the player repeatedly pressing the effect button 136.

When the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the button continuous operation and the mission is successful, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (e) assumes that the mission is successful and the lever symbol SLV or the decal lever as shown in FIG. The symbol BLV may be displayed. In this production example, when the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed as a dialogue notice, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed and the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed when the button repeated striking effect is successful. Even if the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, the lever symbol SLV may be displayed when the mission is successful. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 76 (f) to 76 (g) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 76 (f) to 76 (g) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 75 (c) to (d), except that the display mode of the variable icon is different. The explanation is omitted.

In this effect example, if the button repeated press effect is successful, the lever symbol SLV (decalever symbol BLV) may be displayed, and the display of other modes is not displayed, but other modes are displayed. It may be configured so that the display of is also displayed.

Further, in this production example, the mode displayed in the dialogue notice is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be displayed in yet another mode. For example, the jackpot rich displayed in the mode of the golden frame. May be displayed or may be displayed in the form of a blue frame. In such a case, the lever symbol SLV (decalever symbol BLV) in which the ground handle is in the shape of a lever may be in a mode with lower reliability than in other embodiments, or the ground handle is in the shape of a lever. Another aspect may be provided, which is less reliable than a certain lever symbol SLV (decalever symbol BLV). For example, the reliability when the SP1 reach effect is not executed may be as lever symbol SLV <decalever symbol BLV <white <blue <red <gold, or white <lever symbol SLV <decalever symbol BLV <blue <red <gold. Is also good. Further, the reliability when the SP1 reach effect is executed may be white <blue <red <gold <lever symbol SLV <decalever symbol BLV, or white <blue <red <lever symbol SLV <gold <decalever symbol BLV. Or white <blue <red <lever symbol SLV <decalever symbol BLV <gold may be used.

In addition, the characters displayed in the dialogue notice are not limited to those described above, and may be displayed in a different manner. For example, a normal big hit notice such as "super hot" or "big chance" may be displayed. There may be characters that function as, characters that increase the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific effect such as "SP2" is executed, characters that explain the game effect, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lever symbol SLV (deca lever symbol BLV) whose ground pattern is the shape of a lever is displayed, the characters "in SP1?" ("In SP1 !!") are added. However, not limited to this example, even in the case of the lever symbol SLV (decalever symbol BLV), characters that function as a normal jackpot notice such as "chance" and characters that explain the game production are added. Is also good. Even when characters other than the characters "SP1 de?" ("SP1 de !!") are displayed, the lever symbol SLV (deca lever symbol BLV) whose ground pattern is the shape of the lever is displayed. If it is done, it suggests that the expectation is high if it develops into SP reach 1 after that.

Next, another example of the relationship between the notice and the effect of the decorative symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step how an example of the advance notice effect in the decorative symbol variation display is being performed. Even in FIG. 77, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the illustration of the general drawing hold lamp 216 is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol-changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1, the number of hold of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 77 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are any of them. Is also displayed in the default display mode.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the big hit game is completed is the 156th time, and the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are "after the big hit". = 156 times "and" 399 times until the play time "are displayed.

In FIG. 77 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, since the number of fits has increased by 1 to 157, the display of the number of start times between big hits and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "after the big hit = 157 times" and "398 times until the play time", respectively. Has been done. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the dialogue notice is displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 77 (b), it is shown that a dialogue notice with the characters "in SP1?" Is added to the lever symbol SLV.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the dialogue notice was deleted, an icon with the characters "lever stock!" Was displayed, and the player was displayed with the lever symbol SLV in the dialogue notice. It suggests.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the state of reaching is shown.

After that, SP2 reach is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 77 (e) to 77 (i), finally, the combination of decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The effects of SP2 reach shown in FIGS. 77 (e) to (i) are shown in FIGS. 61 (m) to 62 (q) and 63 (r'') to (t''). It is executed in the same way.

In this production example, the lever symbol SLV was displayed in the dialogue notice, but since a production other than SP1 reach was executed, it may be said that a production with a low expectation of a big hit was executed.

Further, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot when SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed is higher than that when other notices are executed, but other notices and look-aheads are shown. It may be applied to the notice, for example, after the hold icon is displayed in the form of a blue look-ahead notice and then displayed as a variable icon without changing the display mode, a specific effect (eg, SP1 reach) is applied. The jackpot reliability when executed is higher than the display mode of other hold icons, but in other cases, the jackpot reliability is configured to be lower than the hold icon in the red look-ahead notice mode. May be good. Further, the specific effect is not limited to the reach effect, but may be a specific advance notice effect or a display of a specific message in the tutorial effect.

Further, the specific notice display such as the lever symbol SLV is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be displayed in other notices or pre-reading notices.

Further, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed after the reach effect is started, and other notice effects may be displayed after the reach effect is started. However, the lever symbol is configured. The SLV may be displayed after the reach effect is started.

In the above description,
"A production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A notice means capable of executing multiple types of notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the dialogue notice shown in FIG. 75 (b)].
During the execution of the first notice, the first display [for example, the lever symbol SLV or the like shown in FIG. 75 (b)] may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).
The case where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case [for example, the case where the SP1 reach effect shown in FIGS. 75 (e) to (g) is executed] is the first case. It is easier to display a symbol that is in a gaming state advantageous to the player than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied [For example, when the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice and the SP1 reach effect is executed, A display other than the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be displayed than when the SP1 reach effect is executed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, when the first display is displayed, attention is paid to whether or not a certain effect is executed, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may have an effect other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

Further, only the first display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or a display other than the first display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed. May be good. Further, the first display may always be displayed during the execution of the first notice, or the first display may not be displayed during the execution of the first notice.

Further, the first display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the first display may be displayed even when the first notice is not being executed. good.

Further, in the first case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only the symbols that are in a gaming state advantageous to the player are more likely to be displayed than in the first case, where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Alternatively, if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, a symbol other than the symbol that is more advantageous to the player than in the first case and the predetermined condition is not satisfied is displayed. It may be easy to display. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, it is easy to display a symbol which is more advantageous to the player than in the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the first case. Alternatively, if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, it is easier to display a symbol that is more advantageous to the player than in the first case and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It may not be available.

Further, only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, it is easier to display a symbol which is more advantageous to the player than in the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the first case. Alternatively, even in the first case other than the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol is in a more favorable gaming state for the player than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. May be easy to display.

The notice here may include a look-ahead notice.

Further, "a certain suggestion display [for example, the lever stock display shown in FIG. 75 (c)] suggesting that the first display is displayed in connection with the first case is displayed. Liver
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player who missed the first display recognize that the first display has been displayed.

Here, only certain suggestion indications suggesting that the first indication was displayed in connection with the first case may be displayed, or in connection with the first case. A display other than a certain suggestion display suggesting that the first display has been displayed may be displayed. In addition, some suggestion display suggesting that the first display was displayed in connection with the first case may always be displayed, and the first display may be displayed in relation to the first case. Some suggestion indications suggesting that one indication has been displayed may not be displayed.

Also, some suggestion display may be displayed suggesting only that the first display was displayed in connection with the first case, or may be displayed in relation to the first case. A suggestion display may be displayed that suggests something other than the display of one.

Also, some suggestion display may be displayed suggesting that the first display was displayed only in relation to the first case, or related to anything other than the first case. Then, a suggestion display suggesting that the first display has been displayed may be displayed.

Further, "when a certain effect is started after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain effect is started [for example, from FIG. 75 (c) to As shown in the figure (f), if the SP1 reach is started after the lever stock display is displayed, the lever stock display is erased after the SP1 reach is started],.
When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the effect after the suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased [for example,]. , FIG. 75 (c), FIG. The lever stock display has been erased, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, only a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display may be displayed. When a certain effect is started after the effect is performed, the display other than the suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started. Further, when a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased without fail after the certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display is displayed. If a certain effect is started after that, a certain suggestion display may not be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, when a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased only after the certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display is displayed. When a certain effect is started after that, a certain suggestion display may be erased even after the certain effect is started.

Further, when a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after only a certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display is displayed. If a certain effect is started after that, a certain suggestion display may be erased after a certain effect other than the certain effect is started.

Further, if only a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display may be displayed. If an effect other than a certain effect is started after that, a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, if a certain effect is started only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display may be displayed. When a certain effect is started other than after, a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, when a certain effect is started after only a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or a display other than the certain suggestion display may be deleted. If a certain effect is started after a certain effect is displayed, a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if only the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the non-decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased. You may. Also, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is always stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. However, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol may not be stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. There may be.

Also, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed only after the certain suggestion display is erased. However, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed even after the certain suggestion display is erased. May be good.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after only a certain suggestion display is erased. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the display other than the certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

Also, if only the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. If, after a certain suggestion display is displayed, a symbol other than the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased. You may.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting only a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. If, after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting any effect other than the certain effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

Also, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect other than after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased. May be good.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after only a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a display other than a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased. You may.

Further, "The notice of one of the plurality of types of notices is a third notice [for example, the notice of expectation degree shown in FIG. 75 (f)].
The first notice and the third notice are different notices.
In the first case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third notice is executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (b) to (f), the lever symbol SLV is announced in the dialogue notice. If SP1 reach is executed after it is displayed, the expectation notice will be executed, etc.],
In the first case, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without satisfying the predetermined conditions, the third notice is not executed [for example, FIGS. 75 (b) to 75 (c), the same figure. (D''')-As shown in the figure (e'''), if SP1 reach is not executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, the expectation notice is not executed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when the first display is displayed and a certain effect is executed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for the third notice, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Here, if a certain effect is executed after the first case, only the third notice may be executed, or a certain effect is executed after the first case. In that case, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. Further, if a certain effect is executed after the first case, the third notice may be executed without fail, or a certain effect is executed after the first case. In that case, the third notice may not be executed.

Further, the third notice may be executed only when a certain effect is executed after the first case, or a certain effect is executed after the first case. In cases other than the case, the third notice may be executed.

Further, if only a certain effect is executed after the first case, the third notice may be executed, or after the first case, an effect other than a certain effect is performed. If so, a third notice may be run.

Further, if a certain effect is executed only after the first case, the third notice may be executed, or a certain effect is executed other than after the first case. If so, a third notice may be executed.

Further, if a certain effect is executed after only the first case, the third notice may be executed, or a certain effect may be executed after the case other than the first case. If so, a third notice may be run.

Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case, only the third notice does not have to be executed, and it is the first case. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after that, the notice other than the third notice may not be executed. In addition, if the decorative design is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case, the third notice does not necessarily have to be executed, and it is the first case. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after that, a third notice may be executed.

Further, only when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case, the third notice does not have to be executed, and it is the first case. The third notice may not be executed even in cases other than the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after that.

In addition, if only the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case, the third notice does not have to be executed, and it is the first case. If a symbol other than the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after that, the third notice may not be executed.

Further, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing only a certain effect after the first case, the third notice does not have to be executed, and it is the first case. After that, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing an effect other than a certain effect, the third notice may not be executed.

Further, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect only after the first case, the third notice does not have to be executed, and it is the first case. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect other than after that, the third notice may not be executed.

Further, if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after only the first case, the third notice may not be executed, and the third case may not be executed. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the case occurs, the third notice may not be executed.

Further, in the first case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, only the third notice may be executed, and in the first case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, other than the third notice. Notice may be executed. If the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, the third notice may be executed without fail, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, the third notice is not executed. There may be cases.

Further, the third notice may be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first case, and the third notice may be executed even in the first case other than the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied. The third notice may be executed.

Further, in the first case, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, only the third notice does not have to be executed, and in the first case, the predetermined condition is satisfied. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without being established, the notice other than the third notice may not be executed. Further, in the first case, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without satisfying the predetermined condition, the third notice does not necessarily have to be executed, and in the first case, the predetermined condition is satisfied. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without being established, a third notice may be executed.

Further, only in the first case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without satisfying the predetermined condition, the third notice may not be executed, and in the first case, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The third notice may not be executed except when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without being established.

Further, "the notice of one of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice [for example, the button repeated pressing effect shown in FIGS. 76 (d) to (e)].
The first notice and the second notice are different notices.
The first display may be displayed during the execution of the second notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (d) to 76 (e), when the button repeated press effect is successful, the lever symbol SLV is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
In one symbol variation display, when both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter, "second notice"). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (b) to (e), after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, the button repeated hitting effect is successful and the lever symbol SLV is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first display may be displayed in a plurality of advance notice effects, it may be possible to pay attention to various timings and improve the interest of the game.

Here, only the first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed, or a display other than the first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed. You may. Further, the first display may always be displayed during the execution of the second notice, or the first display may not be displayed during the execution of the second notice.

Further, the first display may be displayed only while the second notice is being executed, or the first display may be displayed only while the second notice is being executed. ..

Further, in one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed. In one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed. Further, in one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may always be executed, or one symbol variation may be executed. In the display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may not be executed.

Further, in one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which only the first display is displayed may be executed. In one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which a display other than the first display is displayed may be executed.

Further, in one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which only the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed. In one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which a display other than the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed.

In addition, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed only in one symbol variation display. In the display other than the one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed.

Further, "the first display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode [for example, the lever symbol SLV or the like in the normal mode shown in FIG. 76 (b)].
The first display is a display that may be displayed in the second aspect [for example, the decal lever symbol BLV shown in FIG. 76 (b')].
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different.
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first in the second aspect also in the second notice. The display may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (b') to (e'), after the decalever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, if the button repeated hitting effect is successful, the decalever symbol BLV Is displayed, etc.],
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first aspect in the second notice. Is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (b') to (e'), after the decal lever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, if the button repeated hitting effect is successful, the lever symbol SLV is displayed. Decalever design BLV is displayed without being displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the first display increases, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first display may be displayed only in the first aspect, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first aspect. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the second aspect, or may be displayed in a mode other than the second aspect. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect.

In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be a partially different aspect or may be a completely different aspect.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also in the second aspect. A display other than one may be displayed. Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is always displayed in the second mode in the second notice. Alternatively, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the second notice as well. It may not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed only in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also other than the second aspect. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also in the notice other than the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, in the second case, only after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In the second case, not only after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, but also in the second notice in the second aspect. The first display may be displayed.

Further, in the second case, after only the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In the second case, after the display other than the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also displayed. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed only in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in a mode other than the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also made in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the notice other than the first notice, the second notice is also made in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, only in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In cases other than the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is also made in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, only the first display is displayed in the first aspect in the second notice. The case may not be necessary, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first in the first notice is displayed in the second notice. It is not necessary to display a display other than the display. Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is always displayed in the first mode in the second notice. Alternatively, in the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first indication is not displayed in the first aspect in the second notice. There may be cases.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed only in the first mode in the second notice. The case may not be necessary, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, in a mode other than the first aspect in the second notice. The first display may or may not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode only in the second notice. The case may not be necessary, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, in the first aspect in the notice other than the second notice. The first display may or may not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, after only the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first aspect in the second notice. The case may not be necessary, and in the second case, after the display other than the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, in the first aspect in the second notice. The first notice may or may not be displayed, and in the second case, after the first notice is displayed only in the second aspect in the first notice, the second notice is displayed. In the first aspect, the first indication may not be displayed, or in the second case, the first indication is displayed in an aspect other than the second aspect in the first notice. After that, the first indication may not be displayed in the first aspect in the second notice.

Further, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. The case may not be necessary, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the notice other than the first notice, in the first notice in the second notice. The first display may or may not be displayed.

In addition, "a red map in which the characters" chance !! "are displayed in the red oval frame shown in the second display [for example, FIG. 76 (b''') during the execution of the first notice". Pattern, etc.] may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the third case").
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
The case where the certain effect is executed after the first case is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the certain effect is executed after the third case [for example, The reliability of the jackpot is higher when SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice than when SP1 reach is executed after the red map symbol is displayed in the dialogue notice. etc],
The case where the certain effect is not executed after the third case is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the certain effect is not executed after the first case [. For example, if SP1 reach is not executed after the red map pattern is displayed in the dialogue notice, it is a big hit than if SP1 reach is not executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice. High reliability, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the expectation of a certain production changes between the first case and the third case, so it is necessary to pay attention to which case it will be, and to improve the interest of the game. You may be able to do it.

Here, only the second display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed. You may. Further, the second display may always be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or the second display may not be displayed during the execution of the first notice.

Further, the second display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the second display may be displayed when the first notice is not being executed. ..

The first display and the second display may be partially different displays or may be completely different displays.

Further, "the certain effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, SP1 reach shown in FIGS. 75 (e) to (g)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first display is a display that is not displayed after the reach effect is started [for example, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed after the reach is reached, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console provided with a game control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.] capable of shifting to one of a plurality of game states.
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of a symbol variation display using a variation pattern table of one of a plurality of types of variation pattern tables.
The gaming state of one of the plurality of types of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The variation pattern table of one of the plurality of types of variation pattern tables is the first variation pattern table [for example, the normal time variation pattern table, etc.].
One type of variation pattern table among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables is a second variation pattern table [for example, a variation pattern table during crispy time].
The first variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the symbol of the special figure 1 200 times after the end of the big hit game. Until the fluctuation display is executed, the normal fluctuation pattern table is used, etc.],
The second variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the symbol of the special figure 1 200 times after the end of the big hit game. When the variation display is executed, the crisp time variation pattern table is used in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 from the 201st time to the 540th time],.
The game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state. It is a means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the jackpot game ends while the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. When the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is executed 200 times after that, the crispy time variation pattern table is used in the symbol variation display that starts after that],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Further, according to this game table, when the first condition is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern table is changed, so that the production can be varied and the fun of the game may be improved.

Here, the game control means may be capable of shifting to only one of a plurality of types of gaming states, or may shift to a game state other than one of a plurality of types of gaming states. It may be anything. Further, the game control means may always shift to one of a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to one of a plurality of types of gaming states. May be.

Further, the game control means may determine only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display by using the variation pattern table of one of the plurality of types of variation pattern tables, or the variation pattern table of the plurality of types. One of them may be used to determine a variation pattern table other than the variation time of the symbol variation display. Further, the game control means may always determine the variation time of the symbol variation display by using the variation pattern table of one of the plurality of types of variation pattern tables, or the variation pattern table of the plurality of types. In some cases, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using one of the variation pattern tables.

Further, the game control means may determine the variation time of the symbol variation display by using only one variation pattern table among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables, or the variation pattern table of the plurality of types. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be determined by using a table other than the variation pattern table of one of them.

Further, the first variation pattern table may be selected only in the first gaming state, or may be selected in a gaming state other than the first gaming state. There may be. Further, the first variation pattern table may be always selected in the first gaming state, or may not be selected in the first gaming state.

Further, the second variation pattern table may be selected only in the first gaming state, or may be selected in a gaming state other than the first gaming state. There may be. Further, the second variation pattern table may be always selected in the first gaming state, or may not be selected in the first gaming state.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine only the fluctuation time of the variation display, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter will be the first. The second variation pattern table may be used to determine a time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display. Further, when the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. The fluctuation time of the variation display may be determined without fail, and if the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter will be the first. In some cases, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using the variation pattern table of the second.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses only the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if the first condition is satisfied during the use of the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter will be the first. A fluctuation pattern table other than the second fluctuation pattern table may be used to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display.

Further, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table only in the symbol variation display that starts after the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, other than the symbol variation display that starts after that. In the symbol variation display, the second variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, when only the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if a condition other than the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol variation to be started thereafter. The second variation pattern table may be used in the display to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, "when the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, rather than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table". [For example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the crispy time fluctuation pattern table is used, it is better than when the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used. Since it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time such as no reach and loss, the fluctuation time tends to be short, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to adjust the speed of the game, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table is larger than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be likely to be shortened, and the second variation pattern table is used rather than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. When the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined, the time other than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be shorter. Also, when the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, it is better than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. , The fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may always be short, and the second variation pattern table is used rather than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. In some cases, it may not be easy for the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display to be shorter when the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Also, only when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, rather than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be short, and the second variation pattern table is used rather than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. In cases other than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be shorter.

Also, when only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, rather than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be short, and the second variation pattern table is used rather than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. It may be easier for the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display to be shorter when the time other than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Also, when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using only the second variation pattern table, rather than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the variation time of the symbol variation display may be short, and the variation other than the second variation pattern table may be determined as compared with the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. When the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be shorter.

Also, when the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, rather than when only the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the variation time of the symbol variation display may be short, and the second variation pattern table may be used to determine the time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display using the first variation pattern table. It may be easier for the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display to be shorter when the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using.

Also, when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, rather than when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using only the first variation pattern table. However, the variation time of the symbol variation display may be short, and the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined by using a variation pattern table other than the first variation pattern table. When the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be shorter.

Further, "a certain display [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 71 (l)] is displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (l), in the crispy time when the crispy time fluctuation pattern table is used, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed when the number of remaining symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time reaches 300 times. Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to notify that the time efficiency is improved, and it may be possible to increase the motivation to play.

Here, only a certain display may be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or the second fluctuation pattern table is used. Then, a display other than a certain display may be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined. Further, a certain display may always be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, or the symbol variation display may be displayed using the second variation pattern table. Some indications may not be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of is determined.

Further, a certain display may be displayed only during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or the second fluctuation pattern table may be used. In some cases, a certain display may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Further, a certain display may be displayed in a period in which only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, or the second variation pattern table may be used. In some cases, a certain display may be displayed during a period in which a time other than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Further, a certain display may be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using only the second fluctuation pattern table, or the fluctuation other than the second fluctuation pattern table may be displayed. A certain display may be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table.

In addition, "the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (h). In addition, if the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, even if the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is executed 200 times, the time does not shift to crisp time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on, and the first condition is started when the power is turned on. It is not necessary that a condition other than the first condition is satisfied in one gaming state. Further, it is not always necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on, and the first condition that is started when the power is turned on. The first condition may be satisfied in the gaming state of.

Further, the first condition may not be satisfied only in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on, and the first condition is started when the power is turned on. It is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in a gaming state other than the gaming state of.

Further, it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that is started only when the power is turned on, and it is started in a case other than the case where it is initialized when the power is turned on. It is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state to be played.

Further, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state which is started when the power is turned on, and the first condition is started when the power is not turned on. It is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state.

In addition, "the first symbol display means capable of displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a second symbol variation display, and
Equipped with
In the first gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition is satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times [for example, 200 times, etc.] [for example, As shown in FIG. 71 (f), when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed 200 times after the jackpot game is completed, the variation pattern table to be used is switched to the crispy time variation pattern table, etc.],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to reduce the discomfort when the big hit is not won for a long time.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to improve the motivation to play by improving the time efficiency until a certain state is reached.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. good. Further, the first symbol display means may always display the first symbol variation display, or may not display the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. .. Further, the second symbol display means may always display the second symbol variation display, or may not display the second symbol variation display.

Further, in the first game state that shifts after the jackpot game is completed, if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, only the first condition may be satisfied, or the jackpot game is completed. In the first gaming state to be transferred later, if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, conditions other than the first condition may be satisfied. Further, in the first game state in which the game shifts after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition may always be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the jackpot game is completed. In the first gaming state to be transferred later, the first condition may not be satisfied if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

Further, in the first game state that shifts after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition may be satisfied if only the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the jackpot game is completed. In the first gaming state to be transferred later, the first condition may be satisfied when the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

Further, only in the first game state in which the game shifts after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the jackpot game is completed. Even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state to be transferred later, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

Further, in the first game state in which the transition is made only after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the jackpot game is completed. In the first gaming state that shifts to other than after, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are common [for example, , As shown in FIG. 57, both the normal time fluctuation pattern table and the crispy time time fluctuation pattern table have a common fluctuation pattern that can be selected],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it has been initialized.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to prevent a misunderstanding as if the mode has been changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, even if only the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are common. It is good, except for the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table. May be good. In addition, even if the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are always the same. Also, when the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are not common. There may be.

Further, "The game control means has a second condition during use of the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state [for example, the symbol variation of the 540th time after the jackpot game is completed. When the display is executed, etc.] is established, it is a means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display using the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display to be started after that [for example, FIG. 56 (g). ), When the number of symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 reaches 540 times after the jackpot game is completed while using the crispy time variation pattern table in the special figure low probability state, the symbol variation starts after that. In the display, the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used to determine the fluctuation pattern, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by securing a certain effect time, it is possible to execute an effect for transitioning to a certain state, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state. Only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be determined, or if the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter The first variation pattern table may be used to determine a time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display. Further, when the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. The fluctuation time of the variation display may be determined without fail, and if the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter will be the second. In some cases, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using one variation pattern table.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses only the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if the second condition is satisfied during the use of the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts thereafter will be the second. A variation pattern table other than one variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table only in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if the second condition is satisfied while using the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, other than the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. May also use the first variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, if only the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if a condition other than the second condition is satisfied while using the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol variation that starts thereafter. In the display, the first variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only while the second variation pattern table is used in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display, or if the second condition is satisfied other than while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the symbol variation display that starts after that is satisfied. In, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display may be determined using the first variation pattern table.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state.
There is a case where the first game state is changed to the second game state without becoming a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as "the first case") [for example, 555 symbols after the big hit game is completed. When the fluctuation display is performed, the game shifts from the normal game state to the play time (b time reduction state) without becoming a big hit],
In the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and starts [for example, the normal gaming state after the play time ends]. Crispy time does not start after shifting to],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, after the end of the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations to a certain state is short, so that it may be possible to prevent excessive improvement in time efficiency to a certain state. ..

Here, there may be a case where the first gaming state shifts to only the second gaming state without a big hit, or the second gaming state from the first gaming state without a big hit. It may shift to a gaming state other than the state. Further, the first gaming state may be surely changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit, and the first gaming state may not be changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit. There may be cases.

Further, in the first case, it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and starts, and in the first case, the second It is not necessary that a condition other than the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state which is started after the gaming state of. Further, in the first case, the first condition may not always be satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and is started, and in the first case, the second It is not always necessary that the first condition is not satisfied in the first gaming state which is started after the gaming state of.

Further, in the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied only in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and is started, and in the first case, the second It is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in a gaming state other than the first gaming state which is started after the gaming state of.

Further, in the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state in which only the second gaming state ends and is started, and in the first case, the second It is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state which is started after the gaming state other than the gaming state of.

Further, only in the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and is started, and in cases other than the first case. However, it is not always necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and is started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, CPU 304 first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc. of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time saving state is a variation display of a special symbol that does not become a big hit and does not become a big hit continuously after the big hit game ends and shifts to a certain game state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.]. It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times the result is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of fitting") reaches the first number of times [for example, 555 times, etc.].
An effect of at least suggesting the number of times of variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times") until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, until the play time shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is possible to execute a variable number of effects including display of the number of remaining starts, display of the number of big hits, etc.
The first condition [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 (one symbol variation of crying) executed after shifting to the a time saving state and the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (b). When the execution of (display) is completed, etc.] is satisfied, the effect of the number of fluctuations is started.
The remaining number of times suggested at least when the variation number production is started is a number smaller than the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a time saving state and crying 1 When the symbol variation display of the times is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the number of symbol variation displays required from the end of the big hit game to the start of the play time (555 times) is less than the number of times. Display starts after the number of times (545 times)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel a little better.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling the state of the game state corpse. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a time saving state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, the second time saving state may shift when the number of fits is only the first, or may shift when the number of fits is other than the first. May be. Further, the second time saving state may be the one that always shifts when the number of fits reaches the first number, or may not shift even if the number of fits reaches the first number. good.

Further, it may be possible to execute only the variable number effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times, or it is possible to execute the effect other than the variable number of effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times. May be good. Further, the variable number effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times may be executed without fail, or the variable number of times effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times may not be executed.

Further, it may be possible to execute a variable number production including only an effect of an aspect suggesting at least the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect including an effect other than the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times. May be good.

Further, it may be possible to execute the variable number effect including the effect of suggesting only the remaining number of times, or even if it is possible to execute the variable number of effect including the effect of at least suggesting other than the remaining number of times. Alternatively, it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect including an effect of an aspect that always suggests the remaining number of times.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied, only the variation number effect may be started, or when the first condition is satisfied, the effect other than the variation number effect may be started. Further, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production may be started without fail, or when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production may not be started.

Further, the variation number effect may be started when only the first condition is satisfied, or the variation number effect may be started when a condition other than the first condition is satisfied.

Further, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variation number production is started may be a number smaller than that of only the first number, or at least the remaining number of times suggested when the variation number production is started. May be less than the number other than the first. Further, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variation number production is started may be always smaller than the first number, or at least the remaining number of times suggested when the variation number production is started. May be a number not less than the first number.

The remaining number of times suggested when the variation number production is started may be a number smaller than the first number, and the remaining number of notifications when the variation number production is started is the first. The number may be less than one.

In addition, "the game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting the first time saving state [for example, a time saving state, etc.].
The normal gaming state is a gaming state including a non-time saving state.
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may shift after the end of the big hit game.
Even in the first time saving state, the number of fittings is counted every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.
When the first time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition is satisfied and the variation number production is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 66, a time saving state. When is finished and one symbol change display of crying is finished, the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time is started, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to concentrate on the time saving state.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only a normal game state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the normal game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the normal game state, or may not start the normal game state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be shifted only after the end of the big hit game, or may be shifted to other than after the end of the big hit game. Further, the first time saving state may be one that always shifts after the end of the big hit game, or may not shift after the end of the big hit game.

Further, even in the first time saving state, only the number of times of fitting may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and even in the first time saving state, the variable display of the special symbol may be executed. The number of times other than the number of times may be counted. Further, even in the first time saving state, the number of times of fitting may be always counted every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and even in the first time saving state, the fitting is performed every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of times may not be counted.

Further, even in the first time saving state, the number of fits may be counted every time only the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and even in the first time saving state, the display other than the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of fits may be counted for each.

Further, the number of fits may be counted each time the special symbol variation display is executed only in the first time reduction state, and the special symbol variation display is executed even in the game state other than the first time reduction state. The number of fits may be counted each time.

Further, when the first time saving state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and only the variation number production may be started, or the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered. At the time of transition, the first condition may be satisfied and an effect other than the variation number effect may be started. Further, when the first time saving state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be always started, or the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered. After the transition, the first condition may be satisfied and the variation number production may not be started.

Further, when the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, only the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be started, or the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered. At the time of transition, a condition other than the first condition may be satisfied and the variation number production may be started.

Further, when the first time saving state ends and only shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be started, or the first time saving state ends and other than the normal gaming state. When the game state is changed to, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be started.

Further, when only the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be started, or the gaming state other than the first time saving state ends. When the normal gaming state is entered, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times production may be started.

In addition, "when the first condition is satisfied, the variation including information suggesting at least the number of times the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number is the remaining number. The number-of-times effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the one-time symbol variation display of the time saving state and crying is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the jackpot game is started. The number of times the symbol variation display required from the end to the start of the play time (555 times) is subtracted from the number of times of a time saving state and one symbol variation display of crying (9 times) until the play time. It is displayed as a display of the number of remaining starts, etc.],
The first condition is a condition including the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state when the first time reduction state is entered after the end of the jackpot game.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first condition is satisfied, only the fluctuation number production including at least the information suggesting that the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number is the remaining number of times is available. It may be started, and when the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the change display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number is the number of times remaining, and the change including at least suggestive information. An effect other than the number of times effect may be started. In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information is always started with the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game subtracted from the first number as the remaining number. If the first condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations including at least the information suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number is the remaining number of times. The production may not start.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number of times as the remaining number of times, and the effect of the number of fluctuations including at least the suggestion information starts. If the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number is the remaining number, and at least the information other than the suggestion is used. The variable number of times production including may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information starts with only the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game subtracted from the first number as the remaining number. If the first condition is satisfied, the information suggesting at least the number of times other than the number of times the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number of times is used as the remaining number of times. The variable number of times production including may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information is started with the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game subtracted from only the first number as the remaining number. If the first condition is satisfied, at least the information suggesting that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the number of times other than the first number of times is the remaining number of times is provided. The variable number of times production including may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information is started with the number of times obtained by subtracting only the number of variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game from the first number as the remaining number. If the first condition is satisfied, at least the information suggesting that the number of times other than the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number of times is the remaining number of times is provided. The variable number of times production including may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information is started with the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed only after the end of the big hit game subtracted from the first number as the remaining number. If the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the variation display of the special symbol executed other than after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number is included as the remaining number of times. The variable number of times production may be started.

In addition, when only the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including at least suggestive information is started with the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game subtracted from the first number as the remaining number. If a condition other than the first condition is satisfied, the information suggesting at least the number of times that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is the remaining number of times is provided. The variable number of times production including may be started.

When the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including the information suggesting that the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number is started. Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the variation number production including the information that the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number is started. May be done.

Further, the first condition may include only the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state when the first time reduction state is entered after the end of the jackpot game. , When the state shifts to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit game, it may include things other than the transition from the first time saving state to the normal game state. Further, the first condition may always include the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state when the transition to the first time reduction state is performed after the end of the jackpot game. In the case of shifting to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit game, it may not include the transition from the first time saving state to the normal game state.

Further, the first condition may include the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state only when the transition to the first time reduction state is performed after the end of the jackpot game. , The case may include the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state except when the transition to the first time reduction state is performed after the end of the big hit game.

Further, the first condition may include the transition from the first time reduction state to the normal game state when the transition to the first time reduction state is performed only after the end of the jackpot game. , When the state shifts to the first time saving state other than after the end of the big hit game, the transition from the first time saving state to the normal game state may be included.

Further, "the effect means includes an effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the end of the first time reduction state [for example, FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (f)). It is a means that can execute the display of the remaining number of times of the symbol variation display of the challenge time shown in FIG. 64 (k) to the display of the remaining number of times of the symbol variation display of the high-speed RUSH shown in FIGS.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to concentrate on the first time saving state.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the time reduction number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the end of the first time reduction state, or the first. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the time-reduced number-of-time notification effect, which includes an effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the time-saving state of is finished. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the time reduction number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the end of the first time reduction state, or the first time reduction state. There may be a case where the time saving number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the end of is not executed.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing the time reduction number notification effect including only the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the end of the first time reduction state, or the first. It may be possible to execute a time saving number notification effect including an effect other than the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the time saving state ends.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing a time reduction number notification effect including an effect of notifying only the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the end of the first time reduction state, or the first. It may be possible to execute the time saving number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of times other than the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol until the time saving state ends.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing a time reduction number notification effect including an effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until only the first time reduction state ends, or the first. It may be possible to execute the time saving number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the game state other than the time saving state ends.

In addition, "variable winning means through which a game ball can enter [for example, first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a, etc.] and
A specific area [for example, V-passing switch SW2, etc.] through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass, and
The variable winning means is a means capable of changing a state into a first state [for example, a closed state, etc.] and a second state [for example, an open state, etc.].
In the first state and the second state, the game ball is easier to enter in the second state.
The variable winning means is related to the fact that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit [for example, a small hit generated when "special figure b" to "special figure d" are stopped and displayed]. It is a means to change the state to the second state [for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, etc.].
The big hit game can be started when the game ball passes through the specific area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (g) to 64 (i), the second variable winning opening 235a is entered during the small hit game. When the ball is passed through the V passage switch SW2, the big hit game is started, etc.],
When the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times [for example, 200 times, etc.] is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends [for example, If the symbol variation display is executed 200 times without becoming a big hit after shifting to the play time, then the game shifts to the normal game state, etc.],.
The number of times of variation display of the special symbol [for example, 8 times, etc.] from the start of the first time saving state to the end without becoming a big hit is less than the second number.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the second time saving state is configured to be easy to hit a big hit, it may be possible to play a game aiming at the second time saving state.

Here, the variable winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the variable winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the specific area may be one that only the game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass through, or may be one that can pass other than the game ball that has entered the variable winning means. Further, the specific area may be one in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means always passes, or may be one in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means does not pass.

Further, the variable winning means may be capable of changing the state only in the first state and the second state, or may be able to change the state in a state other than the first state and the second state. It may be. Further, the variable winning means may be one that always changes the state between the first state and the second state, or may not change the state between the first state and the second state. You may.

Further, the variable winning means may be one in which the state changes only to the second state in connection with the result of the variable display of the special symbol being a small hit, or the result of the variable display of the special symbol may be changed. It may change to a state other than the second state in connection with the small hit. Further, the variable winning means may be one that always changes to the second state in connection with the result of the variable display of the special symbol being a small hit, or the result of the variable display of the special symbol may be. It may be the one that may not change to the second state in connection with the small hit.

Further, the variable winning means may be one that changes to the second state only in relation to the result of the variable display of the special symbol being a small hit, or the result of the variable display of the special symbol may be. It may change to a second state in connection with something other than a small hit.

Further, only the big hit game may be started when the game ball passes through the specific area, or the game other than the big hit game may be started when the game ball passes through the specific area. Further, the big hit game may always start when the game ball passes through the specific area, or the big hit game may not start when the game ball passes through the specific area.

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball has passed the specific area, or the big hit game may be started only when the game ball has passed the specific area.

Further, if the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the second time saving state, only the second time saving state may be terminated, or the second time saving state may be terminated. If the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the state, the gaming state other than the second time saving state may be terminated. Further, if the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the second time saving state, the second time saving state may always end, and the second time saving state may be terminated. If the change display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the state, the second time saving state may not end.

Further, if only the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the second time saving state, the second time saving state may end, or the second time saving state may end. The second time saving state may be terminated when the display other than the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times is executed without becoming a big hit after shifting to the state.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Character display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time saving state is a variation display of a special symbol that does not become a big hit and does not become a big hit continuously after the big hit game ends and shifts to a certain game state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.]. It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times the result is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of fitting") reaches the first number of times [for example, 555 times, etc.].
A variation number effect including an effect of at least suggesting the number of variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “remaining number”) until the number of fits becomes the first number [for example, FIG. 66 (b)). Display effect of the number of remaining starts until the play time shown in)] can be executed.
Even if the power is cut off, the remaining number of times can be stored and retained.
When the backup is restored after the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the game is started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off.
When the power is initialized and then restored (hereinafter referred to as "second case") after the power is cut off, the game is started with the remaining number of times as the first number of times.
The fluctuation frequency effect is started in the same manner in the first case and the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (e) and FIG. 66 (e'), the backup is restored even when the backup is restored. Even if this is done, the display effect of the number of remaining starts until the play time is started in the same manner],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

In addition, according to this game table, since the behavior is the same in the first case and the second case, it is possible to play the game while expecting that it is the first case (the number of remaining times is small). There is.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, the second time saving state may shift when only the number of fits becomes the first number, or may shift when the number of times other than the number of fits becomes the first number. May be. Further, the second time saving state may be one that always shifts when the number of fits reaches the first number, or may not shift when the number of fits reaches the first number.

Further, it may be possible to execute only the variable number effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times, or it is possible to execute the effect other than the variable number of effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times. May be good. Further, the variable number effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times may be executed without fail, or the variable number of times effect including the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times may not be executed.

Further, it may be possible to execute a variable number production including only an effect of an aspect suggesting at least the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect including an effect other than the effect of at least suggesting the remaining number of times. May be good.

Further, it may be possible to execute a variable number effect including an effect of at least suggesting only the remaining number of times, or even if it is possible to execute a variable number of effect including an effect of at least suggesting other than the remaining number of times. good.

It should be noted that it may be possible to execute the variable number effect including the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute the variable number of effect effect including the effect of the aspect of notifying the remaining number of times.

Further, even if the power is cut off, only the remaining number of times may be stored and retained, or even if the power is turned off, the number of times other than the remaining number of times may be stored and retained. Further, even if the power is cut off, the remaining number of times may be stored and retained, or even if the power is turned off, the remaining number of times may not be stored and retained.

Further, if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the game may be started only for the remaining number of times before the power is cut off, and if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the power is turned on. The game may be started other than the remaining number of times before being cut off. In addition, if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the game may always be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off, and if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the power is turned on. The game may not be started with the remaining number of times before being cut off.

In addition, the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off only when the backup is restored after the power is cut off, or when the backup is restored after the power is turned off. In addition, the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off. In addition, if the backup is restored only after the power is cut off, the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off, or if the backup is restored other than after the power is cut off. , The game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off.

Further, if the power is initialized and then restored after the power is cut off, the game may be started with only the remaining number of times as the first number, or the game may be initialized after the power is turned off. When the power is restored, the game may be started with a number other than the remaining number as the first number. Further, if the power is initialized and then restored after the power is cut off, the game may always be started with the remaining number of times as the first number, or the game may be initialized after the power is turned off. When the power is restored, the remaining number of times may be the first number and the game may not be started.

Further, the game may be started with the remaining number of times as the first number only when the power is initialized and then restored after the power is cut off, or the game is initialized after the power is turned off. In cases other than the case where the power is restored, the game may be started with the remaining number of times as the first number of times. Further, if the game is initialized and the power is restored only after the power is cut off, the game may be started with the remaining number of times as the first number, and the game may be started other than after the power is turned off. When the power is restored and the power is restored, the game may be started with the remaining number of times as the first number of times.

Further, only the variation number effect may be started in the same mode in the first case and the second case, and the effect other than the variation number effect may be started in the same mode in the first case and the second case. May be done. Further, the variation number effect may always be started in the same mode in the first case and the second case, and the variation number effect may not be started in the same mode in the first case and the second case. There may be.

Further, "in a mode that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times in either of the variation number production started in the first case and the fluctuation number production started in the second case. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (e) and (e'), the mode of displaying the remaining number of starts until the play time is "play time" regardless of whether the backup is restored or the ram is cleared. Up to ??? times "is displayed, and the number of remaining starts until the play time is considered to be difficult to recognize, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in both the variation number production started in the first case and the variation number production started in the second case, only the production in a mode that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times starts. In both the variable number production started in the first case and the variable number production started in the second case, the effect does not directly suggest the remaining number of times. Other effects may be started. Further, in both the variation number production started in the first case and the variation number production started in the second case, the production in a mode that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times is always started. Alternatively, in both the variation number production started in the first case and the variation number production started in the second case, the production in a manner that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times is performed. It may not start.

Further, in both the variation number production started in the first case and the variation number production started in the second case, the production is started in a mode that does not directly suggest only the remaining number of times. In any of the variation number production started in the first case and the variation number production started in the second case, the number of times other than the remaining number is not directly suggested. The production of may be started.

In addition, when the "second condition [for example, when the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on] is satisfied, the effect is such that the remaining number of times is directly suggested in the variation number effect. Is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (e) to (h), when the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, "until the play time ???" The display of the number of remaining starts until the play time that was displayed will change to "292 times until the play time", and the number of remaining starts will be notified, etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect that it is the first case until the second condition is satisfied.

Here, when the second condition is satisfied, only the effect of directly suggesting the remaining number of times may be started in the variation number effect, or when the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times may be directly indicated in the variation number effect. An effect other than the effect in the mode suggested above may be started. Further, when the second condition is satisfied, the effect of directly suggesting the remaining number of times may be started in the variation number effect, and when the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times is directly indicated in the variation number effect. In some cases, the production in the manner suggested in 1 may not be started.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied, the production may be started in a mode that directly suggests only the remaining number of times in the fluctuation number production, and when the second condition is satisfied, the number of times other than the remaining number of times is satisfied in the fluctuation number production. May be initiated in a manner that directly suggests. Further, when the second condition is satisfied, the effect of directly suggesting the remaining number of times may be started only in the effect of the number of fluctuations, and when the second condition is satisfied, the effect remains in the effect other than the effect of the number of variations. The production may be started in a manner that directly suggests the number of times.

Further, if only the second condition is satisfied, the effect of directly suggesting the remaining number of times may be started in the variation number effect, and if the conditions other than the second condition are satisfied, the remaining number of times may be started in the variation number effect. The production may be started in a manner that directly suggests.

Further, "In the first case, the second time saving state may be started before the second condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIGS. 67C to 67F). In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot game ends before the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, the remaining number of starts until the play time is reached. Will shift to play time with the display of "until play time ??? times"],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to surprise the player.

Here, in the first case, only the second time saving state may be started before the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, before the second condition is satisfied. In some cases, a gaming state other than the second time saving state may be started. Further, in the first case, the second time saving state may always be started before the second condition is satisfied, and in the first case, the second time saving state may be started before the second condition is satisfied. The state may not start.

Further, in the first case, the second time saving state may be started only before the second condition is satisfied, and in the first case, other than before the second condition is satisfied. In some cases, a second time saving state may be started. Further, in the first case, the second time saving state may be started before only the second condition is satisfied, and in the first case, the conditions other than the second condition are satisfied. A second time saving state may be initiated before doing so. Further, only in the first case, the second time saving state may be started before the second condition is satisfied, and in cases other than the first case, the second condition may be started. The second time saving state may be started before it is established.

In the first case, the big hit game may be started before the second condition is satisfied.
A game table characterized by that.
May be.

In addition, "a display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The combination of the decorative symbols displayed as the initial symbols is the same in the first case and the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (e) and FIG. The combination of decorative symbols displayed as the initial symbol (morning appearance) displayed when the power is turned on is displayed as the combination of decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" regardless of whether the power is turned on or cleared. , Etc.],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 0)
A symbol display means that can execute variable display of special symbols,
A game control means that can control the game state,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state.
The second time saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is continuously out of the way is displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times ") becomes the first number of times.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the third number of misses is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends.
The second time saving state is not started from the end of the second time saving state until a big hit.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 1)
A production means that can execute multiple productions,
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notice, and
It is a game table equipped with
The notice of one of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice.
The first display may be displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as "first case").
When a certain effect is executed after the first case, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the certain effect is executed without the first case.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1,
A suggestion display is displayed, suggesting that the first display was displayed in connection with the first case.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 2,
When the certain effect is started after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain effect is started.
If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the effect after the suggestion display is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the suggestion display is erased.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 3.
The notice of one of the plurality of types of notices is the third notice.
The first notice and the third notice are different notices.
If the certain effect is executed after the first case, the third notice is executed.
If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without the certain effect being executed after the first case, the third notice is not executed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 4.
The notice of one kind of the plurality of kinds of notices is the second notice.
The first notice and the second notice are different notices.
The first display may be displayed during the execution of the second notice.
In one symbol variation display, when both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter, "second notice"). In the case of "),
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console described in Appendix 5,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in the first aspect.
The first display is a display that may be displayed in the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different.
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first in the second aspect also in the second notice. The display may be displayed,
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second aspect in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first aspect in the second notice. Is not displayed,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 6.
The second display may be displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as "third case").
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
The case where the certain effect is executed after the first case is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the certain effect is executed after the third case.
The case where the certain effect is not executed after the third case is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the certain effect is not executed after the first case.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 7.
The certain production is a certain super reach production.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 8.
The first display is a display that is not displayed after the reach effect is started.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 9.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 11)
A game table equipped with a game control means capable of shifting to one of a plurality of game states.
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of a symbol variation display using a variation pattern table of one of a plurality of types of variation pattern tables.
The gaming state of one of the plurality of types of gaming states is the first gaming state.
The variation pattern table of one of the plurality of types of variation pattern tables is the first variation pattern table.
The variation pattern table of one of the plurality of types of variation pattern tables is the second variation pattern table.
The first variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state.
The second variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state.
The game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state. It is a means to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console described in Appendix 11.
The variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table than the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. , The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display tends to be short,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to Appendix 11 or 12.
A display may be displayed during the period in which the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 14)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 11 to 13.
The first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 11 to 14.
The first symbol display means capable of displaying the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of displaying a second symbol variation display,
Equipped with
In the first gaming state, which shifts after the jackpot game is completed, the first condition is satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 11 to 15.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple productions,
The content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are common.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 11 to 16.
The game control means uses the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state. It is a means to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 11 to 17.
The gaming state of one of the plurality of types of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state.
There is a case where the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "first case") without becoming a big hit.
In the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state in which the second gaming state ends and is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 11 to 18.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table featuring that.

FIG. 78 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 78, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 48 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned display means 903 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48, and further, the above-mentioned display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous press operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous striking operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous striking function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be less effective. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 78 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is discharged. May be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Here, FIG. 79 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 79 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 79), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 80 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. " May be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data for realizing the present invention. It may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing the present invention, and a home video game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in the figure (c) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in the figure (d) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 3D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 101. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 81 to 101 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 81 to 101, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 81 to 81 to 101. In the description using FIG. 101, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 81 to 101 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is attached. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate 126 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A ball removal button 130 for ejecting the game ball stored in the ball storage plate 126 from the ball storage plate 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits light of the effect button 136. , A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store is provided. Further, although not shown in FIG. 81, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 81 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 84). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage dish 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to reach a predetermined state. Based on the fact that the granting condition is satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the granting condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 84) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 84) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 84) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 84). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 84) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 84). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 84), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 811 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 83A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 83, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side to be the player side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201 which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the game plate 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124.

FIG. 83B is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 are on the main control lamp board 254. , The special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, and the round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, they are each composed of two upper and lower stages, for a total of eight LEDs.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is supposed to be. Further, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the blade member 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time, while the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened. .. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 83A is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in a rollable area of the game ball. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the warp outlet 242b to the stage 244. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a stage in which the game ball passing through the warp device 242 shows movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, so that the residence time of the game ball becomes long.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first effect movable body 7 is arranged supported by the main body 104. The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light emitting portion 71 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a second effect movable body 8 imitating a person's right arm is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm portion 81 and a forearm portion 82, and has an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion at the shoulder position and a forearm portion (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion at the elbow position. It includes a motor and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and stretches five fingers. The second effect movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a movable area by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative upper right cover 205, and the normal drawing start opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out and the entered game balls are ejected. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Further, in the present embodiment, one first special drawing start port 230 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special drawing start port 230. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 82 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are stored as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Further, in the present embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124, and the attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with the first special drawing start port of the electric chew type. Hereinafter, the first special figure start port 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure start of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23. The mouth may be referred to as the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in a state of advancing, and is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize, and in a state of retreating, a state in which a prize is easily won. In the following description, the advancement of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closing, and the retracting may be referred to as opening. Further, a light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color light is also arranged in the attacker unit 23.

Further, in addition to the first special figure starting port (variable) 231, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special drawing starting port 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and a second variable winning opening 235. These variable winning openings may be referred to as "attackers". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in the advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in the retracted state, the winning is easy. In the following description, when the first door member 2341 is advanced, it may be referred to as closing, and when it is retracting, it may be referred to as opening. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, in the advanced state, it is in a state where it is easy to win while forming a ball passage, and it retreats. If you do, it will be difficult to win a prize. In the following description, the advancement of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as opening, and the retracting of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as closing.

The first special drawing start port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center shown in FIG. 83 (a) has a configuration in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when hitting to the right due to its arrangement. .. On the other hand, in the central portion of the above-mentioned stage 244, there is a special route 244a that makes it easy for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. It is also possible to aim at the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 from the left side without going through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting port where a ball can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Further, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When a ball enters the general winning opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a winning ball. Discharge to the ball storage dish 126. The ball that has entered the general winning opening is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged in the game area 124, and any winning opening or start is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the ball storage dish 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer. And, it is launched into the game area 124 through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and wins a prize at various winning openings or starting openings. The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize at the start port or only by passing through the start port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharging ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 84. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a ball storage tray full tank sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the second special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). , General figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) Drive circuit 330 and a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, or a first variable prize as a special electric accessory. It is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, 231 and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, and the like. There is. Further, the game table frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, and the like.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a first effect movable body 7 on the upper side shown in FIG. 83 (a), and a second on the right side. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of various effect devices such as the effect movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit based on detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of various effect devices and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. VDP (VDP) that reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 207. It is equipped with a video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the amount, the control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage dish 126 to the launching device 110. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

On condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the starting ports 230 and 231 of the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, and the ball is inserted at the starting port 232 of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. "Variable display" (special figure variable game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure performs the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

FIG. 85A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 85A, four types of special figures, “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D”, are shown. In FIG. 85A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 1. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure changes between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). ) Will rise to 100/100 (that is, it will always be a hit). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is reduced. This is because there may be a disadvantage. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either of the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is increased, and the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the non-electric state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (normal low probability state). On the other hand, if a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the special figure 1, a small hit symbol (“special figure C”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "Special Figure C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set. In the small hit game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game Is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 2 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 1, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one of the special maps becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 85B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 85 (b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure e". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, a control state. Is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, The control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. It should be noted that a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening). Further, in the special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Further, also in the special figure 2, a small hit symbol (“special figure d”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol is stopped. Here, when compared with the small hit symbol of Special Figure 1 (“Special Figure C”), the small hit in Special Figure 1 (special figure 1) is compared with the case of small hit in Special Figure 2 (“Special Figure d” is stopped and displayed). When "Fig. C" is stopped and displayed), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, the game is such that the small hit of the special figure 2 does not give the ball, but the small hit of the special figure 1 gives the ball. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set.

Further, also in Special Figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 85 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 start port. (Variable) On condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the (variable) 231 or the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. , "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> .... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the 1st special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the 2nd special figure display device 214 confirms that the 6R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit, there are 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is "special figure c"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol D" or "special symbol e", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 85 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 85 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black-painted portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored one set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 86 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 82 is operated by a store clerk or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 82 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 84 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the general winning opening, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing start opening (fixed) 230, and the first special drawing starting opening (variable). ) 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or the normal figure start port 228 is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning opening, these variable winning openings 234, 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry into the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first 1 It is determined that there is a prize in the special figure start port (fixed) 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent prize in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this prize opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 84 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 alternately blink on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 85 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 85 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this solenoid hit flag is on, in the solenoid state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the solenoid stop time changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 A solenoid for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) is set in the setting area while the normal drawing is in operation and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 provided in the 23. At the same time as outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is turned on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal map probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 85 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off. In case, special figure b, 6R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure a, small hit flag is on, special figure d, loss. When the flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode of the special figure e, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probable change big hit symbol (special figure e), a 6R probable change big hit symbol (special figure b), a 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). Figure d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) are confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variable display of the special figure 2, but the variable display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Will be done. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 to the stop display of the symbol of the special figure 1. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing drive the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234) (shown in FIG. 84). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (retracted state) is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the opening period is output to the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advanced state) is output to the timer for opening / closing the opening / closing drive of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84). At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (the short and short probability of the normal map). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew) than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of the first variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the big hit game, and the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 until the game ball enters. There is a problem that many game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit (number of balls out) increases and the gambling property increases, and this is to solve this problem. Is. In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

The example of the big hit game using the first variable winning opening 234 has been described above, but the same applies to the small hit game using the second variable winning opening 235.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is not operating, and neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor the big hit game of special figure 2 is performed. And, on the condition that the number of the reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are used. Is executed. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the game is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured to be able to start a variable game with or without it (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231. And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probable change state becomes a big hit, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 is notified, or once the special figure 2 is started. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, the lottery is based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, by performing the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, a plurality of special figures are configured to be changed at the same time. It is not limited to the above, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to display an effect according to the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, large winning opening opening Command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the form, when the special symbol change start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 has won a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. It includes whether or not there is a prize in the mouth 232, whether or not there is a prize in the first variable winning mouth 234, whether or not there is a prize in the second variable winning mouth 235, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the winning effect period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the effect standby period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage dish full tank error. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is detected, a device indicating whether or not a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is present in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set the information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, or via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 86 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the normal figure-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Here, FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 88 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for determining a special figure.

The table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is shown in FIG. 88 (a), and is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used when determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 88 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about 1/199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about 1/192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about 1/180).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about 1/174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about 1/145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about 1/93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 is 6580/65536. A small hit that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Will be done. It should be noted that the small hit may be prevented from occurring in the special figure 1 and the small hit (the small hit opened 12 times and the small hit opened once) may be generated only in the special figure 2. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but they are regarded as almost the same probability. It is set to be probable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is that a big hit will occur, but when the game shifts to a probable change state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to give different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is that the variable display time of the special figure 2 is mentioned. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, the fluctuation time of 1 to 5 seconds. In the special figure high probability state, when hitting to the right, it is easy for a large number of game balls to enter the second special figure start opening 232, and a large number of fluctuation displays of the special figure 2 can be performed, and as a result. , The mechanism is such that the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, so that it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where there are four (full tanks) of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 2, the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 is one time of the special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the fluctuation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds in the case of a miss and a small hit, but the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 88C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a big hit, either "special figure A" or "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short opening 12 times at the maximum.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is short-opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 89A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 89A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the upper first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 83 (a) or the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side in the effect data read in step S309, there is a command to the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side. This command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 89B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 89 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 90A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 90 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 207) is stored in the ROM (. Processing such as reading from (not shown) is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 90B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 90C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 90D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Here, FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 91 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234 and winning a prize. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure start opening (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the first. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235 and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing starting port (fixed) 230, the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 and the second special drawing starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning slot.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 91 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was not opened in the big hit game, but was opened only in the small hit game, but a big hit opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was prepared. You may. For example, as the jackpot of the special figure 2, instead of the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234, a 3R jackpot (substantially 1R jackpot) opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235, a 6R jackpot, or the like may be prepared. ..

Further, although the small hits are prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hits may be provided only for the special figure 2. That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided with a small hit that repeats a short opening a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that is short-opened only once. .. By doing so, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is not in the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state. If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult-to-win state, most of the right-handed game balls enter the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small hit game is higher than the winning probability of the big hit game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 has a maximum number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small hit that repeats short opening, and you can expect to earn a ball in this small hit game.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 will be described.

FIG. 92 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 81.

FIG. 92 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 99).

Further, FIG. 92 shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is a white background with no pattern, but the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is a white background and there is no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The same applies to the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above up to the example shown in FIG. 99.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 92 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this normal gaming state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 99). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1, as well as the number of hold icons of special figure 1, and is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 92A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81. The hold icons shown in FIG. 93 are all round, but may be transformed from this round shape, for example, may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 93 (a) shows the hold icon of the display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expectation of a big hit in the first place.

FIG. 93B shows the hold icon of the display mode B. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, green is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

FIG. 93 (c) shows the hold icon of the display mode C. The display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 93 (d) shows the hold icon of the display mode D. The display mode D is a display mode composed of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. In the drawing, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81. That is, when looking at this second display mode, it is a display mode in which many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and it can be said that the display mode is recognizable by the pachinko machine manufacturer. In other words, it is a well-known display mode for use by certain pachinko machine manufacturers. Further, it can be said that it is a display mode peculiar to the pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is referred to as a maker pattern. There are multiple maker patterns such as animal patterns, animal patterns, plant patterns such as flowers and fruits, fireworks patterns, striped patterns (striped patterns), plaid patterns (lattice patterns), and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of the above are regularly (or irregularly) arranged can be mentioned. Further, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. In some cases, one specific color symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case, it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, it may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), and further, it may be a model (model pattern) instead of a maker.

FIG. 93 (e) shows the hold icon of the display mode E. The display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) constituting the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing the display color one by one. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed by dividing the display area at one time. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, as the display mode F, a display mode that is unpatterned and golden and suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70% may be further prepared.

The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the lower the frequency of appearance of the five display modes described above, but the frequency of appearance is lower in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) than in the display mode E (rainbow color). May be good. That is, the hold icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear at the lowest frequency.

Further, the five display modes shown in FIG. 93 are also used for the variable icon in which the hold icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable icon.

Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 provided directly below the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon.

At the right end of FIG. 93, a light emitting mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is shown. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing the display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode) representing the display mode E (rainbow-colored display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed at once by dividing the light emitting region. These light emission modes also suggest the same jackpot expectations as the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the colors of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the emission color of the effect lamp 206 are different because the display medium is different. Both colors are also described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 does not have a light emitting mode indicating the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the manufacturer pattern. There is no.

As the light emitting mode E, a golden light emitting mode, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70%, may be further prepared.

Further, in other display (for example, background display of the title) on the decorative pattern display device 208, the display mode may be used as shown in FIG. 93. In other displays, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the display mode, and the display mode in the other display may be irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, a kimono of a lord) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 93 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). Also in the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the display mode, or may be irrelevant to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 84) can also emit light in a light emitting mode representing other display modes except the second display mode. For example, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7 and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 can also emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. As for the rainbow color, in addition to the case where the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed by dividing the emission region at one time, the emission color is continuously changed by one color, and each of the seven colors constituting the rainbow is used. It may be displayed as a light emission. Such rainbow-colored change light emission may be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206. The light emitting mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may also suggest the same jackpot expectation as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the light emission mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may indicate the jackpot expectation. It may be a light emitting mode unrelated to.

Further, it is also used as the color of the decorative body except for the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the display mode E (rainbow color).

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8.

In the second effect movable body 8 that imitates the right arm of a person, four fingers excluding the fifth finger (pinkie) are decorative bodies. All of these four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 94 (a) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 94 (a), the decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 94 (b) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 94 (b), the decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 94 (c) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 94 (c), the decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 94 (d) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 94 (d), the decoration D (gold) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. That is, it is painted in gold.

In the second effect movable body 8, nothing is decorated on the palm side of the fifth finger (pinkie) 825.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different in hue because the display medium is different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. I will explain it as if it were.

Further, each decoration applied to the second effect movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the hold icon and the variable icon. Therefore, it is suggested that when the 4th finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 5%, and when the 3rd finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%. It is suggested that there is, and it is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and the expectation of the jackpot when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended. Is suggested to be 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorative body, the decorative body of the maker pattern and the rainbow-colored decorative body are not provided. Therefore, in the notice by the decorative body, the high probability notice that the big hit expectation degree is 75% or more is not given.

As with the hold icon and the variable icon, the expected degree of the jackpot is suggested, but the value of the expected degree may be different from the value of the hold icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to FIG. 92 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. 1A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, they are not actually displayed. The hold icon is also shown with a dotted line.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 0, and there is no hold of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 92 is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the variation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in FIG. 92, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 remains the stop display of “x”. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure on which the display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is a normal gaming state or an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed as described above. , As shown in FIG. 92A, when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 92A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 92 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 92 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, in response to the increase in the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the number of star-shaped effect lamps 206 that have been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) has increased. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) showing the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the hold. That is, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a light emitting mode having the same or similar color as the red color of the hold icon h12. The timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12 and the timing of changing the star-shaped effect lamp 206 to the light emission mode C may be the same, or the hold icon h12 may be earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 99). In the figure, the size of the hold icon h12 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the hold icon h12 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color may be given to the player more strongly. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 92 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 92 (g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 still continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 92 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 92 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 92 (i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 92 to 97, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. It may be (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 99). The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 92 (j), it has developed into a super reach. The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (j). The display of the reach title LT1 here is described as "jii reach" in black characters on a green background display. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same color as or similar to green, which suggests the expectation of a big hit with a hold icon or a decorative body, but as shown in FIG. 100, the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach" As the background color, a color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and this green color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

An old man's character appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (k), and then an animation of the old man's character is displayed. Following the animation display of the grandfather character, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (l) displays the grandfather character that appears to be depressed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". In FIG. 92 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, maintains the off state until the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but until it develops into super reach (FIG. 92 (j)). (Until the timing) The light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner starts to fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 92 (l)). Further, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative symbol is performed (until the timing of FIG. 92 (m)).

The example shown in FIG. 92 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is related to the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

FIG. 95 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the reach title are related.

FIG. 95 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 95 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode. It is displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 95 (a) is lit in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 95 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. When the hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the variable icon h0 changes, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in aspect D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) usually functions as a notice. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the display start timing (timing of change in display mode) of the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) has a light emitting mode C (red) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The light emission mode) has changed. That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in a light emitting mode having the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). .. More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. The effect lamp 206 may be changed to a light emitting mode (light emitting mode D (rainbow color)) suggesting a higher expectation level than the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or the hold icon. The color may be emitted in a color not used in the or variable icon, or the color used in the hold icon or the variable icon may be emitted in a different emission mode (for example, red). Flashing light, etc.). Further, the timing of the display start of the variable icon h0 and the timing of the change of the effect lamp 206 may be simultaneous, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 99). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent as the hold icon, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variable icon h0 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color, and then the variable icon. By looking at the maker pattern of h0, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. Further, in the effect lamp 206, by not emitting light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (maker pattern), the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern are improved. Can be enhanced.

In FIG. 95 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 95 (d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 95 (d), the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 95 (e), it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (e). The display of the reach title LT2 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Swordsman Reach". That is, the same display mode as that used as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the first effect movable body 7 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangular light emitting unit 71 arranged in the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a light emitting mode D (rainbow color light emitting mode) representing a rainbow color. That is, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and is one color from the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode is similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (FIG. 97 (j) described later). The same applies to the reach title LT3 in.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the background color of the reach title LT2 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of "maker pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is " It is "100%". That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color", and the expected degree of "white" jackpot. The expectation of the jackpot of "20%" and "red" is "45%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100%". That is, unlike the type of background color of the reach title LT2, the "maker pattern" is not set for the type of emission color of the light emitting unit 71. The background color of the reach title LT2 and the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related (same color) to each other. However, even in that case, the "maker pattern" is not set as the emission color of the light emitting unit 71, and the light is emitted in another color (for example, "golden lighting" or "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" instead of the "maker pattern". Set "blinking red").

In the state shown in FIG. 95 (e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap with the background display in the reach title LT2, but the position where the first effect movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's pattern, it will only descend to a position that does not overlap the background display. Further, not only the background display but also the hold icon and the variable icon of the maker pattern are configured so that the effect movable body is not covered.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be a maker pattern, but the light emitting unit 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light emitting mode representing the maker pattern, and in addition, It may not be possible to turn on the light even in the light emitting mode expressing the rainbow color. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may be left off or may emit light in a light emitting mode representing red.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (f), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. This animation continues until FIG. 95 (i). In FIG. 95 (i), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" Is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 95 (j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on a sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect.

FIG. 96 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 96A is in a state of being turned off. In addition, FIG. 96 also displays a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port (fixed) 230. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 96A is in a state where nothing is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 96A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 96 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the hold icon is finished. The hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, remains the default display mode in the variable icon display area 280 in this example, the variable icon h0. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize. The display of the zone title ZT is written in red letters on an elliptical blue plain background as "training zone". In this zone title ZT, the hold icon or decoration is described as "training zone" in the same or similar color as red, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, this red color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, it is always described as "training zone" in red letters, and is not described as "training zone" in other colors. Neither the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 92 (j) nor the character color of this zone title ZT suggests the expectation of a big hit, but the character color indicates the expectation of a big hit. It may be suggested. On the other hand, the maker pattern only suggests the expectation of a big hit, and may not suggest the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the manufacturer pattern may be used for displaying various settings that can be changed by the player on the game table (for example, the tone from the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.), the number of games played, and the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot. do not have. When the manufacturer pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is always suggested, and a big hit can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer with a high expectation is used when the expectation of the jackpot is not suggested, the player misunderstands that the expectation of the jackpot is high and expects it excessively. If it does not suggest, by avoiding the use of a manufacturer with high expectations, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectations for big hits are high, and it will excessively fuel expectations. It can be reduced.

In FIG. 96 (b) in which the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the animation of the zone effect is started to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in FIG. 100 (c), the color of this lord's kimono is selected from "white", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and is a big hit of "white". Expectation is "20%", "green" jackpot expectation is "30%", "red" jackpot expectation is "45%", "rainbow color" jackpot expectation is "100%" It has become. In addition, it is not displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 96 (i). The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 96 (b) is changed from 2 to 1, and "-" is displayed in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Has started blinking.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. The background display of this wilderness continues until FIG. 96 (i). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c can be visually recognized. .. Further, in FIG. 96 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second hold icon, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by a sixteenth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the green (display mode B) hold icon h12. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the hold represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped production lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 96 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Also, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped production lamp 206 is still off.

In FIG. 96 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been turned off, responds to the start of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that has been displayed so far. , The light emission according to the light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing the green color (display mode B) is started. That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in the same or similar color as the green color of the variable icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start light emission until the fluctuation subject to the notice is started. The timing of the display start of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing of the start of light emission by the light emitting mode B of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 may be the same, and the variable icon h0 is earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 96 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in this example, it does not develop into super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (i), “decoration 4-decoration”. The combination of the missing decorative symbols of "3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing at which the variation icon h0 is hidden may be simultaneous, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. Further, the effect lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variation icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the display of the animation of the zone effect described above, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous notice is changed again, the lord is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the kimono of the lord suggests the expectation of a big hit. You may. Even in this case, it should not be displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". That is, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the "manufacturer pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" in the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern can be enhanced. .. In addition, "pseudo continuous notice" means a notice that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. It is a notice that the variable display and the temporary stop display may be performed multiple times.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related and further super reach is performed.

FIG. 97 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 97 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 97A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 97 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 97 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 92, in this example as well, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) has a display mode of the hold icon h12 indicating the increased hold. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 97 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). When the hold icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the hold icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (maker pattern). ) Is displayed. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has emitted light in the red light emitting mode (light emitting mode C) maintains the light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode does not change even if the display mode of the hold icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the hold icon, does not change its light emitting mode, but when viewed closely, the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which has the lowest appearance frequency, is displayed, and the player who discovered this is displayed. May greatly improve the interest of the game. In addition, in response to the change of the hold icon h11 to the display mode D (maker pattern), the effect lamp 206 also has a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode D (maker pattern) (for example, light emission mode F (gold color). It may change to the light emitting mode)).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 97 (g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (g), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the hold icon h11 which was the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the display mode changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow color). , The variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal notice for confirming the jackpot. Even in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon here, the effect sound (change sound) represented by the half note is output from the speaker 120. Further, in response to the appearance of the variation icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the light emission mode C so far has a light emission mode D representing the rainbow color (display mode E). It changes to (rainbow-colored light emission mode). That is, the light emission with the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0 is started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color), but the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). It does not change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E (display mode E (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) except display mode D (manufacturer pattern). It may be changed to rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the above other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (maker pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 97 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 97 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 97 (i), the variable icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). As described above, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 is hidden, only when the effect lamp 206 emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode) in which the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or may be turned off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the mode of light emission. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 97 (j), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color). Further, the reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (j). The display of the reach title LT3 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Den reach". As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the background color of the reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of the manufacturer pattern is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100". % ”. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT3. Further, the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode), which is the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206, is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (k) displays an animation of the character of the palace, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (l) subsequently displays the character of the palace that looks proud. ing. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 97 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the effect lamp 206, which continued to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even when the super reach (rainbow color) was started, emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even during the super reach. Is continued, and even if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big hit game start effect is started. The effect lamp 206 may be turned off at the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212.

FIG. 98 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8 are related.

FIG. 98 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 98, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is not shown, and instead, a second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. As for the effect lamp, as described above, the light emitting mode may be changed according to the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon to emit light. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain off or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in FIG. 98 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is in the default display mode. It is displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 (a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 located at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side, and is located at a position avoiding the display screen, whether it is the upper arm portion 81 or the forearm portion 82. It is facing down.

In FIG. 98 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even if it changes to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 (b) remains positioned at the initial position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the button effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (c) displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the lord. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 98 (d), the valid period is reduced, and in the figure (e), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, the success / failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 98 (f), the variable icon changed from the default display mode to the display mode C (red). h0 is displayed. That is, the button production has been successful, and the normal notice has started. A production sound (change sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit light in a red light emitting mode. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button production, a notice of entering the reach state may be notified if it succeeds.

As shown in FIG. 98 (f), even if the success / failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still in the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 98 (g). When the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second effect movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm portion 81 starts to rotate upward, and the forearm portion 82 also starts to rotate upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 starts to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side. In the following FIG. 98 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. As a result, the variable icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second effect movable body 8 further rotates upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 98 (i), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (i). The display of the reach title LT4 here is written in black letters on a red background display as "Den reach". Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 (i), the forearm portion 82 vibrates while the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, the second finger (index finger) 822 is further extended, and the decoration C (red) is formed. Is visible. This decoration C is a display mode showing red, and is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the expectation of a big hit. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but may be different display modes.

Further, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a slightly different hue from the display mode C (red), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode is similar to the display mode C (red).

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (j), and the second effect in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm 82 is lifted high. The movable body 8 has started a return operation toward the initial position. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (k), the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to the initial position. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 98 (l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 operates, and the differences from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98 will be mainly described. ..

FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (e) are the same as those from FIG. 98 (a) to FIG. 98 (e), and the button effect is executed.

Also in FIG. 99 (f), the button effect was successful, and the variable icon h0 changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. The button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern, but may emit light in a red light emitting mode.

In the following FIG. 99 (g), as in FIG. 98 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second effect movable body 8 has started the operation. For example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may still remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. You may. Further, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed as compared with the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 98 (g). The operation effect of 8 may be easily performed. That is, it is preferable that the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is for the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 to be performed. When the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 may be performed without fail.

In FIG. 99 (h), as in FIG. 98 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. It has become. Further, as in FIG. 98 (h), the forearm portion 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is greatly lifted.

In FIG. 99 (i), it has evolved into a super reach (Den reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black letters on the background display of the maker pattern as "Den reach". Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 99 (j), the forearm portion 82 vibrates in a state where the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, similarly to the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98 (j). Further, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C becomes visible, but the decoration C has a display mode D (manufacturer pattern) which is a display mode showing red and is a display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. Is a different form of decoration. That is, the decoration is one step lower in terms of the expectation of a big hit. The first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 94 (e)) having a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, it is lower than the jackpot expectation (75%) suggested by the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). Since the player can see the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) having the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5. The feeling is sufficiently hot, and the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 may be able to calm the player's feelings a little.

The background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the maker pattern, and for example, the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from the display mode D (maker pattern) which is the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the display mode is similar to the display mode D (maker pattern).

Subsequent FIGS. 99 (i) to (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 98 (i) to (l), and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is the same. Stop is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

FIG. 100A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

In the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 90A, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 100A. At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach", and this background color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Den Reach" suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 504 is the first sub-control unit 400. Determine the background color based on the command received from. Both the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Den Reach" include the maker pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common one is used as the relationship between the background color and the jackpot expectation degree, but different ones may be used.

FIG. 100B is a diagram showing an emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 89 (a), the CPU 0404 of the first sub control unit 400 uses the emission color determination table shown in FIG. 100 (b) to emit light in the first effect movable body 7. The emission color of 71 is determined. The emission color of the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 404 determines the emission color based on the command received from the main control unit 300. The emission colors are white, red, and rainbow colors, and the emission colors of the manufacturer's pattern are not prepared. Further, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red emission color and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red background color of the reach title described above are different in magnitude of expectation. Further, the magnitude of the expectation is different from the jackpot expectation suggested by the red display mode in the hold icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 93.

FIG. 100 (c) is a diagram showing a kimono color determination table of the lord stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table is a table for determining the color of the kimono of the lord displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone effect described with reference to FIG. 96. Similar to the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 is the kimono of the lord based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 90 (a). Determine the color of. At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 100 (c) is used. As described above, since the maker pattern is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not prepared as the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In the above description, the effect sounds such as the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon and the change sound of the display mode are output from the speaker 120, but the shortest 16th note corresponds to the display mode B (green). The production sound is output (FIG. 96 (c)), and the short production sound of the eighth note is output corresponding to the display mode C (red) (FIG. 92 (c), FIG. 97 (c), FIG. 98 (Fig. 98). f)), a long production sound of quarter notes is output corresponding to the display mode D (maker pattern) (FIG. 95 (b), FIG. 97 (e), FIG. 99 (f)), display mode E ( The longest production sound of the half note was output corresponding to (rainbow color) (Fig. 97 (g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the output time of the production sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, the display mode in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively high (display mode D and the display mode E higher than 50%) and the display in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively low were displayed. The effect sound may be different depending on the mode (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, a special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the change sound to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) are output, and the specific effect sound different from that of the other display modes is output. You may try to do it. The specific production sound here may be a production sound related to the display mode D (maker pattern) or a production sound representing the display mode D (maker pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, the specific production sound may be a production sound. , The bark of the animal with the animal pattern may be output as a specific production sound.

Further, in the above description, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 92 (j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 96 (b) do not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and conversely. , The background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 95 (e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 97 (j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 98 (i), and the background display of the reach title LT 4 shown in FIG. 99 (i). The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, the display mode of the characters in the title may indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and in this case, the characters of the title will be displayed in different display modes according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. .. On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title text and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display text, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice text, background display, and balloon line display are the hold icon and the display mode. The display mode (color or pattern) of the variable icon may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration production.

Further, during the big hit game, the light emitting means (effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit unless the symbol variation is displayed. Even during the big hit game, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the maker pattern (display mode D).

Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability state) than in the first gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability state). Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the setting operation of the player, but if the specification can be changed in the custom mode, the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode)). )) In the second mode (for example, custom mode), the appearance frequency of the manufacturer pattern may be higher.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is hit right in a low probability state of the special figure, it takes a long time until the result of the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. A maker pattern may appear in a special figure high probability state where a small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in the 1-type and 2-type mixer that wins a V prize via a small hit, the manufacturer pattern does not appear in the variable production in which the small hit is won in the normal game state, and the small hit is won in the short-time game state. In the variable production, there is a possibility that the maker pattern may appear.

Further, although the maker pattern has the lowest appearance frequency, the appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the frequency of appearance of the maker pattern may be lower than the frequency of appearance of red but higher than the frequency of appearance of rainbow color. As described above, the frequency of appearance may be changeable depending on the setting operation of the player.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, as a display means instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. You may. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light incident from the side toward the front, and the light emitting mode can be switched depending on the color of the incident light. It is possible to display a picture. Even when the light guide plate is used instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed.

Further, in the explanations from FIGS. 92 to 99, the expectation of the big hit may be expressed (may not be expressed), white, green, red, gold, rainbow color, and the manufacturer's pattern that always expresses the expectation of the big hit. Although it is described using blue, which does not represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, other colors and patterns may be used respectively.

Further, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is changed, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is prevented from changing from the default display mode, while the display mode E (rainbow color) is changed from the default display mode. It may be changed, and in this case, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may be changed. And it may be possible to change from the display mode B (green). On the contrary, the default display mode may not change to the display mode E (rainbow color), while the default display mode may change to the display mode D (maker pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). May be possible. Further, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As described above, various effects using colors have been described, but predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (predetermined colors displayed by the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the zone title). ), Light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R. , Upper frame lamp 122U, game table frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.), predetermined color to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (Den-sama's kimono), and the second effect movable body. Strictly speaking, the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body included in 8 has a different hue in each display because the display medium and the effect are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine that the color is a "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can be said that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors".

FIG. 101 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 101), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 101) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two bets are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed to draw a lottery as to which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1043 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 is provided, and this effect button 1091 is also a button lamp (not shown). It emits light.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, and the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player side), and the effect movable body 1058 also appears on the right side thereof. A light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color is arranged in the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Further, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 101 also includes the decorative body described with reference to FIG. 94. It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various effect images and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, a sub liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057.

The liquid crystal display device 1057 and / and the sub-liquid crystal display device display display modes A to E in a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, and the like. Used. That is, the display of the maker pattern of the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestion image suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state and the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition. Further, the side lamp 1044, the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, the button lamp (not shown) for causing the effect button 1091 to emit light, and the like can emit light in the light emitting modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. 81. The sphere storage dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball is executed by credit. May be.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting "expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, expectation of big hit, expectation of transition to AT state, expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.]" , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] and display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 207, liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [For example, for a game board such as an effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in an attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. Lamp 442 (see FIG. 84), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138 and other game table frame lamps 452 (see FIG. 84) shown in FIG. A light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the side lamp 1044, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, a button lamp (not shown) that causes the effect button 1091 to emit light, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 100 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 93 (b), and FIG. 93 ( c), the display mode of red shown in FIG. 100 (a), etc.] can be displayed.
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 93 (d) and 100 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The light emitting means is a first light emitting mode showing the first display mode [for example, a white light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 100 (b), and a green light emitting mode shown in FIG. 93 (b). It may emit light in the mode, the red light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 93 (c), 100 (b), etc.].
The light emitting means may not emit light in the second light emitting mode [for example, a light emitting mode having green and yellow polka dots on a white background] representing the second display mode.
The gaming table is characterized by [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided in an accessory such as a movable means.

Further, even if the first light emitting mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode in which a relationship with the second display mode is generally recognized.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

again,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 93 (e) and 100 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The light emitting means may emit light in a third light emitting mode [for example, a rainbow-colored light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 93 (e) and 100 (b)] representing the third display mode. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the first display mode.
The second light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the second display mode.
The third light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the first display mode, and the second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the second display mode. The light emitting mode may be a light emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first light emitting mode and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the light emitting means and the display means, the first light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. It can be said that the light emitting mode is the same as the display mode, and the third light emitting mode can be said to be the same light emitting mode as the third display mode.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, yellow and green].
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, seven colors constituting the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode [for example, a maker pattern or a maker color] that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting "expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, expectation of big hit, expectation of transition to AT state, expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.]" , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] on display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83, sub liquid crystal display device 207, FIG. 101. Liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.]
Movable means in which the player side is a movable area rather than the display means [for example, the first effect movable body 7 and the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 83, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. Body 1058] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 100 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 93 (b), and FIG. 93 ( c), the display mode in red shown in FIG. 100 (a)].
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 93 (d) and 100 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The movable means is the first decoration according to the display mode showing the first display mode [for example, the white decoration shown in FIG. 94 (a), the green decoration shown in FIG. 94 (b), or FIG. 94 (c). ) Shown in red decoration]
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (maker pattern) on a white background] [for example, FIG. 94. reference],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced. Further, since the movable means in which the player side is the movable area rather than the display means does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared, which is expected. It is possible to reduce the excessive agitation of the feeling.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the movable means may be an effect movable means (role).

Further, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the movable means is not provided with a decoration generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or a pattern. That is, it may be a portion where the color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a portion for displaying a color or a pattern (such as a liquid crystal display device or a light emitting diode), or may be a portion capable of displaying in a different color or pattern.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

again,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 93 (e) and 100 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, a rainbow-colored decoration] according to the display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 94].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, a second finger (index finger) 822] on which the display according to the display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means is provided with the movable means. Can take a state in which the first part is invisible to the player and a state in which the first part is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. It may not be provided with the second part where the display according to the display mode is displayed. Further, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion in which the display according to the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 94).

again,
"The first decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the first display mode.
The second decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the second display mode.
The game table is characterized in that the third decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the third display mode. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the first display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to the display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that the display mode is the same as that of.

Further, the second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.

again,
"The movable means displays the suggestion image of the second display mode rather than [for example, FIG. 98 (g)] when the suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed on the display means. If this is the case, [for example, FIG. 99 (g)] is easier to move.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, and the like. And various examples may be applied. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 126, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 102 to 126 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 102 to 126, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 102 to 102 to FIG. In the description using FIG. 126, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 102 to 126 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 104) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 for performing the above, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 102, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 104.

FIG. 103 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 102 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 105). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to give a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 105) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 105) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 105) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 105). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 105) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 105). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 105), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 111 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 104 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the like are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. , And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL are also arranged. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal drawing is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in a time-saving gaming state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a big hit game state or a short-time game state and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The high-probability middle lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232. , A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls. When the ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and it is assumed that the general winning opening 226b has won a prize, and the payout device 152 is driven to obtain a predetermined number (not shown). For example, one) ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal starting opening 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special drawing start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and closes the blade member 232a. Since it is impossible to enter the ball inside, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the normal map variation game is won and the normal map display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol. 2 Special figure When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally configured in the entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V pass switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward so that the game ball can pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passage switch VC, and when the V shutter VS is retracted (corresponding to the open state), the game ball is V. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 and has passed through a ball detection sensor (not shown) rolls to the V shutter VS after being guided to the front side, and may or may not pass through the V-pass switch VC. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V-passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In the present embodiment, the V shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V shutter VS is opened (backward) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V prize can be won, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and if the V prize cannot be won, the control state is the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. It remains. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding a ball or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and is used as a winning opening (general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) or starting. Win a prize at the mouth (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), without winning any prize opening or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228. Reach 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, these effect devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 105. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, as an ordinary electric accessory. No. 2 special figure The various solenoids 332 including the driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the starting port 232, the door member 234a for the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, the driving means for driving the V shutter VS, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the second special figure.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 4, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 106 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 106 (a), three types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure c", are shown. In FIG. 106 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special diagram a” and “special diagram b”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of special diagram 1. "Special figure a" is a 3 round (R) probability change jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol that has no chance of acquiring probability variation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the probability variation acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS opens (retracts) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS when the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game. It will be possible. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V prize is won), the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the shifted special figure high probability state shifts to the jackpot game. It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In the present embodiment, if the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time to maintain the open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a big hit scheduled (the same applies to "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS. Nothing is done (V prize cannot be won), and the control state remains the special low probability state after the big hit game is completed. As described above, it was necessary to win a V prize for the transition to the special high-probability state, but the transition to the normal high-probability state is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. That is, if a big hit is made, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and in the shifted normal figure high probability state, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure is the special figure a after the big hit game ends. For example, it is maintained 120 times, and in the case of special figure b, it is maintained for 50 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special symbol c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 1.

FIG. 106 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 106 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D". Figure B "). "Special figure A" is a 10R probability change jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired, and "special figure B" is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired. That is, if the special figure A wins a V prize in the 10th round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure A waits after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the symbol variation display of is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins a V prize in the second round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure symbol after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the variation display is performed 120 times here as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 2. "Special figure C" is the same general lost symbol as "special figure c", but "special figure D" is a special symbol called a time-saving symbol, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the jackpot symbol to be stopped is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game for a specific period, whether or not the "sudden time reduction" is won is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden time reduction" is won, the second special figure is displayed. The "time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game shifts to the high probability state of the normal figure after the end of the big hit game. The high-probability state of the normal figure is called a time-saving game state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving game state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a high probability state in the normal figure. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-time saving game state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the time saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving gaming state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time saving game state", it shall be excluded during the big hit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase of the electric chew opening number are performed, but at least one of these is performed. If this is done, the player's advantage will be high, and the game may be in a short-time game state. In this case, in each of the time-saving game states of a time reduction, b time reduction, and c time reduction, which will be described later, the execution is changed among the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. May be good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening are all performed. , Extension of the electric chew opening period, and increase in the number of times of electric chew opening may be executed. Alternatively, if either the electric chew opening period is extended or the number of times the electric chew is opened is increased, which increases the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the game may be in a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the special figure changes 120 times after the end of the subsequent big hit game. The time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the display is performed, and at the 121st time, the game shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state). Further, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (high probability state of the normal figure) is maintained until the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. At the second time, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal probability low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot symbol of all the special figures is set to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the game may remain in the non-time-saving gaming state without shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined time (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. Keep open for up to 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 234a in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

FIG. 106 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 11 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 11". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special figure b"), a combination of decorative symbols in which three decorative symbols of the same number are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration"). 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1 "," Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the probability variation jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure a", 10R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure A", 2R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure B"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol c" or "special symbol C", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that the winner is suddenly won in a short time, three "decoration 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 106 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of the normal map" (variable game of the normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 106 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for a special figure divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored one set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input resets and starts by reset interruption, and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 107 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 103 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 103 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 105 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234,226 and these starting openings 230,232,228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed, but the detection signals for the past three times are performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is used. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 105 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 106 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 106 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on. Is special figure B when the special figure A and 2R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 106 (b) is on, special figure C when the loss flag is on, and special figure when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. D The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram A), a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram B), a lost symbol (special symbol C), and a time saving symbol (special diagram D). Confirmation display of any one of the symbols is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds in the special figure A and 2 rounds in the special figure B), the V shutter is used for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the VS (a part of various solenoids 332), and the opening period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the V shutter opening time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be shown. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (excluding the first time, 9 rounds or 1 round) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). ) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

If the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time reduction number (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (the short and short probability of the normal map). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and many gaming balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 until the gaming balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit may increase and the gambling may increase, and this is to solve the problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a missed flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on. The special figure 1 is displayed so that the special figure a and the 3R jackpot flag B shown in FIG. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), and the lost symbol (special symbol c). Display.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, 10 seconds) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device. In order to set the player to wait for a period of time while displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is finished, information indicating the effect waiting period is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. If the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. In the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, the special figure variable game with high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game with low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Decide whether to make a big hit or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Further, even in the case of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit of the hold is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the (stop rotation) command, the values of various jackpot flags and missed flags are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning opening 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 107 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 109 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 109 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 4 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 109B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 109 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 110A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 110 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 110B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 110 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 110D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. Here, FIG. 111A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 111B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously activated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 111 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

Subsequently, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102 will be described, although there are some overlaps with those described so far.

FIG. 112A is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102, when the setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 107, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability becomes 1/320, and the special figure The jackpot probability with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/84. The larger the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, while the probability of winning a map with a low probability of a map is 1/100, the probability of winning a map with a high probability of a map is 99/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the special figure 1, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is equal (50% each), and in the special figure 2, the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B. Is 7: 3.

Further, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is opened only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the probability variation is attached, so that the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the special figure symbol variation display is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS is opened only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In both the special figure A and the special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the game state after the big hit game ends is the special figure high probability normal figure. It becomes a high-probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

After the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time reduction that starts after the big hit game is said to be a time reduction.

FIG. 112B is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting port 230. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure start port 228, the player hardly wins the normal figure variable game and should not make a right-handed hit. The ball should be fired towards the left area (should be left-handed). The normal state is a non-time saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the normal figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim at the normal figure start opening 228, in the game area It is recommended to launch the game ball toward the right area where the starting port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 112 (a), in Special Figure 1, the probability of obtaining a jackpot with probability variation (Special Figure a) is 50%, whereas in Special Figure 2, there is a probability variation. The probability of getting a big hit is 100%. Further, the number of times that the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game may be 50 times in the special figure 1, whereas it is always 120 times in the special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, the second special figure start opening 232 should be won and the big hit in the special figure 2 should be aimed at. .. Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side region (should hit right).

Further, in the case of a big hit game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right side area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided in the game area. Become. FIG. 112B shows that after the end of the big hit game, the time-saving game state may be maintained 120 times or 50 times.

Further, in FIG. 112 (b), when the special figure is not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving gaming state). That is, when the special figure is lost 950 times continuously, the time-saving gaming state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of the special figure loss being continued a predetermined time is called the play time, and this time reduction is called the b time reduction. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after the big hit, it can be shifted only once before the next big hit. Therefore, if the special figure loss of 950 times is continuous in the b time reduction game state, there is no new transition to the b time reduction game state, and the b time reduction game state so far is continued, and the special figure loss of 1100 times occurs. If it is continuous, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal state). It should be noted that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for shifting to the b time-saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the transition is made is called c time-saving. This time-saving symbol is a hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) (hereinafter, "special figure 2 remaining"). It may be referred to as "hold".) In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state, c time saving may be won. When the c time reduction is won, the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 104), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the "decoration 11" (time reduction decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 106 (c). ) Are displayed side by side and stopped. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the big hit game. The probability of winning suddenly is 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started after the big hit game ends, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time-saving game state when the 950 times special figure loss is continuously started are finished. In addition to the remaining hold, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started by suddenly winning in a short time will be won again in a sudden time reduction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol may be won even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 104). However, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols for shortening the time) shown in FIG. 106 (c) are not stopped and displayed side by side, and the disjointed eyes for notifying the loss are stopped and displayed. .. Then, in the present embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the b time short game state are prioritized over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the game is not changed to the time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, even if you hit right in a non-time saving game state, win a normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232 (electric chew), if you win in c time saving There is, and it shifts to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining hold but also a new special figure 2 hold may shift to the c time saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure variable game may not be won, or even if the normal figure variable game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be set. The opening pattern may be an extremely difficult (impossible) opening pattern to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the conditions for transitioning to the b-time-shortened gaming state are all satisfied by losing all in the c-time-shortened gaming state (becoming a special figure loss 950 times in a row), and the transition from the c-time-shortened gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is achieved. In some cases.

In this embodiment, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 even in the special figure high-probability normal-figure high-probability state, the special-figure low-probability normal-figure high-probability state, and the time-saving game state. However, the stop display may not be displayed. That is, the stop display may not be performed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving game state.

Subsequently, a specific game progress example in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102 will be described.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state shortly before the time-saving gaming state ends.

Each figure shown in FIG. 113 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving medium-time lamp TL, a right-handed display lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium-time lamp HL. Each lamp indicates the lighting state in black and the extinguishing state in white (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 123). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113A is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the hold number, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right portion, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right portion. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is off, it is displayed as "×". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 123.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. In FIG. 113 (a), since the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed, the variation icon disappears and is not displayed.

The control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 113A is a time-saving gaming state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 113A is on, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is off. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 112 (b), right-handed striking is recommended in the short-time gaming state, and the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 113 (a) is also lit. In addition, a right-handed first display RH1 for urging right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a). This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed. Even after shifting to the demo screen, the right-handed display lamp RL also continues to light.

As for the time-saving game state in FIG. 113 (a), the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) in which the big hit game is completed and started without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or the special figure loss of 950 times is continuous. This is the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that was started. The background of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a) is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, the state in FIG. 113 (a) is a state in which the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a), the character "remaining 4" is displayed as the time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) when the big hit game is completed and started, the time-saving game state where 950 times special figure loss is continuously started (b time-saving game state), and suddenly the time is shortened and started. The background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different depending on the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state), and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display may also be different. Further, the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display is also different. May be good.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2, and the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the hold icon on the right side) becomes the older hold icon.

In FIG. 113A, three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 2 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 113 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

In FIG. 113 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. That is, in this figure, the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 104) (not shown) is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the decoration is finished. The variable display of the design has also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h21, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC capable of selecting the music output from the speaker 120 is started on the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. To. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (b), and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 (not shown here). The music output will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 118 and after.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The music selection display MC disappears once each time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display is resumed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 113 (d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (e), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814".

In FIG. 113 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of holds is 0. Further, the hold icon h21 in the default display mode, which has been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 113 (f) is a red display mode different from the default display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is executed. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and next to it is a symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state. The characters "LAST" are displayed. Although the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears and is hidden, it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (f), the display of the right-handed second display RH2 that encourages right-handed display in a display mode different from that of the right-handed first display RH1 is started. In the right-handed second display RH2, it is written that the hold of the special figure 2 is stored aiming at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the arrow pointing to the right. This is a notification that it is recommended to acquire the special figure 2 remaining hold that suddenly leads to the short-time winning. At the stage of FIG. 113 (f), the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, but even if the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is full (4), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 also has started a right-handed notification (voice output of "right-handed and save the hold") for prompting the right-handed hit and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2. Further, the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted. Right-handed second display Whether it is right-handed notification by RH2 or right-handed notification from the speaker 120, execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started. .. The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that. Further, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that, or it may be the timing after the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 104) (see FIG. 104), which is not shown, is started and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. good.

In FIG. 113 (g), the second special figure start opening 232 has won two prizes, the hold of the special figure 2 has increased by two, and the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has been changed. The numerical value shown is 2, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 113 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the second special figure start opening 232 has one more prize, and the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3. The third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 113, although it entered the reach state in FIG. 113 (h), it did not develop into super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (i), the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed. .. When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 that have been displayed up to that point disappear and disappear. In addition, the right-handed notification that has been output from the speaker 120 up to that point has also ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be after the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed, or the timing before the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed. May be good. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has finally reached four, and the tank is full. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 shown in FIG. 113 (i) is 4, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 has a fourth hold icon. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (erased) in response to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display suggesting that four reservations of special figure 2 are accumulated (indication). For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that the product is ready, etc.) may be performed. In this case, if four reservations of special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be done (it should be erased).

In FIG. 113 (j), the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 113 (j) is turned off, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is also turned off. When the state of the time-saving game is changed to the non-time-saving game state, if the hold of the special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining hold is preferentially digested because it is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. As described above, the time-saving symbol shown in FIG. 106 (c) may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. .. During the period in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation in which the main character, the lord, is running is displayed, and the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed.

In addition, since the remaining hold of special figure 2 is exhausted during the pullback period, the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is in a time-saving gaming state in order to more clearly notify how many more holds are left in special figure 2. It is continuously displayed from. The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, or the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and the three reserved icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is also 3, and the display of “−” is started to blink in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 112 (b), left-handed striking is recommended in the non-time-saving gaming state, the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 113 (j) is also turned off, and the decoration shown in FIG. 113 (j) is turned off. The right-handed first display RH1 is also not displayed on the symbol display device 208. However, during the pullback period, the left-handed notification that prompts the left-handed is restricted even though the game is in a non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (j), even if the time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed notification is not executed during the pullback period. In FIG. 113 (k), the right-handed hitting so far is continued, and the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 124. The same applies when the player changes from right-handed to left-handed, but happens to be right-handed. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 provided in the right side region, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (FIG. 114 (m) etc.). In FIG. 113 (l), it was detected that the game ball passed through the normal drawing start opening 228, but the left-handed notification was not executed. This is because, as explained with reference to FIG. 106 (a), the special figure 1 does not have a time saving symbol, and when a left-handed strike is performed, suddenly the time-saving cannot be obtained. Not recommended. However, right-handed hitting is not recommended because it is extremely rare to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 when hitting right-handed. After all, it is a good idea not to fire the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that the left-handed notification is not executed even during the restoration display when a power failure occurs during the pullback period and the restoration is performed. Further, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 during this restoration, the left-handed notification is not executed. On the other hand, if a power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228 during the recovery display when the game is restored, a left-handed notification is executed. .. It should be noted that the left-handed notification during the recovery display may be notified by the left-handed display and the left-handed notification sound, as in the case of the left-handed notification described later in FIG. 114 or the like, or only the left-handed display is displayed. It may be, or it may be a notification that only notifies the left-handed notification sound. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" was stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "541".

In FIG. 113 (n), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 113 (n), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the special figure 2 Two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (o), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and even here, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "245".

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 113 step by step.

In FIG. 114 (a) following FIG. 113 (o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 114 (a), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one again, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure Only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (b), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and again, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "195".

In FIG. 114 (c), the last special figure 2 remaining hold symbol variable display is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol / holding number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 becomes 0, and the holding of the special figure 2 is held. No hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the end, in this example, the time is suddenly not won. rice field. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "261". The pullback period ends with FIG. 114 (d). In this example, the pullback period is the period of FIGS. 113 (j) to 114 (d). The pullback period is a period in which the length varies depending on the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 and the time length of the symbol variation display of each special figure.

In FIG. 114 (e), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed due to the end of the pull-back period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (e) displays a background (a white background without a pattern) representing a non-time saving gaming state. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed notification period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (e), the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character left-handed is written in a figure in which a left-pointing arrow is deformed. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 114 (e), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the newly displayed hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. In FIG. 114 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the hold icon display of the special figure 1 is displayed. Two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (g), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "923". Further, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is further increased by one, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 3, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 The third hold icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 114 (h), a new symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (i) displays the left-handed first display LH1. Left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is hidden. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the pullback period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within one symbol variation display depending on the time length of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, it may be displayed over multiple times of the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the left-handed notification period may be terminated by displaying the symbol variation a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or when the reservation of the special figure 1 is accumulated in a predetermined number (for example, one or four). You may try to do it. In such a case, the left-handed notification period becomes an indefinite period.

If a power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed notification period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the left-handed notification during the left-handed notification period may be performed only by the left-handed first display LH1 or may be performed only by the left-handed notification from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 114 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is further increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 4, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the display area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (j), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "729".

In FIG. 114 (k), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 114 (l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 of the normal drawing. That is, right-handed strike is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left-handed second display LH2 for prompting left-handed. This left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from that of the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period each time a right-handed hit is detected. In addition to displaying the left-handed second display LH2, the speaker 120 may perform left-handed notification (for example, return to left-handed).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the hold of the special figure 1 increases again, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x" in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the same time, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "924".

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 114. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 114 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 115, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 is only one. That is, in FIG. 115 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won only once. I didn't. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 1, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 115 (j), the state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 115 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold, which has only one, is immediately started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, right-handed strikes are detected (FIG. 115 (k)), but left-strike second display LH2 is not executed (FIG. 115 (l)). The display is completed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Even in this example, I didn't win suddenly in a short time. The pullback period ends with FIG. 115 (m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 115 (j) to FIG. 115 (m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 114. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 114. Further, even when the number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 114, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 115. It may be a withdrawal period.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 115, when the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a background (a white background with no pattern) indicating a non-time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. is doing. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, since the pullback period has ended, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 115 (n), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the same figure (o), the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued. is doing.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 step by step.

In FIG. 116 (a) following FIG. 115 (o), the pull-back period ends and the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows “decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In this example, a prize is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230 from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. However, I couldn't save the hold of Special Figure 1 because it wasn't done once. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 116 (a), and the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (b). Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (b). During this time, the player continued to hit left and aimed to win the special figure 1 starting port 230, but there was still no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the left-handed notification period ended soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears (FIG. 116 (c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no prize for the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. 116 (d), the special figure 1 starting port 230 is finally won, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is started, and the decorative design also starts to change display.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 116, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 116 (g)), as shown in FIG. The left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a stepwise example when there is no pullback period. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 114 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is four, and in the example shown in FIG. 115, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is one, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 117, the number of the remaining hold is one. Then, the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. That is, in FIG. 117 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won once. There was no. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (i) when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 0, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, when the state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 117 (j), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , The background of the castle town, which represents the time-saving game state, changes to the unpatterned background of the white background, which represents the non-time-saving game state. Further, instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 117 (j), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the following figure (k), the symbol of the special figure 1 is started. The variable display is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped. Also in the example shown in FIG. 117, as in the example shown in FIG. 116 above, from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. During that time, there was no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 could not be saved. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 117 (k), and in this example, the demo display is started after the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed ( During (for example, 30 seconds), the special figure 1 starting port 230 has not been awarded once, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the demo display. A symbol demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (l). In the demo display, the setting menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by operating the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 104. From the setting menu, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 can be adjusted. As shown in FIG. 117 (l), even after shifting to the demo display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed notification period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 117 (m), when the left-handed notification period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears. In this example, there is still no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. When the game ball is continuously fired while the demo display is displayed and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 117 (n)), as shown in the figure (o). In the demo display screen, the left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed. The left-handed notification in the demo display may output a sound together with the display, or may output only the sound instead of the display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 117, the symbol demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies even when the animation demo is displayed.

In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120, the right-handed notification can also be performed by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122. In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left-handed notification can also be performed by outputting voice from the speaker 120 or blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Further, the display mode is different between the left-handed first display LH1 during the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228. , The same display mode may be used. Further, although the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, they may be the same period length.

In addition, the notification of how to hit during restoration due to a power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, in the case of recovery during the pullback period, the left-handed notification is not executed even if the right-handed hit is detected. On the other hand, in the case of recovery during the symbol change of the special figure in the non-time saving game state, if the right-handed hit is detected, the left-handed hit notification is executed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102, the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102. The songs that can be selected vary depending on whether or not certain conditions are met. In the following description, the description regarding the establishment of the predetermined condition can be read as satisfying the predetermined condition, and the description regarding the failure of the predetermined condition can be read as not satisfying the predetermined condition. In this pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 103, it is possible to change the setting values having different jackpot probabilities. Normally, the player does not know which set value is set. Which set value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, the setting suggestion suggesting the set value is made by using the music. The above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied until a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state. Therefore, even if a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. That is, it is a predetermined condition that a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, instead of making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, or in addition to making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit will be made again. It may be that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villa). Alternatively, the player may win the most advantageous jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for a player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variation jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special figure B that is a 2R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions (special figure b that is a 3R normal jackpot)). It may be won, or it may be won in the big hit of the 10th consecutive villa, or it may be a case where the conditions favorable to the player are satisfied.

Also, instead of the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value, or in addition to the setting suggestion, a song that suggests that there is a hold that becomes a big hit again as a result of pre-reading in the hold during the big hit game (so-called hold consecutive villa). It may be a song that suggests a hit type (for example, whether or not there is a probability change, or a round promotion occurs, etc.), or it suggests that it is a big hit for the 10th consecutive villa. It may be a piece of music. Furthermore, if the suggestion of the game information by the music is the game information that the player cannot normally know, the suggestion content becomes useful.

FIG. 118 (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied.

When the music can be selected, it becomes a big hit game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state. Music cannot be selected while the symbol of the special figure is stopped, and therefore music cannot be selected even during the demo display. However, the music may be selected from the above-mentioned setting menu.

In addition, even if the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the music may be selectable.

Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected, so that the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied are five songs from the song 1 to the song 5. Music 1 is a default music, and when the RAM is cleared, this music 1 is set. Further, this music 1 is set every time the game shifts to the non-time saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 113, the music 1 is still set from the beginning, but if a music other than the music 1 is selected, the music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 113 (j).

FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and one song is selected by the internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. The result is selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in FIG. 118 (b) corresponds to the distribution rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs that suggest setting values. The music 6 is not a music that suggests a setting value like the music 1 to the music 5, but the music 7 is a music that suggests that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or more. If it is not set, it will not be selected. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the music is selected by lottery in the same manner even when the predetermined condition is satisfied for the second time and thereafter. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied multiple times, the same music may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs so that the songs selected once are not selected.

As described above, the number of songs described with reference to FIG. 118 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, the songs 1 to 5 may include the songs 6 to 8. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery, but based on the above relationship, even if a plurality of songs are selected by lottery and the player finally selects one song. good.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. Note that FIG. 118 (b) is referred to for the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the jackpot gaming state in FIG. 119 is the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied even once. That is.

In the non-time saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the music 1 to the music 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. .. Further, if the music 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the music 1 to the music 5 are released. Similarly, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving gaming state and cannot be selected by the operation of the player. That is, when the music 6 is released, when the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, the music names of the music 1 to the music 6 are displayed in order on the music selection display MC, and the music names of the music 6 are displayed. If the upper button 191 is operated while the button is on, the music title returns to the music title, and the music title of the music 7 or the music title of the music 8 is not displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the big hit game state started by winning the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), the music 1 to the music 5 Up to this point can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time saving game state. Further, if the music 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as the music 1 to the music 5. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 7 and the music 8 are not selected by lottery even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the music 7 and the music 8 are not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or 4, the music 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the music 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, the music 7 or the music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190. It can be selected by operating. As described above, in the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music 6 to the music 8 can be selected by the player after that if they are selected by one lottery. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly, when the music 6 is released and the music 7 and the music 8 cannot be selected, when the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, the music titles of the music 1 to the music 6 are displayed on the music selection display MC. It is displayed in order, and when the upper button 191 is operated while the song name of the song 6 is displayed, the song name returns to the song 1 and the song name of the song 7 and the song name of the song 8 are displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place. There is no such thing.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing step by step an example different from the example shown in FIG. 113, which continues from FIG. 113 (h).

Like the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (a) following from FIG. 113 (h) has a loss of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". The combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed.

Further, the third hold icon h23 shown in FIG. 120 (a) has changed from the default display mode to the gold display mode. On the drawing, the gold color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the gold display mode corresponds to a so-called look-ahead notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon is 75%.

In FIG. 120 (b), as in FIG. 113 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120.

Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time saving display mode is a display mode of a look-ahead notice that suggests that the player will suddenly win the time saving, and is the default display mode when the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state (special figure 2 has entered the digestion of the remaining hold). It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the look-ahead notice that suggests that the winner will be suddenly won in a short time will be started when the pullback period is started. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the second hold icon h22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols in “Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is executed. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of suddenly winning in a short time is 75% in the currently performed symbol variation display. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In FIG. 120 (e), the time saving symbol (special figure D) shown in FIG. 106 (b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (e), the characters of success are displayed, and three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols in a short time) shown in FIG. 106 (c) are stopped and displayed side by side. That is, it is notified that the winner was suddenly won in a short time. However, although the winner was suddenly won in a short time, the jackpot was not won, so the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Further, the mini-design is stopped and displayed not by the combination of the decoration 11 but by a specific combination of numbers (321). In addition, this specific combination is a combination that stops and displays only when a time-saving symbol that is not stopped and displayed is won at the time of loss or a big hit.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game shifts to a short time game without going through the big hit game. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 120 (f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 949" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 949 times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit due to the transition to the time-saving game state. In addition, the golden display mode icon, which has been the first hold icon h21, has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started here is 75%. The music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the music selection display MC is also started to be displayed.

In FIG. 120 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 120 (h), it develops into a super reach, the hold icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state such as "remaining 949". It's gone. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, the music A dedicated to the super reach is output instead of the music 1 that has been continuously output.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The combination is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". The big hit here is a big hit in the remaining hold of Special Figure 2, but the predetermined condition is not satisfied because the game was suddenly won in a short time and the game was changed to the short game state.

In FIG. 120 (j), the opening effect of the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the big hit. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. The lamp TL is turned off during the time reduction. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 that prompts right-handed is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit on the right side" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification voice saying "hit to the right".

Further, since it is a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition, at least music 1 to music 5 can be selected, and the music selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the big hit game. A display UD imitating the upper button 191 and the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and during the period when the music selection display MC is displayed, the upper button 191 or the music selection display MC is displayed. Music can be selected by operating the lower button 192. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (j), and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification. ing. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 120 (k), the first round is started and the right-handed second display RH2 disappears and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification voice is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has been started displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 1 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, Tonosama, shows swordsmanship along with music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. In addition, the music selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 120 (l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), and V prizes can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 where the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" prompting the V passage switch VS to pass the game ball is displayed, and the music video is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC disappears and is hidden. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, the music cannot be selected. The output of the music 1 is continued on the speaker 120, and the music moving image (animation according to the music 1 and the lyrics display of the music 1) corresponding to the music 1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the round in which the V prize can be obtained is started, the music video corresponding to the output music may be hidden.

In FIG. 120 (m), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V-winning has been won. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed. When the V prize notification is performed, the music moving image is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, although the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, the V prize notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together with the music 1, or the V prize notification sound may be output instead of the music 1. .. Also, even after winning the V prize, it is not possible to select songs until the end of the second round, but once the V prize is won, it is possible to select songs for the remaining period of the two rounds. You may.

In FIG. 120 (n), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the character display of the end of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the big hit game, and is also displayed in this end effect. Further, the music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect. However, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not display the music moving image (animation according to the music 1 and the lyrics display of the music 1) corresponding to the music 1. Further, in the end effect, the display of the music selection display MC is restarted, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, the end effect may also be such that the music cannot be selected as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. As described above, it is not possible to select music during a part of the jackpot game that is started without satisfying the predetermined conditions. That is, it is not possible to select music in a part of the period such as the period for aiming for V prize, the execution period of the opening effect of the big hit game, the execution period of the end effect of the big hit game, and the period of the interval between rounds. The music selection display MC may be hidden during the period when the music cannot be selected, but the music selection display MC may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, it may be possible to select a song even during a part of the period, but in that case, the song selection display MC (display UD imitating the song name and the upper button 191 and the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190) is regulated ( Erasing) is preferable. Further, even during the period when the music cannot be selected, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192.

However, music selection is performed for the entire period during the jackpot game that was started without satisfying the predetermined conditions (for example, the entire period from the start of the opening effect of the jackpot game to the end of the end effect of the jackpot game). You may be able to do it. In this case, the music selection display MC may be continuously displayed for the entire period, or the music selection display MC may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a round in which a V prize can be obtained.

Further, during the period in which the super reach shown in FIG. 120 (h) is performed, the music cannot be selected. Further, as shown in FIGS. 120 (a), 120 (c), and (i), the music cannot be selected even while the symbol of the special figure is stopped. It should be noted that the music cannot be selected even when the specific mode is set or the setting menu is displayed. The specific mode referred to here may be a look-ahead mode in which a look-ahead notice may be performed. Alternatively, it may be a mode in which a specific music is played. Since a specific song is being played, it is prohibited to change to another song.

By hitting right during the jackpot game, he also won a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232, and up to 4 special figure 2 holds have been accumulated. When the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the hold of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is exhausted, and the variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (o), the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 119" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 119 times. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 120 (o) are also lit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed is also displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120. The music 1 may be output from the beginning when the jackpot game ends, or may be output from the continuation at the time when the jackpot game ends. In this way, the same music as in the big hit game state is output even in the normal game state (more specifically, the time saving game state) which is the non-big hit game state, but the big hit game state started when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. However, in the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the movie of the same animation as the song movie corresponding to the song 1 displayed in the jackpot game state.

In the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game started without satisfying the predetermined condition (in the example shown in FIG. 120, the state after the figure (o)), the music can be selected. However, the decorative symbol is confirmed after the period when the super reach is performed, the stop display period when the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed (it can also be seen as the stop display period of the special symbol), or after the super reach is started. Music cannot be selected in a predetermined period such as a period until the display is performed. Even during such a period in which music cannot be selected, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. It should be noted that the music may be selected over the entire period of the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the music selection display MC may be continuously displayed for the entire period, or the music selection display MC may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a period during which super reach is being performed or a stop display period. good.

FIG. 121 shows step by step an example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is finished is a gold display mode. It is a figure.

In the example shown in FIG. 120, the third hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed is the gold display mode, but in this example, the first The hold icon h21 of is a gold display mode. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 120 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the golden display mode shown in FIG. 121 (a) is the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode when the digestion of the remaining hold in FIG. 2 is started (when the pullback period is started). (See FIG. 121 (b)).

Here, showing the result of pre-reading, the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon h0 in the gold display mode) that is currently performed is a jackpot symbol variation display. Further, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 121 (b)) to be started next, the winner is suddenly won in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since the jackpot is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to this first hold icon h21 is performed in the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state acquired by the jackpot. In order to give priority to the time-saving game status acquired by the big hit instead of updating the time-saving suddenly, the winning of the time-saving is invalidated. Therefore, unlike the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 120 (b), the first hold icon h21 is not displayed in the time saving display mode, and in FIG. 121 (b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. Has been done. That is, even if there is a hold scheduled to be won in the time-saving symbol, if there is a hold to win the jackpot before the hold is exhausted, the pre-reading notice for the time-saving symbol is prohibited.

In FIG. 121 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 121 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 in place of the music 1 that has been continuously output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. is doing. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 121 (f), the opening effect of the big hit game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is notified that the music 8 has been selected by lottery. Further, the music 8 is output from the speaker 120. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and a player who knows this can know that the pachinko machine 100 currently playing is a high setting pachinko machine. Further, the music 8 is a music that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare music because the selection rate is low, and the music 8 can be heard. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (f) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 "strikes to the right" together with the music 8. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 121 (g), the first round is started and the right-handed second display RH2 disappears and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 8 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has been started displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 8 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho decides a pose according to the music 8, and the lyrics of the music 8 are also displayed. The lyrics display of the music 1 without setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 120 (k) and 120 (l) is the character display of the first color (for example, the black character display), but the lyrics display of the music 8 suggesting a high setting. Is a second color character display (for example, gold character display). The lyrics display of the music 7 may be a character display of a third color (for example, a red character display). Further, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 121 (g).

In FIG. 121 (h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 121, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The output of the music 8 is continued on the speaker 120, and the music moving image (animation according to the music 8 and the lyrics display of the music 8) corresponding to the music 8 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the round in which the V prize can be obtained is started, the music video corresponding to the output music may be hidden.

In FIG. 121 (i), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V prize has been won, and the music moving image is hidden. In addition, the music selection determination display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 121 (j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD has been resumed. Further, the music 8 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 121 (k), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 8 is displayed in the time-saving game state is also started. That is, there is a period during which the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected even in the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the big hit is won with the remaining hold of Special Figure 2). .. The music 8 may be output from the beginning when the jackpot game ends, or may be output from the continuation at the time when the jackpot game ends. In this way, the same music as in the big hit game state is output even in the normal game state (more specifically, the time saving game state) which is the non-big hit game state, but the big hit game state started when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Unlike the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display a moving image having the same animation as the musical piece moving image corresponding to the musical piece 8.

In FIG. 121 (l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8”. .. The stopped symbol change display of the special figure 2 is the hold symbol change display represented by the first hold icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (the time when the pullback period is started). be. As mentioned above, it was originally a symbol variation display that was suddenly won in a short time, but since the jackpot with a time reduction was won first, the time reduction symbol is not stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Does not shift to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time-saving symbol is restricted in the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed even in the time-saving game state.

The display of the music selection display MC displayed in FIG. 121 (k) disappears during the stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the time-saving game state, the period during which the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected is limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the music cannot be selected while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, during the stop display of the decorative symbol, only the display of the music selection display MC disappears, and the music output from the speaker 120 is operated by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102. It may be possible to select with.

In the figure (m) following FIG. 121 (l), the number of times of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state is reduced by one, the character of "remaining 118" is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the music selection display is started. The MC display has been resumed. Subsequently, in FIG. 121 (n), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is hidden again.

Further, in FIG. 121 (o), the number of time-saving game state remaining number of times display is further reduced by one, the character of "remaining 117" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The display of the music selection display MC displaying the music title of the music 8 has also started, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120.

In the example shown in FIG. 121, in the jackpot game state started when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a musical piece moving image corresponding to the music output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a part of the period. Although it may be displayed, in the big hit game state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music movie corresponding to the music being output is displayed for a part or the whole period, and in the big hit game state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is being output. The music video corresponding to the music may not be displayed for the entire period. Or vice versa, in the jackpot game state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music video corresponding to the music being output is not displayed for the entire period, and in the jackpot game state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music video corresponding to the music being output is not displayed. May be displayed for a part or all of the period.

Further, in the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the example shown in FIG. 121, FIGS. (K) to (o)), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition to the no stop display period (which can also be seen as the stop display period of the special figure), it is not possible to select music even during the period when super reach is being performed. Even during the period when music cannot be selected, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, it may be possible to select music over the entire period of the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state. In this case, the music selection display MC may be continuously displayed for the entire period, or the music selection display MC may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a period during which super reach is being performed or a stop display period. good.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 is not operated even if the music selection display MC is displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 122, the operation key unit 190 is operated. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 121 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the last special symbol symbol variation display capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is displayed. Is finished.

In FIG. 122 (b), as in FIG. 113 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 1 is displayed has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 122 (c), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the music title of the music 2 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from pressing the upper button 191, the music 2 is displayed from the speaker 120. Output starts. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after operating the operation key unit 190. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music name of the music on the music selection display MC is also changed, and the music output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Further, even before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music may be determined if the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed.

In FIG. 122 (e), a reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the following figure (f), it develops into a super reach. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Then, the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

In FIG. 122 (h), the opening effect of the big hit game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 6 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD. Further, the music 6 is output from the speaker 120. Music 6 is a music that does not suggest a setting. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (h) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 "strikes to the right" together with the music 6. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 122 (i), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 6 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 6 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the bancho of the learning style decides a pose according to the music 6, and the lyrics of the music 6 are also displayed. Further, also in FIG. 122 (i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 122 (j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 122, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 6.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VS and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. 122 (k), the end effect of the big hit game is started. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Further, the music 6 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 122 (l), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Since there was no V prize, the probability change state was not reached, and the high probability middle lamp HL remained off.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 6 is displayed is started in the time-saving game state. That is, music selection becomes possible. From the speaker 120, the music 6 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 122 (m), the music selection operation is actually performed, and the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (n), the music name of the default music 1 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and when the music 1 is determined after the lapse of a predetermined time, the output of the music 1 is output from the speaker 120. It will be started. In this example, the music 7 and 8 are not released, and the music 6 is returned to the music 1.

In addition, when a specific operation (for example, a pressing operation of the lower button 192, a long pressing operation of the OK button, etc.) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 122 (h)), it is predetermined. Even if the condition is not satisfied, the music 6 may be released. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting suggestion music.

FIG. 122 (l') is a modification of the figure (l) following the figure (k). Also in FIG. 122 (l'), the time-saving game state is entered, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. And the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Further, since the music 6 is selected by lottery when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 is continuously output from the jackpot game from the speaker 120. However, the music selection display MC is not displayed, and music selection is not possible. In this modification, in the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output from the speaker 120 is output to the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102. There is no period that can be selected by operating. In the time-saving game state, the music selection determination display MD may be displayed, and the music selected by lottery may be output from the speaker 120. In this modification, the music cannot be selected by the player's operation until the time-saving game state is completed.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without satisfying a predetermined condition.

FIG. 123 (a) is different from the previous examples of FIG. 121, in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed in the non-time saving game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is equipped with “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white background without a pattern representing a non-time saving gaming state. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is a gold display mode. Further, the short-time medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all turned off. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 123 (a).

In FIG. 123 (b), the reserved symbol variation display represented by the first hold icon h11 in the gold display mode is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started. Has been done. Further, in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 123 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 123 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of the music 1. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variation jackpot (special figure a) is won. There is. Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining hold, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 123 (f), the opening effect of the big hit game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 123 (f), the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification.

In FIG. 123 (g), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music video in which the main character's lord appears according to the music 1 is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 123 (h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times in the middle of the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in the order of the music name of the music 2, the music name of the music 3, the music name of the music 4, and the music name of the music 5. The music selection display MC in which the music title of the music is displayed is displayed, and the music video with the lyrics display corresponding to the music 5 is displayed. Further, the music 5 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (k) where the second round is started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. The video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a song is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the song.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (l) at which the third round of the final round is started, the music selection display MC disappears and the music cannot be selected. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a musical composition moving image with lyrics display corresponding to the musical composition 1. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (m), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the V prize that the V prize has been won, and the music moving image is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has been resumed. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (o), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed is continuously displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the big hit game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not continuously output, and the music is restarted after being interrupted, or the non-time saving. When the game is switched to the game state or the time-saving game state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

Further, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the music moving image corresponding to the music being output is displayed in the big hit game state, and in the normal game state (non-big hit game state), more specifically, in the time-saving game state, Even if the same music as the music output in the jackpot game state is output, the animation video having the same animation as the displayed music video is not displayed, and the effect display according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of super reach) is displayed. That is, in the normal gaming state (non-big hit gaming state), no matter which song is selected, the effect display according to the fluctuation pattern (effect display not corresponding to the output song) is displayed. However, if it is a full rotation reach or a special super (SPSP) reach, the same music video as the music video displayed in the jackpot game state may be displayed. Alternatively, a music movie corresponding to the music may be displayed although the animation is different. A reach pattern such as a music reach is prepared in the super reach, and in this music reach, an animation of an animation different from the animation of the music video displayed in the jackpot game state is displayed.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of music reach step by step.

FIG. 124 (a) is an example following FIG. 121 (o). Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (a), the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in the special map high probability normal map high probability state. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 124 (a) are also lit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the music selection display MC in which the music title of "music 8" is displayed is also displayed, and the music 8 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 124 (b), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 124 (c), it develops into a super reach, the hold icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state such as "remaining 117". It's gone. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, instead of the music 8 that has been continuously output, the words of the lord, such as "Drinking comparison", which announces the development to super reach, are output.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 124 (d) to 124 (g), an animation of a drinking comparison scene is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the music 1 which is a reach music for drinking and comparing. That is, the drink comparison reach is a music reach in which the music 1 is always output. On the decorative pattern display device 208, the lyrics of the music 1 are displayed together with the animation of the drinking comparison scene. Music reach is prepared in addition to this drinking comparison reach, and a music that can be output in a big hit game state may be adopted as a music reach music. However, the animation of the music video displayed in the jackpot game state and the animation of the reach production video displayed in the music reach are different.

In FIG. 124 (h), the temporary stop display of the super reach effect by the drink comparison reach is performed, and the three "decoration 7" are swayed and displayed. The music 1 which is a reach music for drinking and comparing is output from the speaker 120.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (i), the effect of the reach compared to drinking is completed, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. The output of the music 1 from the speaker 120 has also ended due to the end of the drink comparison reach production.

Of the songs 1 to 5, the music used for the music reach may be only the music 1 or all the music 1 to 5. Alternatively, only two songs, music 1 and music 2, may be used. In the music reach, a moving image corresponding to the output music is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time saving state.

FIG. 125 (a) is a modification of the list of songs shown in FIG. 118 (a), and is a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time saving state in which a predetermined condition is not yet satisfied. That is, the music list shown in FIG. 118 (a) is a music list common to the normal gaming state and the jackpot gaming state, which are non-big hit gaming states, and the normal gaming state includes the non-time saving gaming state and the time saving gaming state. ing. In the music list shown in FIG. 118 (a), music 1 to music 5 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102.

On the other hand, only in the non-time-saving gaming state among the normal gaming states, the list shown in FIG. 125 (a) is used instead of the list shown in FIG. 118 (a). In the list shown in FIG. 125 (a), in addition to the music 1 to the music 5, the music 6α can be selected. This music 6α is a music shown in FIG. 118 (a) in which the mode of the music 6 that can be selected in the jackpot game that is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied is changed. Specifically, the music 6 is a music having lyrics as shown in FIGS. 122 (i) to 122 (j), but the music 6α does not include the lyrics, that is, the instrumental of the so-called music 6 (no lyrics). ) It's a song. The relationship between the music 6 and the music 6α is not limited to this, and the music 6α may be a music obtained by removing the deep bass or the sound effect from the music 6, or conversely, the music 6 has the heavy bass or the sound effect. It may be an added song, a song in which the tempo of the song 6 is changed, or a song in which the tone of the song 6 is changed (for example, a song in which the pop tone is changed to the lap tone). good. Further, in the present embodiment, the music 6α is provided, but instead of the music 6α, an instrumental (no lyrics) music (for example, music 1α) of a music other than the music 6 (for example, music 1 or music 8) is provided. Music 8α, etc.) may be provided, and in addition to music 6α, instrumental (no lyrics) music (for example, music 1α, music 8α, etc.) of music other than music 6 (for example, music 1 or music 8). May be provided.

FIG. 125 (b) is a modification of the list of songs shown in FIG. 119, and is a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time saving state after a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, in the music list shown in FIG. 119, it is a list that can be replaced with the list of the upper "non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state)". In the list shown in FIG. 125 (b), in addition to the music 1 to the music 5, the music 6α can also be selected without the released condition. Therefore, regardless of whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not, the music 6α can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 in the non-time saving gaming state in the normal gaming state. If the opposite is returned, this music 6α cannot be selected in the case of a big hit game state, or even in a normal game state but in a time-saving game state. In the big hit game state where the predetermined condition is satisfied and started, the music 6 may be selected by lottery, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 can be selected on condition that it has been released.

The music 6α may be selectable (outputtable) as long as it is in a normal gaming state, regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not. That is, it may be selectable (output possible) even in the time-saving game state.

Further, the music 6α may be selectable (outputtable) in the big hit game state or the time-saving game state after the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, all the songs (songs 1 to 5 and 6α) that can be output in the non-time saving game state, and all the songs (songs 1 to 8) that can be output in the big hit game state regardless of whether the predetermined conditions are satisfied or not. Are partially different, but all may be different.

Further, when a highly expected reach (for example, super reach) is executed in a normal gaming state, a certain element (song, deep bass, etc.) is added to a certain music Nα from a certain music Nα (for example, music 6α). It may be changed to the additional music N (for example, music 6) to which is added. By doing this, it is possible to further excite the reach with high expectations.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state (non-big hit game state) after the end of the big hit game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied, more specifically, in the time-saving game state, the output is in the big hit game state started when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The music that has been played may continue to be output, and the music may not be selectable.

In addition, the lyrics of the song being output may be displayed during the big hit game, and the lyrics of the song being output may not be displayed in the normal game state (non-big hit game state), or more specifically, in the time-saving game state. be. However, this relationship may be limited to a specific song.

Further, even in the normal game state (non-big hit game state), more specifically, in the time-saving game state, the lyrics of the music may be displayed as long as it is in full rotation reach or special super (SPSP) reach, and it is predetermined. In the big hit game started when the condition is satisfied, the lyrics of the music being output may not be displayed.

Further, even during the jackpot game, a part of the period (for example, the period during which the V aim notification is performed, the period during which the jackpot game start effect is performed, and the period during which the jackpot game end effect is performed). The lyrics of the music may not be displayed during a specific period such as).

In addition, the lyrics of the music being output are displayed during the jackpot game started without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and the lyrics of the music being output are not displayed during the jackpot game started with the predetermined conditions satisfied. You may do so. In some cases, the opposite is true, during the jackpot game that is started without satisfying the predetermined conditions, the lyrics of the song being output are not displayed, and during the jackpot game that is started when the predetermined conditions are met, The lyrics of the song being output may be displayed.

Further, the music selection can be changed by one operation of the operation means such as the up button 191 or the down button 192, but the volume and the amount of light are not changed by one operation. That is, when the volume / light amount is operated once, the current value is displayed by the current value call display, and the value (current value) is changed only when the current value is operated twice.

In addition, various modes are available, such as a no-look-ahead mode in which no look-ahead notice is given, and a premier UP mode in which a premier effect is likely to appear. When an operation is performed, the new selection mode is not reflected from the running symbol variation display, but is reflected from the next symbol variation display, or after the currently stored hold is exhausted. .. On the other hand, the music selection is reflected from the symbol fluctuation display being executed.

Further, the predetermined condition regarding the music selection was that the jackpot was won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving gaming state. For example, the jackpot of the 10R jackpot was won. During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIGS. 123 (h) and FIG. 123 (j), and during the big hit game of 2R jackpot, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 121 (f). May be good.

The present invention can also be applied to a so-called type-two-type mixer in which a small hit is made in a short-time gaming state and a big hit is obtained by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in the first gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a bonus gaming state, an ART state].
The sound output means is in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), normal gaming state (non-big hit gaming state)]. It can output music,
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. In the game state, the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, the period of FIGS. 123 (f) to 123 (k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed. ], And
In the first gaming state when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIGS. 122 (h) to the same. In the period shown in FIG. (K), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],.
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operating means [for example, The music selection display MC is displayed in FIG. 123 (o), and the music selection display MC is displayed during the period from FIG. 121 (k) to FIG. There is a period]
Even in the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operating means [. For example, the period from FIG. 122 (l) to FIG. 122 (n) is the period during which the music selection display MC is displayed, and the selection operation is actually performed in FIG. 122 (m)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to disable music selection and suggest that the current music is a special music (for example, a music suggesting information). On the other hand, in the second game state, by providing a period during which music can be selected, it becomes possible to proceed with the game using music according to the player's preference, and the interest of the game can be improved. You may be able to do it.

The predetermined condition may be that the player wins a game state that is advantageous to the player as a result of the lottery (the same applies to the following).

Further, the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied are the same games even though they are the first gaming states. It may be in a state (for example, the same 2R jackpot gaming state) or in a different gaming state (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state and a 2R jackpot gaming state) (the same applies below).

Further, the number of first songs that can be output by the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be different from the number of second songs that can be output by the sound output means (the same applies to the following).

In addition, in the above explanation,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in the first gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a bonus gaming state, an ART state].
The sound output means is in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), normal gaming state (non-big hit gaming state)]. It can output music,
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. In the game state, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 123 (f) to FIG. (K) in which the music selection display MC is displayed]. There is
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIGS. 122 (h) to FIG. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operating means [ For example, in FIG. 123 (o), the music selection display MC is displayed, and in the period from FIG. 121 (k) to FIG. It is the displayed period],
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operating means [. For example, FIG. 122 (l')],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, music selection is disabled, and the current music is a special music (for example, a music suggesting information). It can be emphasized that it is, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

again,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a pre-reading result during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot normally know (the same applies to the following).

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. be,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in the first gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a bonus gaming state, an ART state].
The sound output means can output music in a second gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (non-big hit gaming state), more specifically, a non-time saving gaming state].
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. In the game state, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 123 (f) to FIG. (K) in which the music selection display MC is displayed]. There is
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIGS. 122 (h) to FIG. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
A certain music [for example, the music 6α shown in FIG. 125] that can be output by the sound output means in the second gaming state is the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Can be output by the sound output means in the first number of songs that can be output [for example, songs 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 118 (a)] and in the first gaming state when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is a music that is not included in the music of the second number of music [for example, the music 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 118 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

Since the music that can be output differs depending on the game state, the variation of the game increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is possible to output a music (additional music) to which an element in a certain music that can be output in the second gaming state is added, which is relatively advantageous for the player. It is possible to make a certain first game state more exciting. It should be noted that a certain song and an additional song are different songs.

The certain music may be a specific music (for example, an instrumental music (without lyrics)).

Further, all the music that can be output by the sound output means in the second gaming state and all the music that can be output by the sound output means in the first gaming state regardless of whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. , Some may be different, or all may be different.

again,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a pre-reading result during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in the first gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a bonus gaming state, an ART state].
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. In the game state, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 123 (f) to FIG. (K) in which the music selection display MC is displayed]. There is
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIGS. 122 (h) to FIG. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
Even in the first gaming state when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the first period in the first gaming state [for example, a period aiming for a V prize, an execution period of an opening effect of a jackpot game, a jackpot In the execution period of the end effect of the game, the period of the interval between rounds], the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected by using the operation means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The first period may include a period during which important notifications are being made, and by making the music unselectable, it is possible to reduce the player from missing the important notifications. You can expect it.

The important notification referred to here is, for example, a notification that the big hit game is started, a notification that the period aiming at the V prize during the big hit game is started, and a notification that the big hit game is finished. When the big hit game starts, the period aiming for V prize starts, or the big hit game ends, the way of hitting changes, so these important notifications are notifications that the way of hitting changes, or hitting. It may be a notification related to the change.

The first period may be, for example, a period in which the V aim notification is performed, a period in which the start effect of the big hit game is performed, or the end effect of the big hit game. It may be a period during which the menu is displayed, or it may be a period during which the menu is displayed.

again,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a pre-reading result during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in the first gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a bonus gaming state, an ART state].
The sound output means is in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), normal gaming state (non-big hit gaming state)]. It can output music,
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. In the game state, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 123 (f) to FIG. (K) in which the music selection display MC is displayed]. There is
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIGS. 122 (h) to FIG. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
The display means is a period during which the first music [for example, music 6 or music 8] is output from the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied [for example, FIG. 122. A moving image corresponding to the first musical piece is displayed in a part or all of the period (i) to the period of the figure (k) or the period of the figure 121 (f) to the figure (j)]. Yes [For example, FIGS. 122 (i) to (j) and 121 (g) to (h)],
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music for the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state [for example,. FIG. 120 (o)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the first game state (for example, a big hit game), the game can be excited by displaying a moving image corresponding to the first song together with the output of the first song, and the second game state (for example, the second game state). For example, in a normal game state (non-big hit game state) or a more limited time-saving game state), the output of the first song is used to aurally excite the game, but the moving image corresponding to the first song is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the visual obstruction of the variation effect that informs whether or not the player wins.

The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music for the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state. May be good.

Further, the sound output means may be capable of outputting the first number of songs in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the first song may be the first song. It is a song included in the first number of songs. Further, the sound output means may be capable of outputting a second number of songs in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second number of songs may be. The number of songs may be different from the number of the first songs.

In the moving image corresponding to the first music, although the first music is output, the moving image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (for example, reach pattern) and the first music are continuously output. Moving images unrelated to the first piece of music are not included. On the other hand, the moving image (for example, the moving image of the music reach described with reference to FIG. 124) in which the first music is output and the lyrics of the first music are also displayed corresponds to the first music. Included in moving images. For a specific music (for example, music 1) due to the music reach, a moving image corresponding to the specific music is displayed in the second gaming state, but a music other than the specific music (first music). Then, in the second gaming state, the moving image corresponding to the first musical piece is not displayed.

Further, even if the display means does not display a moving image of the same animation as the moving image for the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state. good.

again,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a pre-reading result during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

again,
"The music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means during the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "notification means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, frame lamp 122, etc.].
In the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means is a first notification for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the first game area [for example, a left-handed notification such as a left-handed first display LH1 or a left-handed second display LH2]. ] May be executed,
When the first condition [for example, there are four remaining reservations in FIG. 2] is satisfied when the notification means shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
The first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a period (pull-back period), and the first notification is not executed in the period of FIG. 113 (j) to FIG. (O) to FIG. 114 (d) [for example, FIG. 113 (l)]. ,
After the end of the first period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed first display] is performed over the second period [for example, the left-handed notification period in FIGS. 114 (e) to 114 (h)]. LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In the second period, the first notification is always executed.

Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification even when the power is cut off during the first period and then the power is restored.

again,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] has a second condition [for example, there is only one remaining hold of special figure 2] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. If so,
In the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 115 (j) to FIG. (M)] shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification is given. [For example, FIG. 115 (l)],
After the end of the third period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIGS. 115 (n) to FIG. For example, the left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"When the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] does not satisfy the first condition and the second condition when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, Special Figure 2 When the remaining hold is 0], the second period [for example, the period of FIG. 117 (j) to FIG. (L)] after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. When one notification [for example, left-handed notification of the left-handed first display LH1] is executed [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 117, or the special figure 2 remaining hold is 2 or 3 In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"A second starting port [for example, the second special drawing starting port 232] arranged in the second gaming area [for example, the right side area], and
A second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 2] based on the winning of the second start port. When,
Equipped with
The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] provides a second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving gaming state. It ’s something to do,
The notification means provides a hold number notification [for example, a number notification in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 at the lower left of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284] indicating the hold number of the second symbol variation display. It ’s something to do,
The notification means is executing the final second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “last second symbol variation display”) in the time-saving gaming state [for example, FIGS. 113 (f) to FIG. In h)], a third notification [for example, right-handed second display RH2] is executed, which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the launch of the game ball toward the second game area. It is a thing
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second symbol variation display, while the pending number has been executed before the last second symbol variation display is started. A game table characterized in that the notification is executed without changing the notification mode [for example, FIGS. 113 (f) to 113 (h)]. 』\
Was also explained.

In the final second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the hold of the second symbol variation display is stored. First, since the hold number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, the player can confirm the hold number of the second symbol variation display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the launch of the game ball toward the second gaming area and prevent the player from losing money.

It should be noted that the notification means may always execute the third notification during the execution of the last second symbol variation display.

Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the second period, the notification means said that the game ball was detected to be launched toward the second gaming area. It executes one notification,
In the first period, the notification means does not execute the first notification even if it is detected that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

again,
"The first starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230] arranged in the first gaming area [for example, the left side area] and
The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 1] based on the winning of the first start port. When,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means may not stop and display the time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 106 (b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a thing
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 120 (e)].
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the game shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 120 (f)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in the same non-time saving game state, in the second symbol variation display, if there is a hold, the time saving symbol may be won, and the time saving game state is returned again as compared with the case where there is no hold. There is a high possibility of migration. Therefore, the first notification is not performed to prevent the player from unnecessarily aiming at the first starting port.

In addition, a look-ahead notice means capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is provided.
In the look-ahead notice means, a hold that is digested before the hold of the second symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays the time-saving symbol is won as a kind of jackpot. If so, the look-ahead notice may not be executed for the second hold.

Further, when the hold to be digested before the second hold is won in the probabilistic jackpot, even if the second hold is digested after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the time saving based on the time saving symbol is used. It may not shift to the gaming state.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and even if the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Further, when the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving gaming state is already in place.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. 102. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown are not provided.

As described above, this enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the ball is paid out. It may be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Here, FIG. 126 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 126), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

It should be noted that the predetermined conditions for selecting music are that if the slot machine 1000 is shown in FIG. 126, the bonus of the n consecutive villas is won, and that a specific symbol (for example, 7 red symbols) is aligned and the bonus is won. Winning a bonus with all the symbols on the winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT of the 10th consecutive villa, winning the predetermined number of sets or adding the predetermined number of games, predetermined It is possible to win an AT that has the same role as.

Further, in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 126, the jackpot gaming state in the examples shown in FIGS. 113 to 123 is a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, and the like. In addition, the time-saving gaming state becomes the ART state, the AT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, and becomes the AT state, the RT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the ART state. ..

Further, the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, but it may be reset when the power failure recovery is performed across the dates, or even if the dates are crossed, a certain specific time (for example, for example). It may not be reset if the power is restored by 6 am).

Further, when the music is restored from the power failure, the preset initial music is selected as the selected music.

In the above description,
"Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120] and
Operation means [for example, operation key unit 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output music in a first advantageous state [for example, a jackpot game state, a bonus game state, an ART state].
The first advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of predetermined AT start conditions (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The number of first songs that can be output by the sound output means in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. 78 (a), "5 or more and 8 or less" if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once (FIG. 79). (See)] and the number of second songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 78 (b). Unlike the one song "1"]
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

The first gaming state when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied and the first gaming state when the predetermined conditions are satisfied are the same games even though they are the first gaming states. It may be in a state (for example, the same 2R jackpot gaming state) or in a different gaming state (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state and a 2R jackpot gaming state).

again,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a pre-reading result during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A game console equipped with a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music.
The sound output means can output music in a first advantageous state [for example, a jackpot game state, a bonus game state, an ART state].
The first advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of the predetermined AT start condition (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The first number of songs that can be output by the sound output means in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. 118 (a), "5 or more and 8 or less" if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once (FIG. 119). (See)] and the number of second songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 118 (b). Different from one song "1"],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs is different from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, so that the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

again,
"The number of the second music [for example, 1] is smaller than the number of the first music [for example, 5 or more and 8 or less].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

again,
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
The sound output means can output music even in the second advantageous state.
The second advantageous state is a state advantageous for the player, which is different from the first advantageous state [for example, when the time-saving gaming state and the first advantageous state are the bonus gaming states. ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state when the first advantageous state is ART state],
In the second advantageous state, the display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (i), FIG. 121 (k). -Same figure (o)],
In the first advantageous state, the display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 121 (g) to (h), 123 (g)). -Same figure (k)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the first advantageous state, the game can be excited by displaying the moving image together with the output of the music, and in the second advantageous state, the game can be excited by the output of the music, for example. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect of notifying whether or not the player is elected from being disturbed.

again,
"Game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a jackpot as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the jackpot game, the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by suggesting game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot normally know.

again,
"The operation means [for example, the operation key unit 190] is provided.
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 123 (h) and FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 122 (h)). The music selection decision display MD shown in the above is displayed and cannot be selected].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the music cannot be selected in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (a music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display means may be provided and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing a music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display means may be capable of displaying the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state.
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first music [for example, music 7 or music 7 or] can be selected by the player in a certain advantageous state [for example, a jackpot gaming state or a time-saving gaming state] after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music 8] is added, and the first music can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first music cannot be selected in the normal gaming state [for example, non-time saving gaming state]. It may be [for example, FIG. 119].

In the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot gaming state] for a part of the period [for example, the round in which the V prize can be obtained (final round)], the music cannot be selected by using the operating means. You may.

A part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, the time-saving game state] [for example, in the period of super reach, the period in which the symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed, the period in which the demo display is executed, or the demo display. The period during which the menu display is executed] may also be in a mode in which music cannot be selected using the operation means.

Alternatively, there may be a mode in which music cannot be selected using the operating means during a part of the normal gaming state [for example, non-time saving gaming state].

Further, when the power is cut off while the music is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial music may be treated as the selected music.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during a special game (for example, a big hit game).
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1,
The specific number is less than the predetermined number,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
It is possible to output a predetermined number of songs even during an advantageous game (for example, a time-saving game).
During the special game, the video according to the type of the music being output is displayed, but during the advantageous game, the video according to the type of the music being output is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 3.
The music output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied may suggest the predetermined information related to the game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 4.
The player can select the music to be output using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the player outputs the music using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music cannot be selected,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 6)
The non-time saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the first gaming area (left area).
The time-saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the second gaming area (right area).
If the first condition is met when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
Restricts the execution of the first hitting method notification (left-handed notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
After the end of the first period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table that features that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console described in Appendix 6
If the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
In the second period, which is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the execution of the first striking method notification is restricted.
A game table characterized in that after the second period is completed, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 6 or 7.
If the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
After shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be executed over the third period.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 8.
The first condition is to memorize the first number of special hold.
The second condition is to memorize the special second hold of the second number, which is less than the first number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 9.
When shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, the second hitting method notification (right-handed notification) is executed to notify that the second game area should be fired.
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third hitting method notification (holding storage notification) that notifies that the second game area should be fired in a mode different from the second hitting method notification that was executed in the fluctuation before the final change. While executing, the number hold is displayed in the same manner as the number hold displayed in the change before the final change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 10.
In the special game judgment based on the special one in the non-time saving game state, the special symbol (time saving symbol) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special two (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time saving game state, the said You may win a special design,
A game table characterized in that when the special symbol is won, the game shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a special game.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be referred to as another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 208 Decorative pattern display device 190 Operation key unit 191 Up button 192 Down button MC Music selection display MD Music selection decision display TL Time saving Medium lamp RL Right-handed display lamp HL High accuracy middle lamp

Claims (2)

A sound output means that can output music,
Operation means and
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The sound output means can output a musical piece in the first gaming state.
The sound output means can output music in the second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means.
The display means is a part or all of the period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the first music is It displays a moving image according to
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music for the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1.
It is possible to suggest game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A game table featuring that.

Images